TH£ SPALDING OFFICIAL No. J, 

Intercollegiate Foot Ball. 

Adopted for the Second Year by the IntercoUegiate AssociatioxL 




Us^<l exclusively in ZiU Czwroes of ibe Associziiion. 

Price, $5.00. 

EACH BALL PACKED IN SEPARATE BOX AND SEALED. 

MANUFACTURED BY 

fl. Q. SPflLPlNG & PRO?., ! '="'^5S°Abru^HrA°.'"'- 



, SPALDING'S 

! SPORTING 



RULFS 



COM pile: 13 3V 
J^ME:S K. SUL.LIVA1SI 



CONTAINING THE OFFICIAL RULES FOR THE 
GOVERNMENT OF ALL SPORTS. 



rAPft2di8ii4 ) 



PUBLISHED KV ^-vj^**" WASH^'* 



.^? 



American Sports Publishing Cc/J^'^ 

241 Broadway, N. Y. 



J 






Entered according to Act of Conress, in the year i894, by 
The American Sports Publishing Co., 

IN THE OFFICE OF THE LIBRARIAN OF CONGRESS, AT WASHINGTON. 



/ 



//4 



IIM DEX 



Xl^ 





PAGE. 


A. A. U. General Kules, .... 


5 


A. A. U. Athletic Kules, .... 


. 12 


Archery, ...... 


28 


Basket Ball, 


30 


Badminton, ...... 


35 


Betting, ...... 


39 


Bicycling, ...... 


42 


BoayIs, ...... 


56 


Skittles, 


61 


Bowling, ...... 


. 62 


-Xing— A. A. U. Kules, .... 


65 


Marquis of Queensbury Kules, 


68 


London Prize King Kules, 


69 


oadsword (Mounted) Rules, 


. . 74 


Canoeing, ...... 


75 


Cricket, 


82 


Croquet, ...... 


88 


Court Tennis, ..... 


99 


Curling, ...... 


107 


Fencing, ...... 


. 116 


Foot Ball-Gffilic, 


119 


Association. 


. 121 


Gymnastics, . . .... 


126 


Golf, 


. 128 


Handball, . i . . . 


134 



INDEX 

Hitch and Kick, ..... 

Hockey, ..... 

Lacrosse, ...... 

Lawn Tennis, ..... 

National Kifle Association, 

Pistol and Kevolver Shooting, 

Inanimate Target Shooting, . 

Live Bird Shooting, .... 

Polo, Water, 

Polo Association Rules, . . . 

Polo, Rink, ..... 

Quoiting, ..... 

Racing— Potato, Sack, Obstacle, Three-Legged 
Dog Racing, ..... 

Pigeon Flying, ..... 

Rowing, ..... 

Racquets, ...... 

Sheffield Rules, .... 

Skating, ...... 

Snow-Shoeing, .... 

Shuffleboard, ..... 

Wrestling— Collar and Elbow, 

Catch-as-catch-can, 

Graeco-Roman , . 

Devonshire, 

Side Hold, 

Cumberland and Westnion^land, 
Cross-Country Rules, 





PAOE 


. 


. 138 




139 


. 


. 143 




154 


. 


. 164 




177 




. 183 




190 




. 196 




198 




. 201 




208 




. 209 




210 




. 212 




215 




. 222 




224 




. 225 




228 




. 232 




233 




. 234 




235 




. 236 




237 




. 237 




239 



— w. aKNBTRAL RULKS w— 



A^mateLir Atl^letie Ut\iorx 



UNITED STATES. 



KULE I.— AEFILIATED, KEGISTEKED AND APPKOVED 
ORGANIZATIONS. 

Any one competing or exhibiting at open sports or an enter- 
tainment of any character whatever, held by any Club or 
managing body which is not an allied member of the Amateur 
Athletic Uuion, or a member of one of the Intercollegiate 
Association of Amateur Athletes, or any other Association or 
body to be hereafter approved of, or registered as an approved 
organization, shall thereby disqualify himself from compet- 
ing at any sports given by organizations approved by the 
Amateur Athletic Union. The Board of Governors shall have 
power to reinstate any one so disqualified if it shall think fit- 

Any organization desiring to be registered as an "'approved" 
Club or Association shall make application through the 
Secretary to the Board of Managers of the A.ssociation of 
the Amateur Athletic Union in whose territory the apply- 
ing club is situated, and at the discretion of such Board may 
be admitted to such registration. The fee for such registra- 
tion shall be Ten Dollars ($10) per annum, and all applica- 
tions for registration must be accompanied by a list of officers 
and number of members of the organization, together with 



6 officiaij sporting rules. 

the stipulated fee, at least thirty (30) days prior to the hold- 
ing of any athletic meeting thereunder. 

No Association of the Amateur Athletic Union shall be 
allowed to recognize any League or Association of Clubs 
within its jurisdiction. 

No Association of the Amateur Athletic Union will be al- 
lowed to register clubs, or schedule games, tournaments or 
exhibitions given by clubs not eligible to membership in the 
Amateur Athletic Union. 

The Schedule Committees of the several Associations of 
the Amateur Athletic Union are advised not to schedule, for 
any Sunday, games at which members of more than one 
club are allowed to compete or exhibit. 

All games, iiieethigs, benelits and entertainments of any 
kind where athletes compete or exhibit must be registered. 

No Club which is a member of any of the Associations of 
the Amateur Athletic Union will be allowed to give games 
jointly with an outside club, unless the outside club has 
been regularly registered. 

RULE II. — UNRECOaNIZED MEETINGS. 

Athletic meetings promoted by companies, incorporated 
bodies, individuals, or associations of individuals, as private 
speculations, or in conjunction with a benefit, social or 
picnic entertainment, are not, unless with the sanction of 
the Board of Managers of one of the Associations of the 
Amateur Athletic Union, recognized by the Amateur Ath- 
lethic Union, and any athlete competing at an unrecognized 
meeting shall thereby suspend himself from all games held 
under Amateur Athletic Union Rules. 

RULE III.— SUSPENSION OR DISQUALIFICATION OF 
INDIVIDUALS. 

No person shall be allowed to compete at any meeting 
held under Amateur Athletic Union Rules while disqualified 
or under a sentence of suspension passed by any one of the 
Associations of the Amateur Athletic Union, or by the Ama- 
teur Athletic Union, Intercollegiate Association of Amateur 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 7 

Athletes, National Amateur Skating Association, League of 
American Wheelmen, National Association of Amateur Oars- 
men, National Lawn Tennis Association, and such other Asso- 
ciations as the Amateur Atliletic UMi©n, or any one of its 
Associations may hereafter approve of. 

Any person knowingly competing against one who is dis- 
qualitied or under sentence of suspension by the Amateur Ath- 
letic Union, or any of the aforementioned Associations, shall 
be himself suspended until the expiration of such sentence, or 
for such period as the Board of Managers of one of the Associ- 
ations of the Amateur Athletic Union may deem proper. 

No person shall be reinstated as an amateur who became a 
professional after February 18, 1893, and applications f^r 
reinstatement by persons who became professionals before 
that date shall be received and acted upon only by the Board 
of Governors of the Amateur Athletic Union. 

Any person receiving compensation for services performed 
in an athletic club, or in any capacity in connection with ath- 
letic games, will be ineligible to compete in games under the 
rules of the Amateur Athletic Union until he shall have per- 
manently abandoned such employment. 

If, during any athletic contest under the rules of the Ama- 
teur Athletic Union, a competitor shall conduct himself in a 
manner unbecoming a gentleman, or offensive to the officials, 
spectators or competitors, the referee shall have the power to 
disqualify him from further competition at the meeting; and 
if he thinks the ofience worthy of additional punishment shall 
promptly make a detailed statement of the facts to the Board 
of Managers of the Association in whose territory the offence 
was committed. 

Any member of any club of either of the Associations of the 
Amateur Athletic Union who shall have been expelled from 
said club for unpaid indebtedness shall not be eligible to mem- 
bership in any other club of any of the Associations of the 
Amateur Athletic Union, nor shall his entry be received in aiiy 
games given by any Association of the Amateur Athletic 
Union, or by any club of any Association of the Amateur Ath- 
letic Union until such indebtedness is liquidated. 

Whenever it shall seem reasonably certain that any ama- 
teur athlete has violated the rules of the Amateur Athletic 



8 OFFICIAL SPORTING EULfiS. 

Union, the Board of Governors of the Amateur Athletic 
Union, or the Board of Managers of any of the Associations 
of the Amateur Athletic Union shall have power to suspend 
the suspected athlete from further competition until his case 
Bhall have been tried in the manner prescribed in the Consti- 
tution and By-Laws of the Association of the Amateur Ath- 
letic Union in whose territory the offence was committed. 

When charges are brought against an individual which 
affect his status as an amateur, and suspicious circumstances 
are shown, which, in the judgment of the Board of Govern- 
ors of the Amateur Athletic Union, or the Board of Man- 
agers of any of its Associations, render his real status a 
matter of reasonable doubt — inasmuch as the Amateur 
Athletic Union or its Associations have no power to compel 
the attendance and testimony of witnesses, and because the 
real facts are peculiarly within the knowledge of the accused, 
and therefore by him susceptible of proof, he shall be required 
to explain such suspicious circumstances and remove such 
reasonable doubt. 

RULE IV. — THE OFFICIAL HANDICAPPER,- 

An Official Handicapper shall be employed by each As- 
sociation of the Amateur Athletic Union. 

It shall be his duty to handicap, without charge, all handi- 
cap games given by Clubs of the Association, and such 
others as he may be directed to by the Secretary of the As- 
sociation, and he shall hold himself in readiness at all times 
to do such other work as the Board of Managers of the As- 
sociation may direct. 

He shall keep an official record of all athletes and their 
doings, and his books shall at all times be open to the inspec- 
tion of any member of the Board of Managers. 

He shall receive and handicap all entries furnished him 
by the proper parties up to the time and until he returns his 
lists, and no entry shall be handicapped at the post. 

All fees for handicapping must be paid to the handicapper 
before he delivers the handicaps. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 9 

All Clubs or Associations, members of any of the Asso- 
ciations of the Amateur Athletic Union, and other regis- 
tered and approved Clubs or Associations, must employ the 
Official Handicapper for their open handicap events, unless 
otherwise authorized by special permission of the Board of 
Managers of any Association of the Amateur Athletic Union, 
and all Clubs or Associations so doing shall, for this 
privilege, pay into the Treasury of the Association a given 
sum, to be governed as follows : 

Meetings with entries not exceeding 100 $ 5 00 

Meetings of 100 entries and not exceeding 250 ... 10 00 
" 250 " ♦* *♦ " 400 .. . 15 00 

" 400 " " '* " 600 .. . 20 00 

" 600 '' " " *' 1,000 ... 30 00 

The total number of entries in all handicap events added 
together shall determine the number of entries, each name 
in each event counting for itself. 

Note.— The fees charged by the handicappeis of the Metro- 
politan and Atlantic Associations are 10 cents for each entry. 
Xo games will be handicapped for less than $5.00. 

RULE v.— PRIZES. 

Any athlete found guilty of pawning or using his prizes in 
any way for a pecuniary gain shall be at once suspended from 
all competitions by the Board of Governors. 

RULE VII.— RECORDS. 

A new record at any distance in swimming, walking, runn- 
ing or hurdling, in order to stand, shall be timed by at least 
three Timekeepers, and a new record at jumping, pole vault- 
ing, or in the weight competitions shall be measured by at 
least three Field Judges. 

The Amateur Athletic Union will not recognize any new 
record, unless made in open competition, and unless a report 
of it is made to the Secretary of the Union, properly supported 
by the affidavits of the Referee, Timekeepers, Scorers, Starter 
and Field Judges, as the case may be, as to the correctness of 
the time, measurement, weather, hour of day and place, with 
signatures of at least six witnesses, including officials. 



10 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

RULE VIII.— ELIGIBILITY TO LIMITED EVENTS. 

The eligibility to compete in events that are limited to men 
who have never accomplished a certain time, distance or 
height in a given event, shall be determined by the competi- 
tor's record when the entries for such event closed. 

RULE IX.— DEFINITION OF A NOVICE. 

The sports over which the Amateur Athletic Union claims 
jurisdiction shall be divided into the following classes: 

1. Base Ball. 13. Putting the shot. 

2. Billiards. 14. Quoits. 

3. Bowling. 15. Kacquets. 

4. Boxing. 16. Rowing. 

5. Fencing. 17. Running. 

6. Foot Ball. 18. Sculling. 

7. Gymnastics. 19. Skating. 

8. Hurdle Racing. 20. Smimming. 

'.). Jumping. 21. Throwing the Hammer and 

10. Lacrosse. 56-lb. weight. 

11. Lawn Tennis. 22. Tug-of-War. 

12. Pole Leaping. 23. Walking. 

24. Wrestling. 

An athlete shall be held to be a novice in each of these 24 
classes until he shall have wen a prize in a competition in that 
class, open to the members of two or more clubs. 

The winning of such a prize shall prevent his future com- 
petition as a novice in that class, although his entry may have 
been made made before he lost his standing as a novice. 

RULE X.— ENTRIES. 

All entries for competitions held under Amateur Athletic 
Union rules must be made on the entry forms adopted by the 
Amateur Athletic Union. They shall consist of two forms, 
one for organizations, clubs and associations, members of the 
Amateur Athletic Union, and one for individuals, clubs, asso- 
ciations and organizations not members of the Amateur 
Athletic Union. These forms or sample copies can be obtained 
of the Secretary of the Union. 



OFFICIAL SPOETING KULES. H 



RULE XI.— PKOFESSIONAL CONTESTS FOKBIDDEN. 

No professional contest or exhibition for any prize or reward 
whatever shall be allowed at any games, meetings, or enter- 
tainment held under the rules of the A.A.U. 



KULE XII.— KEPOKT, 

Each Association of the A.A.U. must, within ten days after 
each meeting of the Association, or its Board of Managers, mail 
to the Secretary of the A.A.U. a copy of the minutes of said 
meeting. The Secretaries of the several Associations of the 
A.A.U. must forward to the Secretary of the A.A.U., copies of 
all official notices issued from their offices, at the time of such 
issue, said notices to include all those sent to the members of 
the Board of Managers, as well as to the clubs of the Associa- 
tion. 

KULE XIII.— REPORT OF GAMES. 

The Official Scorers and Measurers at all games given under 
the rules of the x\.A.U. shall be required to deliver to the 
official Handicapper of the Association in whose territory the 
games are held, or to the Secretary of such Association, within 
twenty-four hours after the close of the games, the official 
scores of all contests at such meeting. The Clerk of the course 
at each meeting shall also be required to deliver in the same 
manner a complete list of all starters in each event. 



RULE XIV.— RESTRICTIONS ON COMPETITIONS. 

The restrictions of Section 2, Article X„ of the Constitution 
refer to all' sports over which the A.A.U. claims jurisdiction, 
For instance, a man who had rowed, or played lacrosse, or 
bas3ball for one club could not run, or jump, or swim for any 
other club within three months in any case, and not within 
twelve months without the consent of his former club. 



ATHLETIC RULES 



AMATEUR ATHLETIC UNION 



RULE I.— OFFICIALS. 

Section 1. All amateur meetings shall be under th« 
direction of : 

A Games Committee, 

One Referee, 

Two or more Inspectors, 

Three Judges at Finish, 

Three or more Field Judges, 

Three or more Timckeepors, 

One Judge of Walking, 

One Starter, 

One Clerk of the Course, 

One Scorer, 

One Marshal. 
Sec. 2. If deemed necessary, assistants may be pro- 
vided for the Judge of Walking, the Clerk of the 
Course, the Scorer, and the Marshal, and an Official 
Announcer may be appointed. 

RULE II.— THE GAMES COMMITTEE 

in all championship meetings shall be constituted, 
have the jurisdiction, and perform the duties as pre 
scribed by Article VIII. of the By-Laws. 

The Games Committee at any club meeting shall be 
composed of members of the Club holding the meeting. 

This Committee shall have jurisdiction of all matters 
not assigned by these rules to the Referee or other 
games officials. (See also Rule XV.) 



OFFICIAL SPORTING EULES. l3 



EUIiE m. — THE EEFEEEB 



shall decide all questions relating to the actual conduct of the 
meeting, whose final settlement is. not otherwise covered by 
these rules. 

He alone shall have the power to change the order of events 
as laid down in the official programme, and to add to, or to alter 
the announced arrangement of heats in any event. A referee 
has no authority, after heats have been duly drawn and pub- 
lished in a programme, to transfer a contestant from one heat 
to another. 

When in any but the final heat of a race, a claim of foul or 
interference is made, he shall have the power to disqualify 
the competitor who was at fault, if he considers the foul inten- 
tional, and shall also have the power to allow the hindered 
competitor to start in the next round of heats, just as if he had 
been placed in his trial . 

When in a final heat a claim of foul or interference 
is made, he shall have the power to disqualify the com- 
petitor who was at fault, if he considers the foul inten- 
tional, and he shall also have the power to order a 
new race between such of the competitors as he thinks 
entitled to such a privilege. 

If, during any athletic contest under the rules of the 
Amateur Athletic Union, a competitor shall conduct 
himself in a manner unbecoming a gentleman, or offen- 
sive to the officials, spectators or competitors, the 
referee shall have the power to disqualify him from 
further competition at the meeting ; and if he thinks 
the offence worthy of additional punishment shall 
promptly make a detailed statement of the facts to the 
Board of Managers of the Association in whose territory 
the offence was committed. 

RULE IV.— THE INSPECTORS. 

It shall be the duty of an inspector to stand at such 
point as the Referee may designate; to watch the com- 
petition closely, and in case of a claim of foul to report 
to the Referee what he saw of the incident. 



14 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

Such Inspectors are merely assistants to the Referee, 
to whom they shall report, and have no power to make 
any decisions. 

RULE v.— THE JUDGES AT FINISH 

shall determine the order of finishing of contestants, 
and shall arrange among themselves as to noting the 
winner, 2d, 3d, 4th, etc., as the case may require. 

Their decision in this respect shall be without appeal, 
and in case of disagreement a majority shall govern. 

RULE VI.— THE FIELD JUDGES 

shall make an accurate measurement, and keep a tally 
of all trials of competitors in the high and broad jumps, 
the pole vault, the weight competitions, and the tug of 
war. 

They shall act as judges of these events, and their 
decisions shall likewise be without appeal. In case of 
disagreement a majority shall govern. 

RULE VII.— THE TIMEKEEPERS 

shall individually time all events where time record is 
called for Should two of the three watches mark the 
same time and the third disagree, the time marked by 
the two watches shall be accepted. Should all three 
disagree, the time marked by the intermediate watch 
shall be accepted. 

The flash of the pistol shall denote the actual time of 
starting. 

In case only two watches are held on an event, and 
they fail to agree, the longest time of the two shall be 
accepted. 

Note. — For record, however, three watches must be 
held on an event. See Rule VII., General Rules of the 
Amateur Athletic Union. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES, 15 

RULE VIII.— THE STARTER 

shall have sole jurisdiction over the competitors after 
the Clerk of the Coarse has properly placed them in 
their positions for the start. 

The method of starting: shall be by pistol report, ex- 
cept that in time handicap races the word "^o " shall 
be used. 

An actual start shall not be effected until the pistol 
has been purposely discharged after the competitors 
have been warned to get ready. 

When any part of the person of a competitor shall 
touch the ground in front of his mark before the start- 
ing signal is given, it shall be considered a false start. 

Penalties for false starting shall be inflicted by the 
Starter, as follows: 

In all races up to and including 125 yards the compet- 
itor Siiall be put back one yard for the first and another 
yard for the second attempt ; in races over 1 25 yards and 
including 300 yards, two yards for the first and two 
more for the second attempt; in races over 300 yards and 
including 600 yards, three yards for the first and three 
more for t he second attempt ; in races over 600 yards and 
including 1,000 yards, four yards for the first and four 
more for the second attempt ; in races over 1,000 yards and 
including one mile, five yards for the first and five more 
for the second attempt; in all races over one mile, ten 
yards for the first and ten more for the second nttempt. 
In all cases the third false start shall prevent his compet- 
ing in that event. 

The Starter shall also rule out of that event any com- 
petitor who attempts to advance himself from his mark, 
as prescribed in the official programme, after he has 
given the warning to ''get ready." 

RULE IX.— THE CLERK OF THE COURSE 

shall be provided with the names and the numbers of 
all entered competitors, and he shall notify them to ap- 
pear at the starting line before the start in each event 
in which they are entered. 



te OFFICTAIi SPORTIXG RUIjES. 

In case of handicap events from marks, he shall place 
each competitor behind his proper mark; shall imme- 
diately notify the Starter should any competitor at- 
tempt to advance himself after the Starter has warned 
them to " get ready; '' and in time allowance handicaps 
shall furnish the Starter with the number and time nl- 
lowance of each actual competitor. 

He shall control his assistants, and assign to them such 
duties as he may deem proper. 

RULE X.— THE JUDGE OF WALKING 

shall have sole power to determine the fairness or un- 
fairness of walking, and his rulings thereon shall be 
final and without appeal. 

He shall caution any competitor whenever walking 
unfairly ; the third caution to disqualify, except that 
he shall immediately disqualify any competitor when 
walking unfairly during the last 220 yards of a race. 

He shall control his assistants, and assign to them 
such of his duties as he may deem proper. 

RULE XI,— THE SCORER 

shall record the order in which each competitor finishes 
his event, together with the time furnished him by the 
Timekeepers. 

He shall keep a tally of the laps made by each com- 
petitor in races covering more than one lap, and shall 
announce by means of a bell, or otherwise, when the 
leading man enters the last lap. 

He shall control his assistants, and assign to them 
such of his duties as he may deem proper. 

RULE XII.— THE MARSHAL 

"'hall have full police charge of the enclosure, and shall 
^jrevent any but officials and actual competitors from 
entering or remaining therein. 

He shall control his assistants, and assign to them 
their duties, 



OFFICTATj sporting RUIiES. 17 

RULE XIII.— THE OFFICIAL ANNOUNCER 

Bhall receive from the Scorer and Field Judges the re- 
sult of each event, and announce the same by voice, or 
by means of a bulletin board. 

RULE XIV.— COMPETITORS 

shall report to the Clerk of the Course immediately 
upon their arrival at the place of meeting, and shall be 
provided by that official with their proper numbers, 
which must be worn conspicuously by the competitors 
when competing, and without which they shall not be 
allowed to start. 

Each competitor shall inform himself of the time of 
starting, and shall be promptly at the starting point of 
each competition in which he is entered, and there 
report to the Clerk of the Course. 

Under no condition shall any attendants be allowed 
to accompany competitors at the start or during any 
competition, except in match races, where special agree- 
ment may be made. 

RULE XV.— PROTESTS 

against any entered competitor may be made verbally 
or in writing to the referee, or a member of the Games 
Committee, before or during the meeting. If possible 
the Committee shall decide such protest at once. If the 
nature of the protest or the necessity of obtaining testi- 
mony prevents an immediate decision, the competitor 
shall be allowed to compete under protest, and the pro- 
test shall be decided by the Games Committee within 
one week, unless its subject be the amateur standing of 
the competitor, in which case the Games Committee 
must report such protest within forty-eight hours to 
the Secretary of the A. A. U. 

RULE XVI. — TRACK MEASUREMENT. 

All distances run or walked shall be measured upon a 
line eighteen inches outward from the inner edge of th« 



18 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

crack, except that in races on straightaway tracks the 
distance shall be measured in a direct Hne from the 
starting mark to the finishing line. 

RULE XVII.— THE COURSE. 

Each competitor shall keep in his respectiv^e position 
from start to finish in all races on straightaway tracks, 
and in all races on tracks with one or more turns he 
shall not cross to the inner edge of the track, except 
when he is at least six feet in advance of his nearest com^ 
petitor. 

The Referee shall disqualify from that event any com- 
petitor who willfully pushes against, impedes, crosses 
the course of, or in any way interferes with another 
competitor. 

The Referee shall disqualify from further participa- 
tion in the games, any contestant competing to lose, to 
coach, or to in any way impede the chances of another 
competitor either in a trial or final contest. 

RULE XVIII.— THE FINISH 

of the course shall be represented by a line between two 
finishing posts, drawn across and at right angles to the 
sides of the track, and three feet above which line shall 
be placed a tape attached at either end to the finishing 
posts. A finish shall be counted when any part of th( 
winner's body, except his hands or arms, shall touch the 
tape at the finish line. The tape is to be considered 
the finishing line for the winner, but the order of finish- 
ing across the track line shall determine the positions 
of the other competitors. 

RULE XIX.— HURDLES. 

Different heights, distances and number of hurdles 
may be selected for hurdle races. 

In the 120 yards hurdle race, ten hurdles shall be 
used; each hurdle to be three fefet six inches high. They 
shall be placed ten yards apart, with the first hurdle 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 13 

fifteen yards distant from the starting point, and the last hur- 
dle fifteen yards before the finishing line. In the 220 yards 
hurdle race ten hurdles shall be used, each hurale to be two 
feet six inches high. They shall be placed twenty yards upart, 
with the first hurdle twenty yards distant from the starting 
mark, and the last hurdle twenty yards before the finishing 
line. 

In hurdle races of other distancbs and with different numbers 
of hurdles, the hurdles shall be placed at equal intervals, with 
the same space between the first hu-dle and the starting 
point and the last hurdle and the finishing line, as between 
each of the hurdles. 

In making a record it shall be necessary for the competitor 
to jump over every hurdle in its proper position. 

RULE XX.— TIES. 

In all contests whose results are determined by measure- 
ment of height or distance, ties shall be decided as follows: 

In handicap contests the award shall be given to the com- 
petitor who received the least allowance. In case vf a tie be- 
tween two or more compeiitors who received the same allow- 
ance, the decision shall be made as in scratch contests. 

In case of a tie in ascratcn contest at high jumping or vault- 
ing, :he tieing competitors shall have three additional trials 
at the height last tried, and if still undecided, the bar shall be 
lowered to the height next below, ana three trials taken at 
tnat height. If no one clears it the bar shall be lowered again 
and again until one of the competitors clears it. In case of a 
second tie the award shall be given to the competitor who 
cleared the bar with the least number of trials. 

In case of a tie in a scratch contest at any game decided by 
distance, each of the tieing competitors shall have three ad- 
ditional trials, and the award shall be made in accordance 
with the distances cleared in these additional trials. In case 
of a second tie, three more trials shall be allowed, and soon 
until a decision is reached. 

RULE XXI.— JUMPING. 

Section 1. A fair jump shall be one that is made without 
the assistance of weights, diving, somersaults, or hand springs 
of any kind. 



20 OFFICIAL SPOETINft EtJlilE^. 

In all handicap jumps the scratch man shall be entitled tc 
try last. 

Sec. 2. The Kunning High Jump.— The Field Judges shall 
decide the height at which Jie iump shall commence, and 
shall regulate the succeeding elevations. 

Each competitor shall be allowed three trial jumps at each 
height, and if on the third trial he shall fail, he shall be de- 
clared out of the competition. 

Competitors shall jump in order as placed in the programme ; 
then those failing, if any, shall have their second trial jump 
In a like order, after which those having failed twice shall 
make their third trial jump. 

The jump shall bo made over a bar resting on pins project- 
ing not more than three inches from the uprights, and when 
this bar is removed from its place it shall be counted as a trial 
jump. 

Kunning under the bar in making an attempt to jump shall 
be counted as a "balk," and three successive "balks" shall be 
counted as a trial jump. 

The distance of the run before the jump shall be unlimited. 

A competitor may decline to jump at any height in his turn, 
and, by so doing, forfeits his right to again jump at the 
height declined. 

Sec. 3. The Standing High Jump.— The feet of the com- 
petitor may be placed in any position, but shall leave the 
ground only once in making an attempt to jump. When the 
feet are lifted from the ground twice, or two springs are made 
in making the attempt, it shall count as a trial jump without 
result. 

With this exception the rules governing the Kunning High 
Jump shall also govern the Standing High Jump. 

Sec. 4. The Running Broad Jump.— When jumped on earth 
a joist five inches wide shall be sunk flush with it. The outer 
edge of this joint shall be called the scratch line, and the 
measurement of all jumps shall be made from it at right an- 
gles to the nearest break in the groun<? made by any part of 
the person of the competitor. 



OFFICIAL SPOUTING RULES. 21 

In front of the scratch line the ground shall be removed to 
the depth of three and the width of twelve inches outward. 

A foul jump shall be one where the competitor in jumping: 
ofi" the scratch line makes a mark on the ground immediately 
in front of it, and shall count as a trial jump without result. 

Each competitor shall have three trial jumps, and the best 
three shall each have three more trial jumps. 

The competition shall be decided by the best of all the trial 
jumps of the competitors. 

The distance of the run before the scratch line shall be un- 
limited. 

Sec. 5. The Pole Vault.— Poles shall be furnished by the 
club giving the games, but contestants may use their private 
poles if they go desire, and no contestant shall be allowed to 
use any of these private poles except by the consent of its 
owner. The poles shall be unlimited as to size and weight, 
but shall have no assisting devices, except one prong at th»3 
end. 

No competitor shall during his vault raise the hand which 
was uppermost when he left the ground to a higher point of 
the pole, nor shall he raise the hand which was undermost 
when he left the ground to any point on the pole above the 
other hand. 

The rules governing the Running High Jump shall also gov- 
ern the Pole Vault for height, and the rules governing the 
Running Broad Jump shall also govern the Pole Vault for 
distance. 

Sec. 6. The Standing Broad Jump.— The feet of the com- 
petitor may be placed in any position, but shall leave the 
ground only once in making an attempt to jump. When the 
feet are lifted from the ground twice, or two springs are made 
in making the attempt, it shall count as a trial jump without 
result. 

In all other respects the rule governing the Running Broad 
Jump shall also govern the Standing Broad Jump. 

Sec. 7. The Three Standing Broad Jumps.— The feet of 
the competitor shall leave the ground only once in making an 



22 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

attempt for each of the three jumps, and no stoppage between 
jumps shall be allowed. In all other respects the rules govern- 
ing the Standing Broad Jump shall also govern the Three 
Standing Broad Jumps. 

Sec. 8. Kunning Hop, Step and Jump.— The competitor 
shall iirst land upon the same foot with which he shall have 
taken off. The reverse foot shall be used for the second land- 
ing, and both feet shall be used foi the :hird landing. 

In all other respects the rules governing the Running Broad 
Jump shall also govern the Running Hop, Step and Jump. 

RULE XXII.— PUTTING THE SHOT. 

The shot shall be a solid sphere, made of metal and weighing 
at least 16 or 24 pounds, as the event may call for. 

It shall be put with one hand, and in making the attempt it 
shall be above and not behind the shoulder. 

The competitor shall stand in a circle seven feet in diameter, 
on four feet of the circumference of which shall be placed a 
board four inches high, it which the competitor must stand 
when the shot leaves liis land. 

A fair put shall be one where no part of the person of the 
competitor shall touch in front of the circle or on the board in 
making the attempt. 

A put shall be counted as foul if the competitor steps over 
the front half of the circle or on the board, before the meas- 
urement of his put is made. 

The measurement of all puts shall be made from the near- 
est mark made by the shot to a point on the circumference of 
the circle, on a line with the object mark and the centre of the 
circle. 

Foul puts and letting go the shot in making an attempt shall 
be counted as trial puts without result. 

A board similar to the one in front may be used at the back 
of the circle. 

The order of competing and number of trials shall be the 
same as for the running broad jump. Shots shall be furnished 



OFFICIAL SPOBTING PULES. 28 

by the Games Committee. Any contestant may use his private 
shot, if correct in weight and shape; in which case the other 
contestants must also be allowed to use it if they wish. 

RULE XXIII.— THROWING 56 LB. WEIGHT. 

Section 1. Tlie weight shall be a sphere made of metal, with 
a metal handle attached. Tlieir combined weight shall be at 
least tifty-six pounds, and the combined height shall be not 
more than sixteen inches. 

All throws shall be made from a circle seven .eet in 
diameter. 

The competitor may assume any position he chooses in 
making an attempt. 

Foul throws and letting go the weight in an attempt shall 
count as a trial throw without result. 

The order of competing and number of trials shall be the 
same as for the running broad jump. Weights shall be fur- 
nished by the Games Committee. Any contestant may use his 
private weight, if correct in weight and shape; in which case 
I lie other contestants must also be allowed to use it if they 
wish. 

Sec. 2. In Throwing for Distance.— A fair throw shall be 
one where no part of the person of the competitor shall touch 
In front of the circle in makng an attempt. 

A throw shall be counted foul if the competitor steps over 
the front half of the circle before his throw is measured. 

The measurement of all throws shall be made from the 
nearest mark made by the sphere of the weight, to a point on 
the circumference of the circle, on a line with the object mark 
and the centre of the circle. 

Sec. 3. In Throwing for Heighv.— A barrel-head three feet 
in diameter shall be suspended in the air. 

A fair throw shall be one where no part of the person of the 
competitor shall touch outside of the circle in making an 
attempt, and where any part of the weight or handle touches 
any part of the barrel-head. 



24 OFFTCIAIj sporting RUIjES. 

A foul throw shall be one where the competitor touches out- 
side of the circle before letting go the weight. 

The measurement of all throws shall be from a point on 
the ground drawn directly under the lowest point of the 
barrel-head. 

The order of competing and number of trials shall be the 
same as for tlie running high jump. Weights shall be 
furnished by the Games Committee. Any contestant may use 
liis private weight, if correct in weight and shape; in which 
case the other contestants must also be allowed to use it it 
they wish. 

RULE XXIV.— THROWING THE HAMMER. 

The head and handle may be of any size, shape and material, 
provided that the length of the complete implement shall not 
be more than four feet and its weight not less than sixteen 
poujids. 

All throws shall be made trom a circle seven feet in 
diameter. 

The competitor may assume any position he chooses in 
making an attempt. 

A fair throw shall be one where no part of the person of the 
competitor shall touch outside the circle in making the 
attempt. 

A throw shall be counted foul if the competitor steps over 
the front half of the circle before his throw is measured. 

Foul throws aud letting go of the hammer in an attempt 
shall count as trial throws. 

The measurement of all throws shall be made from the 
nearest mark made by the head of the hammer to a point on 
the circumference of the circle, on a line with the object mark 
and the centre of the circle. 

Ihe order of competing and number of trials f,hall be the 
same as for the running broad jump. Hammers shall Le 
furnished by the Games Committee. Any contestant may 
use his private hammer, if correct in weight and shape; in 
which case the other contestants must also be allowed to use 
it if they wish. 



OFFICIAL SPOHTrS'G RTTTjES. 25 



EULE XXV.— TUGS OF WAR. 



Tugs of War shall be pulled on cleats made of wood, same to 
be at least four inches thick, six inches high and twenty-two 
inv;nes long, and at least six feet six inches apart. The distance 
from the clamp in the centre to the first cleat on either side 
shall be not less than six feet. 

The cleats shall be set on edge and bolted to the board. 

The rope shall be a manilla, three stranded rope, not less 
than four and a half nor more than live inches in circumfer- 
ence. There shall be a clamp equidistant from the first cleat 
on either side, which shall be sufficient to hold the rope in 
position until released. 

This clamp shall not make an appreciable kink in the rope. 
Any position may be assumed before the pistol is iired. No 
mechanical device shall be used for holding the rope. No belt 
other than one to protect the body shall be used. The llanges 
to hold the rope in place shall not be constructed so as to bind 
on the rope in any position that the anchor may assume. 
Leather shields and gloves may be used, and adhesive sub- 
stances may be put on the same. The belt shall not weigh 
more than twenty pounds. Competitors shall not use 
weights in unlimited pulls, but in pulls limited to specified 
weights, competitors may use Aveights, providing the total 
weight of the team, including weights, does not exceed the 
limit. 

The standard time limit for each pull shall be five minutes, 
and a rest of not less than ten minutes shall be allowed each 
competitor between trial pulls. A shorter or longer time 
limit may be agreed upon for other than championship 
contests. 

When tugs of war are limited to teams of a given weight, 
competitors shall be weighed before competing. They shall 
be weighed as they pull; i. e., including clothing, shoes, belt, 
etc. 

The weighing in shall be done immediately before the pull. 

No knot of any kind shall be tied In the rope, and the rope 
shall not be passed more than once around the body of the 
anchor. 



26 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

In no case shall any man pull on more than one team in a 
contest, and no substitute shall be allowed to pull on any team 
that has pulled a trial. 

In case a team gains 3 feet from its opponents, it shall be 
awarded the pull. 

Immediately before the competition the captains of the op- 
posing teams shall draw their numbei's and compete as fol- 
lows: To have a preliminary round of as many contests as 
the total number of teams exceeds 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32, and drop 
the losei's. This leaves in 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 teams, and the com- 
petition then proceeds regularly with no byes or uneven con- 
tests. 

Ko pull shall be awarded by .ess man naif an inch. 

All competitors who have been beaten by the winner shall 
be entitled to compete for seeond place, and all who have been 
beaten by the winners of either tirst or second place shall be 
entitled to compete for third place. 

The individual tug of war shall also be governed by the 
team rules, and the contestants must pull from the tirst cleat 
from the clamp. 

RULE XXVI.— SWIMMING. 

Section 1. Officials shall consist of one Beferee, three 
Judges at the finish, three Timekeepers, one Starter, one 
Clerk of the Course, with assistants, if necessary. 

Sec. 2. Duties and powers of these officials shall be the same 
as is prescribed for them in the foregoing Rules. 

Sec. 3. In the 100 yards Swimming Race each competitor 
shall stand with one or both feet on the starting line, and, 
when the signal is given, shall plunge. Stepping back, either 
before or after tlie signal, will not be allowed. 

Sec. 4. The start for longer races sliall be the same as the 
100 yards except that competitors may start in the water 
(tread-water start) from an imaginary line. 

Sec. 5. Each competitor shall keep a straight course, par- 
allel with the courses of the other competitors, from his start- 
ing station to the opposite point in the finish line. Competi- 
tors will bo started ten feet apart, and each one is entitled to 



OFFICTATi SPORTING RTTIjES. 27 

a straight lane of water, ten feet wide, from start to finish. 
Any contestant who, when out of his own water, shall touch 
another competitor, is liable to disqualification from that 
event— subject to the discretion of the Referee. 

Sec. 6. Each competitor shall have finished the race when 
any part of his person reaches the finish line. 



Rules of Archery. 



Two targets are needed, which should be placed from 40 to 
120 yards apart. Each stand, when properly placed, is called 
" an end." 

The distance from the stand to the target shall be, for ladies, 
50 or 69 yards, and for gentlemen, 60, 80 or 100 yards. 

The proper number of arrows as fixed by agreement, are 
then shot from one " end " to the other by each archer, when 
all walk to the other "end," extract such arrows as are fixed 
in the target, gather up those that have missed, and then 
shoot back at the opposite target. This is continued until the 
whole number of " ends " agreed upon have been shot. 

The length of arrows shall be, for ladies, 25 inches; for gen- 
tlemen, 28 inches. 

The centre of the target shall be four feet from the ground. 

The string, when the bow is braced, must be exactly six 
inches from the centre of the bow for gentlemen, and five and 
a half inches for ladies. 

The national round for ladies is 48 arrows at 60 yards and 24 
arrows at 50 yards. For gentlemen, 72 arrows at 100 yaids, 
48 at 80 yards and 24 at 60 yards. 

Targets are made of plaited straw faced with canvas and 
shall have a target face of nmslin or linen upon the outside. 
From the bull's eye in the centre and painted gold, there shall 
be four concentric rings as follows : Red inner, blue, black 
and white. These rings must all be of exactly the same width, 
the largest itself being four feet diameter. 

In scoring, gold or bull's eye counts nine ; red, seven; blue, 
five; black, three, and white one. 

When an arrow strikes on two rings the lowest is counted . 
unless otherwise agreed on. 

No arrow shall be withdrawn from the target until scored 
by the captain, under penalty of losing its value. 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING RULES. 29 

The order of shooting shall be the same as the names are 
entered on the programme, and any one not ready in his turn 
must shoot last. 

BUTT-SHOOTING. 

Butts are mounds of earth sodded over with grass, and may 
be of any size desired. They are usually made of about the 
following form : Nine feet by six feet at the base, and dimin- 
ishing to five feet by two at the top. When more than two are 
wanted, they are ranged in setts at a distance 30 yards apart 
and so disposed as not to stand in the way of each other, and 
forming a series of ranges of 30, 60, 90 and 120 yards. Against 
the butt is placed a small circle of pasteboard of any size 
desird, from three inches to one foot in diameter which is fas- 
tened by means of a peg driven into the butt, through the 
centre. Shots in the butt, missing the paper, are not scored, 
and of hits that one ranks highest which is nearest the peg. 

KOVING. 

This is so called because the archers rove from point to point, 
shooting at varying marks, such as trees, stumps, banks of 
earth, or any other objects that present themselves. The 
winner of the first chooses the next, and so on ; the distance 
generally being from 100 to 200 yards, all arrows falling within 
five bow-lengths' scoring, if nearer to the mark than the 
arrows of the other archers. 

FLIGHT-SHOOTING. 

Flight-shooting is merely a trial of distance, the farthest 
shot winning. Of course, in a contest of this sort, much de- 
pends on the strength of the bow, and the weight and finish of 
the arrow. 

CLOUT-SHOOTING. 

The clout is a small white target of pasteboard, 12 inches in 
diameter, which is thrust into a cleft stick, and this is stuck 
into the ground obliquely, so as to bring the lower edge to the 
ground. The distance is generally from 50 to 200 yards, and 
the same rules apply as in roving. 



b^ske:t ball rule:s. 

COPYRiaHTTE^D, 1893. 

1. The ball is put in play as follows: The teams line up in 
their respective positions and the referee throws the ball up in 
the middle of the field. This is done at the beginning of the 
game, at the beginning of the second half, after each goal, 
when a foul has been made and whenever time has been 
called. 

2. The ball may be thrown in any direction with one or both 
hands. 

3. The ball may be batted in any direction with the open 
hand or hands. 

4. The ball cannot be struck with the lists or kicked. 

5. A player cannot run with the ball either in or out of 
bounds except as specified in rule 2. He must throw it from 
the spot on which he catches it, allowance to be made for a 
man who catches the ball while he is running, if he tries to stop. 
(This does not exclude turning around on the spot.) 

6. The ball must be held by the hands; the arms, legs or 
body must not be used for holding it. 

7. When the ball is passed from the field of play out of 
bounds in order to claim exemption from interference, or 
when it is passed between players, outside of bounds, the ball 
shall be given to the opponents. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES, 31? 



o 



Home. s 

L. Forward. R. Forward, o 



Centre. 
L. Centre. R. Centre, 



6 



L. Back. R. Back. 

Goal Keeper. 

O 



BASKET 



Diagram of Basket B^ll— poslttion of pUyerj. 



82 OFFICIAL SPOEtiNG RULES. 

8. When the ball is held by more than two men for any 
length of time, the referee shall blow the whistle and throw 
the ball straight up from the spot where it was held. 

1). No shouldering, holding, pushing, tripping or striking 
shall be allowed. The tlrst infringement of this rule shall 
count a foul, the second shall disqualify him but a substitute 
may take his place. 

10. The ball is not out of bounds until it crosses the line. 

11. When the ball goes out of bounds, it shall be returned by 
the side first holding it. The thrower in shall walk as directly 
towards the line as the apparatus, etc., will admit. He may 
then (1) bound it in and catch it, (2) throw it to some one in the 
field, or (3) roll it along the g-round. He is allowed five seconds 
(to hold it) and if he holds it longer than that, it goes to the 
opponents. In case of doubt in the mind of the referee as to 
which side first held the ball, he shall throw it up in the field 
of play. 

12. A foul is violation of rules 4, 5, 6, 9, 16 and 19. 

13. A goal shall be made when a ball is thrown or batted 
from the ground into the basket (directly or by a rebound from 
the sides) provided it stays in. If the ball rests on the edge of 
the basket and an opponent moves the basket, it shall count 
as a goal. 

14. The score shall be counted by points. A goal shall count 
3 points, a foul 1 point for the opponents. A majority of 
points shall decide the game. 

15. The goals must be protected against interference from 
the spectators, this protection to extend at leat six- feet on each 
side of the goal, and in case of a screen or other contri- 
vance, to be at least six feet high. In case of doubt in the mind 
of the referee or umpire arising from the presence of the spec- 
tators, the visiting team shall have the benefit of the doubt. 



OFFIClAIi SPOETING RULES. 33 

16. Any persistent intentional delay of tlie g'anie should be 
counted as afoul agrainst the team so delaying. 

17. The time shall be two halves of twenty minutes each or 
such time as the captains may mutually agree upon. This is 
time of actual play. 

18. The i-eferee shall be judge of tlie ball and decide when 
the ball is in play, to which side it belongs ; shall keep the 
time, decide when a goal has been made ; keep account of the 
goals and fouls made ; and any other duties not discharged by 
the umpire. 

19. The umpire shall be judge of the men, shall note the fouls 
made, report to the referee, keep an account of them, and 
notify the offenders. He shall have power to disqualify a 
player according to rule 9. In ease any player is needlessly 
rough in his efforts to get the ball, the umpire shall warn him, 
even though he does not make a foul, and if he persists, the 
umpire shall call a foul upon him or even disqualify him if he 
thinks it necessary. 

20. Any player has a right to get the ball at any time 
while it is in the field of play, provided only that he handles 
the ball and not the opponent. 

21. The team shall consist of five men when the actual 
playing space is less than 1200 square feet, and nine men when 
it is more than this and less than 3600 square feet. 

The position of umpire is a very responsible one and on his 
ruling depends, to a great degree, the value of the game. If 
he deliberately overlooks violation of the rules he is responsi- 
ble for a great deal of unnecessary roughness and consequent 
ill feeling, but if he is firm and impartial in his decision he 
will soon win the respect of all, even those who suffered at the 
time. 



34 OFFICIAL SPORTING IIULES. 

A player may stand in front of the thrower and obstruct the 
ball, but he must not violate rule 9. One aim of the rules 
has been to eliminate rough play, and for this reason the um- 
pire must interpret with this aim in view. 

It is difficult for an umpire to see what every man is doing 
in every play, but if he watches where the ball is going to 
alight he may note the few men who are actually engaged in 
the play and may detect fouls. He does not need to watch the 
l)ail but the men. This will simplify the woi-k of the umpire 
which is difficult at best. 



Ua\ms of Badminton 



AS ADOPTED BY THE BATH BADMINTON CLUB, BATH, ENGLAND. 



1. The Net extends 8 feet on each side of the central line of 
the courts and at right angles to it. The height of the net is 
5 feet at the centre, and 5 feet 1 inch at the posts. 

NOTE. — The top of the Net should be supported by a stout 
cord tightly strained; an iron or other rod supported in the 
centre is bad. The Net sliould be of fine cord and 2X feet 
deep. The post shoidd extend to the roof or ceiling. A side or 
stop net outside the post will assist in determining whether the 
play is outside the posts or not. 

2. The Courts are laid out as follows : 

At a distance of 6 feet 6 inches from the centre of the Net, 
the " short" service line is set oft" at right angles to the 
central line and exteding 10 feet on each side of it. 

At 15 feet 6 inches from this line the base line is drawn 
parallel to it, and also extending 10 feet on each side 
of the central line. 

The Court is completed by joining the ends of the " short " 
service line to the ends of the Net nearest to them, and 
to the ends of the bank boundary or base line. 

The central line is terminated, on each side, by the "short" 
service line and the back boundary or base line, 

3. The sides toss for choice of ends or service before the first 
game of a Match, and change to the other side of the Net after 
each game. If the winner of the toss chooses the right to 
serve, the losers shall have choice of sides, and vice versa. 



36 OFFICIAL SPOBTING RULES. 

CORRECT DIAGRAM OF A BADMINTON COURT. 



iJase Lino. 



10 ft. 




10 ft. 




1 


!0 




ox 




lO 




OS 

5* 


10 ft. 




10 ft. 




• f 8 ft. 


d 

CO 


Net. / 




a 


'8"ftr""Y"* 


/ 


cr 


\ 


/ 


ii 


\ 


/ 


«5 


> 


L 


10 ft. 




10 ft. 






_: 




w! 




--0 




r*" 




-ij 




5' 


10 ft. 




10 ft. 





OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 37 

4. The single-handed and double-handed game consists of 
15 aces. At " 13 all," the side which first reaches 13 has the 
option of " setting " ^ve ; at "14 all," of "setting" three. In 
three-handed or in four-handed games, the game consists of 
21 aces. First set is at 19 all ; second set is at 20 all. 

5. A Fault made by a player whose side is " in " puts a hand 
out; if made by a player whose side is "out" it counts an 
" ace " to the " in " side. 

6. It is a fault— 

(a.) If the service is " overhand," i. e., when, at the instant 
of striking the shuttlecock, the server's bat or wrist is 
higher than his elbow or shoulder ; or if the first part of 
the path of the shuttlecock is inclined downwards. 

(5.) If the service falls into the wrong court, i. e., not into 
the one diagonally opposite to the server. 

(c.) If the service falls short of the service line or outside 
the bounding lines. 

{(i.) Unless both the server's feet are in his own court. 

NOTE.— A foot on a line is held to be out of court. 
(e.) If, either in service or play, the shuttlecock fall outside 
the bounds of the court. 

NOTE.— A shuttlecock falling on any line is held to have fallen 
in the court of lohich such line is a boundary, i. e., the striker gets 
the benefit of the doubt. 

(/.) If, either in service or play, the shuttlecock does not 

pass between the posts, or if it pass under or through 

the net, or touch the roof, or the jjerson or dress of any 

player, or the side walls, or anything except the bat of 

the striker, or the top of the net. 
(g.) If the shuttlecock be hit twice intentionally by the 

same player, and be touched or hit by a player or his 

partner. 
(h.) If the shuttlecock be struck before it crosses to the 

striker's side of the net. 
(i.) If the striker touch the Net or its supports with his 

racket or otlierwise. 

7. It having been decided, as laid down in Rule 3, which side 
is to have the first hand, the player in the right-hand court of 



38 OFFICIAL SPORTING EULES. 

that side commences the game by serving to the player in the 
adverse right-hand court; if that player return the shuttle- 
cock, it must be hit back by the "in" side and then returned 
by the "out" side till a fault is made by one side or the other. 
If the fault is made by the "in" side, the server's hand is 
"out," and the player in the right-hand adverse court now 
becomes the server; but if the serve is not returned, or the 
fault is made by the "out" side, the " in " side scores an oce. 
The " in " side then changes courts, the server nov^ being in 
the left court and serving to the adverse left court. The game 
is continued in this manner, court being changed after each 
ace is made. The service line is disregarded after the serve is 
returned. 

8. The sides go in alternately to the end of the match, 

9. The innings of a side always begin with the player in the 
right-hand court. 

10. Serves must be made alternately from each court into 
the one diagonally opposite to it. 

11. The server may stand anywhere he likes in his own 
court. 

12. In 2, 3 and i handed games, the side beginning a game 
has only one hand in its tirst innings if there are 2 a side, and 
only two hands if there are 3 a side. In every subsequent 
innings, each partner of a side has a hand in regular rotation. 

13. In a 2 handed game, only the person served to may take 
the serve; but in a 3 or 4 handed game, the player standing 
back may take the serve if the shuttlecock has pas ed the 
player in front without being touched. 

14. No player of a side, except in single games, may take 
two consecutive serves. 

15. The server may not serve till his opponent is ready, but 
if a return of the service be attempted the player shall be 
deemed ready. 

16. Any unforeseen or accidental hindrance may be given a 
"Let" by the Umpire on appeal from either side before the 
next service commences or before the players have changed 
sides at the end of a game. A l^t cannot be claimed if an 
attempt has been made to strike the shuttlecock. 



BE;T[^^ri]S[(i^ rui.e:s. 



Bi-ona Ciooclwin's OFfioial Tuit-F GUIDES, 



1. In all bets there must be ca possibility to win when the bet 
is made; "you cannot win when you cannot lose." 

2. If a horse entered by an incorrect or insufficient descrip- 
tion is for that reason disqualitied and prevented from run- 
ning, bets on that horse are void. 

3. Bets follow the prize or stakes. If, however, a horse that 
comes in first is disqualified through an objection made a//er 
the race to the validity of his engagement, the bets shall go to 
him, provided his engagement was in good faith, and he is of 
the right age, and in other respects has not transgressed the 
rules of racing; but if the owner of a horse, or a person on hi.s 
behalf, succeed by mis-statement or fraudulent device in start- 
ing him for a race for which he was not qualified, the bets will 
go with the prize or stakes, whether any objection bo made 
either before or after the race. 

4. All bets are play or pay, unless otherwise stipulated, 

5. All double bets must be considei-ed play or pay. 

G. Confirmed bets cannot be off, except by mutual consent or 
by failure to make stakes at the time and place which ma}' 
have been agreed upon, in which case it is optional with a bet- 
tor not in default to declare then and there that the bet 
stands. If at the time specified for making stakes, the horse 
or horses backed are dead or struck out of the engagement, 
and a start has not been stipulated, the bettor against them 
need not, while the backer must, deposit his stake. If there is 
no stipulation when the bet is made for the deposit of stakes, 
thev cannot be demanded afterward. 



40 OFFIOIATi SPOBTING EULES. 

7. All bets on matches or private sweepstakes dependiug 
between any two horses shall be void, if those horses sub- 
sequently become the propertj^ of the same person or his 
avowed confederate. 

8. All bets between designated horses are void, if neither of 
them is placed in the race; except bets between designated 
horses started for a race of heats, but not starting for a third 
heat, which are determined by their places in the second heat, 
and bets between sucli horses and a horse starting for a tlnrd 
heat, which are won by the latter, even though he be distanced 
afterward. 

9. Any bet made from signal or indication when the race 
has been determined shall be considered f radulent and void. 

10 The person who lays the odds has a right to choose a horse 
or the held ; when a person has chosen a horse, the held is 
what starts against him. If odds are laid without mentioning 
the horse before the race is over, the bet must be determined 
by the state of the odds at the time of making it. 

11. When a certain number of horses are taken against the 
tield, and among them are horses struck out of the engage- 
ment, or disqualified, or even never engaged, the bet neverthe- 
less stands, so long as there remains one horse which is qnali- 
tied to start at the time the bet is made. 

12. On the postponement of a race bets stand, but if any 
change be made in the conditions of a race, bets made before 
the change are void. 

13. Bets made on horses winning any number of i-aces with- 
in the year shall be understood to mean between the 1st of 
January and 31st of December, 

11. If a bet is made between two horses with the condition 
of a specified forfeit, and both horses start, either party may 
declare forfeit, and the person making this declarati(m would 
pay the forfeit, if tlie other horse is placed, but would receive 
nothing in the event of his horse being placed. 

15. Money given to have a bet laid shall not be returned, 
though the race be not run. 

16. Bets made after a race that a winner will be disqualified, 
stand, even if no objection be made. 



OrnCIAIi SPORTING RULES. 4:1 

17. When a horse has been assigned his position by the 
starter, stipulations for a start are complied with. 

18 Bets are void on the decease of either party before the 
race. 

19. Bets on a match for which a dead heat is run are void. 

20. When horses run a dead heat for a purse or sweepstakes , 
and the owners divide, all bets between such a horses, or be- 
tween either of them and the field, are settled by putting" to- 
gether the money betted and dividing- it equally. 

A bet on a horse that runs a dead heat against a beaten 
horse is won. 

21. Double event bets are determined when the tirst event 
is lost. 

22. If two of -'triple events" or either of "double events" aie 
decided in the backer's favor and the other results in a dead 
heat, the money is put together and divided equally. 

If one of "triple events" is decided in the backer's favor and 
two result in dead heats, the money betted is put together 
and divided into four parts one of which goes to the backer. 

23. The following conditions govern bets made on the course 
on the day of the race : 

When the number of a horse has been exhibited all bets on 
him stand, unless otherwise ordered by the Executive Com- 
mittee. 

If a horse is disqualified for incorrect weight, bets on him 
are not affected by the disqualiticrtion, if he carried not less 
than the weight on the official programme or as ct)rrected on 
the notice board; nor shall disqualification for error of regis- 
tration affect such bets. 



LAWS OF BICYCIJNG. 

1894. 



EXTRACTS FROM CONSTITUTION AND BY-LAWS. 

CONSTITUTION.— Article III., Section 9. 

CLASS A. 

Amateur Rule.— An amateur of Class A is one who has not engaged 
in, nor assisted in, nor taught cycling or any otlier recognized athletic 
exercise for money or other remuneration, nor knowingly competed 
with or against a professional for a prize of any description; or who, 
after having forfeited his amateur status, has had the same restored by 
a unanimous vote of the National Assembly, L. A. AV. A cyclist ceases 
to be an amateur of Class A by: 

(a). Engaging in cycling or other recognized athletic exercises, or 
personally teaching, training or coaching any person tlierein, either 
as a means of obtaining a livelihood, or for a wager, money prize or 
gate money. 

(6). Competing with a professional or amateur of Class B, or making 
the pace for, or having the pace made by, such in public or for a prize. 

(c). Selling, pawning, exchanging, bartering or otherwise turning 
into cash, or in any manner realizing cash upon any prize won by him. 

(<^). Accepting directly or indirectly for cycling any remuneration, 
compensation or expense whatever. 

(e). In this class no prize shall exceed fifty dollars in value, and such 
prizes shall be limited to medals, diplomas, plate, jewelry and cycle 
sundries only. 

(/). An amateur of Class A may not compete outside of his own 
state, at a distance greater than 200 miles, by the ordinary clianuels of 
travel, from his legal residence, except by special permission from the 
member of Racing Board in charge of his district. 

(g). A cyc'.ist does not forfeit his Class A status by teaching the ele- 
ments of cycling solely for the purpose of effecting the sale of a cycle; 
nor shall the business of cycle manufacturers and bona fide agents, as 
such, be considered in determination of their amateur status. 

(A). License may be granted by unanimous vote of the Racing Board 
for a special competition in any year between the recognized cham- 
pions of Classes A and B, the prize rules of Class A to govern the 
contest. 

(i). Any amateur who neglects or refuses o answer questions touch- 
ing his status in Class A to the satisfaction of the Racing Board and 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 43 

Within thirty days shall be transferred to Class B, and shall have no 
further opportunity for hearing or appeal. 
CLASS B. 

A.n amateur cf Class B shall be a cycle rider who may be in the 
employ of , and have his traveling and training expenses paid by, a 
manufacturer of cycles, club or other parties interested in cycling, but 
shall not compete for a cash or divisible prize, nor realize upon any 
prize won by him, except as hereinafter provided. One also wlio has 
ridden for any prize valued at over $50 or of different descriptions 
from that allowed in Class A. A cyclist ceases to be an amateur of 
Class B by: 

(a). Engagmg in cycling or other recognized athletic sports or exer- 
cise, for a wager, money prize or gate money. 

(6). Competing with a professional, or making pace for, or havingthe 
pace made for himself by such in public or for a prize, except as herein- 
after provided. 

(c). Selling, pawning, or otherwise turning into cash, or in any man- 
ner realizing cash upon any prize won by him, except that prizes may 
be exchanged or bartered provided there is in no case a cash bonus 
received. 

(d). Competing in a cycle race on the track for a prize value of more 
than $150, except in the case of special sanction having been given by 
the Racing Board for a greater value prize at any special meeting. 

{e). A cyclist does not forfeit his amateur status in this class by teach- 
ing the elements of cycling. 

(/). Any amateur of Class B who neglects or refuses to answer 
questions touching his amateur status, to the satisfaction of the Racing 
Board, inside of thirty days, shall be declared to have forfeited his 
amiteur status. 

ig). The League recognizes as athletic exercises, in addition to 
cycling, all sports over which tlie Amateur Athletic Union, The National 
Association of Amateur Oarsmen and other amateur athletic organiza- 
tions have jurisdiction. 

PA€EMAKING. 

By a special sanction, granted upon a unanimous vote of the Racing 
Board, permission may be granted in Class B to employ professional 
pacemakers in any eveut or record trial, where the importance of same 
may be wan-anted as set forth in application for said sanction. 



BY- LAWS.— Article IY., Section 7. 
(a). To the Racing Board shall bo referred all matters pertaining to 
racing and the championsiiips. It shall make all arrasgements for the 
annual championships which are held under League auspices, and shall 
assign such other championships as are now or may be estabUshed, to 
be run under the auspices of such clubs or associations as it may 



ii 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 



consider most desii'able, and under sucli conditions as it may deem 
expedient. 

(&). Itsliallbetheduty of the Board to make inquiry regarding any 
■wheelman whose amateur status in either class is questioned, and all 
protests or charges shall be entered with the chairman of the Board 
who shall provide for an investigation by a member or members of the 
Board. Pending investigation, the party against whom these charges 
aie brought may be suspended from the track. Suspicious circum- 
elances, which are, in the judgment of any member of the Board, suffl- 
cient to make a status of any wheelman a matter of reasonaljle doubt, 
shall be the basis of an investigation in the absence of formal protest or 
charges. The member or members to whom the work of investigation 
is assigned, shall immediately communicate with the party under sus- 
picion, either in person or by registered letter, lay all charges before 
him, or set forth the circumstances which lead to a reasonable doubt, 
and call for an answer to the charges or a satisfactory explanation of 
the circumstances which give rise to the doubt. If the charges are 
proved, or the reasonable doubt is not removed, it shall be the duty of 
the chairman to report the findings in the official organ, declaring that 
the party has forfeited his amateur status, and warning all amateurs 
not to compete with him ; and such official declaration shall carry with 
it expulsion from the League if the person concerned is a member 
thereof. 

(c). The Racing Board shall have the right in considering and deter- 
mining questions that affect the amateur status of any cyclist to act 
upon any kind of evidence, circumstantial or direct. 

At the termination of the investigation by the member in charge, his 
findings shall be submitted to the chairman, who upon direct evidence 
may expel, and upon circumstantial evidence order a vote of the 
entire board, a majority vote of which shall expel. 

(d). Any cyclist who has been expelled shall have the right to appeal 
only to the National Assembly of the L A. W., and shall be reinstated 
only by vote of such assembly, upon a competent showing of error on 
the part of the Racing Board. 

{e). The Racing Board, through its chairman, shall have the right of 
cenaorship over the character of prizes offered in cycle races, and may 
withhold or withdraw the sanction to race promoters, providing its 
decision in excluding any prize is not complied with. 

(/). It shall be within the province of the Racing Board to suspend 
from the race track, for such a time as it may deem proportionate fo 
the offense, any wheelman guilty of unfair dealing in connection with 
cycle racing, or ungentlemanly conduct on the track, or any wheelman 
who competes in a race not governed by the rules of the L. A. W. , or 
those that may be approved by the Racing Board. Any wheelman who 
knowingly competes with one who has been suspended will render 
himself liable to a like penalty. 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 45 

(g). Whenever permission is granted to an amateur of Class A to 
compete at greater distance from his legal residence than allowed by 
the rule, the member of Racing Board granting same shall require a 
certitied itemized statement of expenses, with receipts and vouchers; 
and shall notify chairman at once that said permission has been granted. 

(h). The Racing Board shall have the power to make such rules for 
its government and the government of cycle race meetings as may be 
deemed expedient, and may appoint one or more official handicappers 
at its discretion. 

The following will be considered as unfair dealing and ungentle- 
manly conduct and render the offender liable to a suspension: 

1. Entering a class race to which his record does not give him the 
right of entry. 

2. Suppression of true figures and rendering of false figures to the 
official handicappers. 

3. The use of obscene language on the track. 

4. Swearing at other competitors and at race officials. 



GENERAL RULES. 

A. Any amateur wilfully competing at races not held under the 
rules of the Board, or rules approved by the Board, or who shall enter 
a Class A event In violation of rules governing same, shall be liable to 
suspension from the race track for such a time as the Racing Board 
may determine; and amateurs are notified that to compete against any 
rider who has been suspended will render them liable to the same 
penalty. 

Any person under suspension who shall enter or compete in any race 
in public, or for a prize, shall be liable to further suspension, for such 
contempt of rules, at the discretion of the National Racing Board. 

B, Promoters of race meets must in all cases apply to the member 
of the National Racing Board in charge of the District in which the 
event or events are to be run, for official sanction. If it shall appear 
that there will be a confliction of dates and interests, the first applica- 
tion under this rule shall have precedence, to be decided by said mem- 
ber of the Board, and notice of such race meet or event must be for- 
warded to the Chairman of the National Board by the members in 
charge. 

All other conditions being equal, the preference shall be given to the 
League club. 

State division meets shall in all cases be granted sanctions, upon 
filing application at least thirty days prior to holding of same. 

In event of the holder of a sanction finding it impossible to secure a 
track for date of same, sanction may be withdrawn and awarded to 
some other club or person. 

Athletic clubs shall, in all cases, be granted a sanction, where but two 
cycling events are to be run in connection with a general athletic 



46 BICYCLE RACING RULES. 

programme. Where it is desired to hold more than two events the rule 
regarding conflictions shall apply. 

Any amateur competing at a race meet or event, not thus omcially 
sanctioned, shall be suspended at the option of the Board. 

C. The Racing Board will receive and pass upon all claims for record.s, 
either competition or time. 

The standard table of recognized records shall be M, H, H, %, H^ 1 
mile and all even miles upward ; no intermediate distances. 

Competition record must be made at an open meeting. 

Records against time may be made at an open meeting, or in private, 
and may be made with or without pacemakers. Records made at pri- 
vate trials will only be allowed, if at least two weeks' notice has been 
given the chairman of the Board that such attempts are to be made. 
The referee of such trials shall be a properly accredited representative 
of the L. A. W., appointed by the chairman upon application, and there 
shall be at least twelve witnesses present, to attest to the correctness of 
the record. 

Claimants must furnish a statement from the judges and time- 
keepers, together with a SAVorn statement from a competent surveyor, 
certifying the measurement of the track. When a claim for a record 
has been proved to the satisfaction of the Board, the record shall be 
published in the official organ, and stand as record on the books of the 
Board. No claim for record made at a meeting not governed by League 
rules will be considered. No claim for record made on the Lord's day 
will be considered. The Board will enter no competition record on its 
books that is not made at an open meeting of which at least one week's 
notice has been given. A competition record must be made in a race 
between men. 

No records, made with the assistance of other than recognized 
cycling machines, propelled by man power, will be accepted. 

D. Tracks shall be measured on a line drawn eighteen inches out from 
a well-defined, fixed and continuous inner curb or pole, and no record 
shall be allowed on a track otherwise measured. 

E. The Board reserves the right to exclude from the racing path any 
and all machines which, in its Judgment, do not come within the com- 
monly accepted meaning of the terms " bicycle '' and "tricycle," either 
by peculiarity of construction or by undoubted mechanical advantages 
which they may possess. 

F.— 1. The National L. A. W. championship events shall be as follows: 
One-quarter, one-half, one mile, two mile and five mile "safety" bicycle. 

2. Each L. A. W. Division may contest under the supervision of its 
Division Racing Board, events to be known as Division Cliampionships. 
These may be corresponding to the National Championships, or other- 
wise, as each Division Racing Board may decide. 

No prizes except medals, suitably inscribed, shall be given to, or 
received by any cyclist competing in Division championships. 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 47 

The Chairman of tlie National Racing Board sliall have power to 
appoint Division Racing Boards, and fill vacancies therein, when not 
provided for iu a Division's constitution or by-laws. Each Division 
Racing Board shall have entire charge of all matters pertaining to the 
running of the championships of its Division. The Division cham- 
pionships shall be contested at such place or places as the Division 
I acingBoard may determine, but shall be assigned only to League 
clubs. Division championships are open to any League member of 
Class A residing in the Division. 

3. The National championships shall be contested annually between July 
15th and October 15th, at such place as the Racing Board may determine. 
National championships are open to all amateur wheelmen of Class A 
and Class B, resident of the United States, and the trophies for National 
championships shall be medals to cost in no case more than Fifty dol- 
lars per set of three (gold, silver and bronze respectively), to become 
the property of the winners, and to be struck from dies owned by the 
League. 

5. The Racing Board shall give at least thirty days' notice of the 
location and date of the National championships. Division Racing 
Boards shall, within their own division, give at least fourteen days' 
notice of the location and date of the Division championships; and no 
confliction of dates will be allowed, provided, however, that in case 
such notice has been properly given, and it is found necessary for 
good reasons to postpone to some date within fourteen days of the 
original date, the first no ice will be considered sufficient under this rule . 

No city or county championship .shall be granted unless approved by 
the Division Board. 

6. Privilege fo hold State championships in states where no Division 
of the League has been formed may be granted to clubs or authorized 
associations, where the importance of the meeting is sufficient to war. 
rant the Racing Board's special sanction. 

G. — 1. The Board shall appoint seven or more League handicappers, 
giving to each a special district at its discretion, who shall, for a 
stated fee, attend to the classification and handicapping of racing 
men . Classifications shall be based upon the actual time made by the 
man entering, for the distance of the class race under consideration 
(see Rule 28). Handicaps shall be based on the ability as well as 
record of the contestants. Handicaps shall be framed and the men 
classified before the day of the race, shall appear on the programme, 
and shall not be changed during that day's meeting. 

2. Entries to handicap and class races sball close seven days prior to 
contest to allow time for proper investigation. All entries must be 
accompanied by a statement of best two performances, and all entries 
not so accompanied shall be thrown out by the handicapper. 

3. Entrance fee to all races must in all cases be paid iu advance, and 
failure to so pay shall be sufficient reason for disqualification by the 
Executive Board of the race meet. 



48 BICYCLE RACrNG RULBS. 

Providing a contestant shall have ridden and won a prize, and for 
any reason his fees shall not have been paid or collected, he shall be 
given thirty days in which to pay same, and at the expiration of that 
time the management of the races may sell said prizes for its own 
acconnt, and the contestant shall forfeit all claims to same. 

5 Promoters of races must send to tlie official handicapper of the 
district in which the races are to be held a complete list of entries, 
accompanied by entry blanks in all handicap and class races, not later 
than five days previous to tlie date of races. Any contestant in a 
handicap or class race, not handicapped or classified by the district 
handicapper, shall be liable to suspension from the race track for such 
a time as the Racing Board may determine, except that in closed club 
or school races, the captain of such club or school may do the handi- 
capping. All entry blanks shall become the property of the League, 
and shall be in charge of the district handicappers. Promoters of race 
meeting shall send to the official handicapper of their races, and to the 
member of the Racing Board granting sanction for same, within one 
week after a race meeting, an official programme of the meet, giving 
the times and of the first and second man in each event. 

Failure to comply with this rule will result in refusal of further 
sanctions. 

Programmes shall show the address, city and state of each rider, 
and shall state which events are for Class A or Class B riders. A 
caution shall appear on programme to the following eCTect: 

" Notice to Riders.— All races on this programme are limited as 
follows: Class A — Riders that reside in this state or live within 200 
miles of place of meet, and the prizes for which do not exceed $50. 
Class B— Such races that have prizes exceeding $50 in value, and open 
to any amateur rider, under Class B definition, according to L. A. W. 
rules.'' 

Riders are cautioned that to ride in Class B races or to violate any 
clause of Class A, will make them ineligible to future events in 
Class A. 

The value of each prize shall appear, and where a value is brought 
into dispute, the retail price of same shall govern the settlement. 

Race promoters shall not advertise the intended presence of any 
racing man, Tinless a notice in writing to that eflect is in their posses- 
sion, signed by the man advertiseu. 

No further sanctions shall be granted to any meet promoter evading 
tiiese rules. 

An obligation rests on racing men to appear at race meets, where 
definite promises have been given to do so. 

Any racing man after having given such promise, and failing to give 
notice within at least two weeks previous to the holding of meet for 
which he is advertised, to the managers thereof that he will not be 
present, shall be suspended from all track racing for a period to be 
determined by the chairman of Racing Board. 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 49 

6. A fee of twenty-fire cents may be charged for each handicap, and 
ten cents for each classified entry, to be paid by the club or promoters 
of the race meeting for which the handicapping and classifying is 
done. 

7. No open betting shall be permitted. The officials of a race meeting 
(see Rule 2) shall not bet upon the results of any race. Officials found 
guilty of violating this rule shall be debarred from holding official 
positions at race meetings for such time as the Racing Board may 
determine. 

TRACK RULES. 

1. Entries and awards in amateur events shall be confined strictly to 
amateurs, as defined by the two-class amateur rule of the L. A W., 
and persons entering for these races who are not members of cycle or 
other athletic clubs whose rules of membership exclude professionals, 
must satisfy the Executive Board that they are not professionals, either 
by their own statements in writing or otherwise. 

2. The officers of all race meetings and cycling events shall be a 
referee, who must be an amateur wheelman, three judges at the finish, 
three time-keepers, one starter, one clerk of the course with assistants 
if necessary, and one umpire for each turn in the track, or more, at 
option of the referee. The referee, judges, and clerk of the course 
shall constitute the Executive Board. 

3. The referee shall have general supervision of the race meeting. He 
shall give judgments on protests received by him ; shall decide all 
questions or objections respecting foul riding or offences which he 
may be personally cognizant of, or which may be brought to his atten- 
tion by an umpire or other officers. He shall act as he may think for 
the best in cases of misconduct by attendants, and shall disqualify any. 
competitor for the event, day or meet, who may become liable to dis- 
qualification. He shall decide all questions whose settlement is not 
otherwise provided for in these rules. His decision in all cases shall 
be final, providing his decision does not conflict with any of these racing 
rules, in which case a protest must be made, prizes held and an appeal 
made to the Racing Board. 

4. The judges shall decide the positions of the men at the finish. In 
case of disagreement, the majority shall decide. Their decision shall 
be final and without appeal. 

5. The time keepers shall compare watches before the races are 
started, and shall note any variance; they shall each time, every event, 
and in case of disagreement the intermediate time of the three watches 
shall be the official time. Time shall be taken from the flash of a pistol. 
In case two watches of the three mark the same time, that shall be the 
official time. 

6. The scorer shall record the laps made by each competitor, the 
order of the men at the finish as given him by the judges, and the time 



50 BICYCLE RACING RULES. 

as given liira by the timekeepers. He shall indicate the commence- 
ment of the last lap by ringing a bell as the riders pass over the mark 
for the final lap. 

7. It shall be the duty of the starter, when it has been i eported to him 
by the clerk of the course that all the competitors are ready, to see that 
the time-keepers are warned, and before starting the men to say, 
" Mount " ; in a few seconds after to say, " Are the timers ready? Are 
the starters ready?" and if no reply to the contrary be given, to effect 
the start by report of a pistol. Should the pistol miss fire, the start may 
be made by the word "Go,'' The starter shall announce to the com- 
petitors the distance which they are to ride. The starter may, at his 
discretion, put back for a distance any competitor starting before the 
signal is given. In case of a false start, the competitors shall be called 
back by the starter by the ringing of a bell and re-started. 

Any competitor refusing to obey shall at once be disqualified. 

In handicap events the starter shall post a man one hundred feet in 
front of the limit man, and in case of false starts the man so placed 
shall drop a flag at a signal from the starter, agreed on before the race 
is run. 

In case of a fall within thirty feet of the scratch line, the contestants 
shall be recalled by the starter by the ringing of a bell and the race 
started over again. 

8. The clerk of the course shall call competitors in ample time for 
each event, and see that they are provided with numbers properly worn. 
He shall report the contestants to the scorers, see that they are on their 
appointed marks, and call their numbers for the scorers as thpy cross 
the line at the end of each lap. 

9. IL shall be the duty of an umpire to stand at such part of the field 
as the referee may direct, to watch closely the riding and immediately 
after each race to report to the referee any competitor or competitors 
wliose riding he may consider unfair, to the end that the referee, before 
making any decision, may be credibly informed by an ofllcial as to 
the facts 

10. It shall be the duty of the Executive Board to pass upon any ques- 
tionable entry, and they shall have the power to make any alteration in 
the programme that they may deem necessary or to disqualify intend- 
ing competitors without any protests being lodged by another com- 
petitor. 

11. No persons whatsoever shall be allowed inside the track except 
the officials of the meet. The handicapper of the meet shall at all times, 
however, have track privileges. Authorized persons shall wear a 
badge. Competitors or pacemakers not engaged in a race actually tak- 
ing place shall not be allowed inside or on the track. No one shall be 
allowed to " coach " competitors on the track. 

12. Any competitor making a false entry shall be disqualified and 
debarred from any place or prize, and will be liable to suspension from 



BICYCLE RACING RULES. 51 

the race tracks. The liability of all entry blanks us made tut, s'lall rest 
upon the contestant for whom it is sent in, whether personally tilled out 
or otherwise. 

Any competitor in a Class A race w^ho neglects to give his legal resi- 
dence or who gives other than his legal residence as such, shall be con- 
sidered to have made a false entry and will be subject to the penalty 
for false entries, 

13. Choice or change of machine and choice of cost shall not be 
limited, except that shirt shall not bare shoulder, and breeches must 
extend to the knee. Referee must insist on the enforcement of this 
ruie. 

Riders may register with the chairman of the Racing Board, colors 
to be worn by them in cycle races, in sending applications for same, 
the combination, or way in which colors are to be worn, must be given. 
The colors selected will be entered and published as assigned to the 
party making application, ^ind all suitsequent applicants for same will 
be notified to select some other combination. 

In races distinctly stated on the programme of events to be for a 
particular class of machine, this rule shall not apply so far as clioice 
and change of machine are concerned. Safety bicycle races shall be 
limited to machines whose driving wheel does not exceed thirty -six 
inches in diameter. " Ordinary " bicyc'es and " safety " or " tandem '' 
safety bicycles, shall not be ridden in the same race except by per- 
mission of the chairman of the Racing Board. Race promoters desir- 
ing to bar out a certain type or style of machine must give notice of 
such intention on both entry blank and programme, in order that 
racing men muy understand the conditions under which they are to 
compete. 

14. Every competitor will receive, in the dressing room, a number 
corresponding to his number on the programme, which must be worn 
on his back or right shoulder, during the race. He shall inform himself 
of the times at which he must compete, and await the call of the clerk 
in the dressing room. 

15. The drawing for positions in each event shall be done by the pro- 
moters of the meeting, and the positions of tlie men shall appear on 
the programme. When it becomes necessary to draw for positions of 
the grounds, the work shall be done by the clerk and starter in con- 
junction. In heat races, the winner of the first heat shall take the pole 
in the next succeeding heat. When races are run in heats and a final, 
the winner of the fastest heat shall take the pole in the final. Only the 
winners of positions in the trial heat shall compete in the final. 

16. All starts shall be from the inside of the track, and, except in a 
fiying start event, shall be from a standstill, with the left hand towards 
the curb, and the machines shall be held in position by an attendant 
(the front wheel touching the starting line) until the signal is given by 
starter. Attendants, when pusliing ofT competito s, must keep behind 



52 BICYCLE KACING RULES. 

the mark from which the competitor actually starts. Should any part 
of the attendant's body touch the track in front of the mark, the com- 
petitor may be disqualified. Any competitor shall be at liberty, with 
the consent of the referee, to start from a mark behind the one allotted 
him in the race, but in such a case, as in all others, the point of con- 
tact of the front wheel of the machine with the ground shall be con- 
sidered the starting mark, and the same rule shall apply, 

17. The finish of all races shall be judged by the first part of the 
front wheel which touches the tape fastened flat on the ground at the 
winning post. 

18. Riders shall pass on the outside (unless the man passed be dis- 
mounted) and must be at least a clear length of the cycle in front 
before taking the inside. The inside man must allow room for his 
competitor to pass on the outside. A competitor overtaking another 
may pass between him and the pole if there be ample room, but lie 
does so at his own risk, and should a foul be claimed, the referee must 
decide whether the rider was Justified in his course. Riders are 
cautioned that they must not pass Inside, except as a last resort. 

19. Any competitor guilty of foul riding shall be disqualified, and 
debarred from any place or prize and will be liable to suspension from 
the race tracks. 

20. Any protest against a competitor respecting his qualification as 
ail amateur or as to his proper class, must be lodged with the referee 
before starting; and any protest respecting foul riding or breach of 
rules must be made to the referee immediately after the heat is finished. 
A competitor, upon being disqualified, shall forfeit any entry fee he 
may have paid, 

21. Competitors may dismount during a race at their pleasure, and 
may run with their cycles if they wish to, but they must keep to the 
extreme outside of the path whenever dismounted. If a rider be dis- 
mounted by accident or to change his machine, an attendant may hold 
his machine while he mounts it, and he shall so mount at the extreme 
outside of the path. 

22. Any wheelman found guilty of unfair dealing in connection Avith 
cycle racing, or of ungentlemauly conduct on the race track, shall be 
suspended from the race tracks for such a time as may be deemed pro- 
portionate to the ofl'ence. (See Clause D, Section 7, Article IV, of 
By-Laws, page 10 of rules.) 

23. The referee may place a time limit on any race. The time limit 
shall not be announced to the contestants, until their arrival at the tape 
preparatory to the start of the race. If the competitors finish within 
the limit they shall receive the prizes. If they fall to so finish, and the 
referee is convinced by their riding and the time that they endeavored 
to reach the limit, he may award the prizes. It shall be his privilege to 
withhold any prize, if in his opinion any competitor did not try to win 
the race. 



Bicycle racing rules. 53 

24. In order to secure a special prize offered for the fastest time made 
at a stated distance, the successful competitor must have ridden the 
entire distance of theTace in which he makes his record. 

25. If, in any race, by reason of accident or withdrawal, only one 
contestant remains upon the track, the referee may call such contestant 
from the track and award him the first prize. If a competitor in a race 
for any distance not exceeding three miles, shall fall behind a quarter 
of a mile or if he shall fall behind half a mile, in a race of any greater 
length, he shall be adjudged distanced by the referee, and shall be called 
from the track. Pacing, if attempted, shall disqualify both the com. 
petitorand pacemaker. 

A general pacemaker may be put in any race by the race promoter, 
having previously notified the referee of the fact. He shall assist no 
single rider, but shall act to increase the speed of the race in general. 
He shall be entitled to any place or prize he may win, may be rewarded 
by a special prize within the limits of his class, but cannot accept a 
cash remuneration. 

26. The officers of a race meeting (see Rule 2) shall not be permitted 
to compete in any race at a race meeting with which they are officially 
connected. 

The handicapper shall not be permitted to compete in any race with 
which he is officially connected. 

37. A novice race is open only to those who have never won a prize In 
a track race, and shaU be the first race of the meet. 

28. A class race is only open to those who, up to date of the closing of 
entries, have not won the first position in a tmck race or trial heal In 
the same or better time than the class under consideration. 

29. In a lap race, the position of the first three men shall be taken at 
the finish of every lap. The first man shall score three points, the 
second man shall score two points, the third man shall score one point, 
and no others shall score. The contestant who crosses the line first at 
the finish shall for that lap score four points. The competitor who 
scores the greatest number of points, shall be declared the winner; 
but any contestant, in order to secure a prize, must ride the entire dis- 
tance and be within 150 yards of the finish when the first man crosses 
the tape at the end of the last lap. Any competitor failing to comply 
with this rule shall be disqualified. 

30. In a team race the position of the first number of men correspond- 
ing to the number of teams starting shall be taken at the end of each lap. 

The first man shall count a number of points equal to the number of 
teams starting, the second one less, and so on. 

On the final lap the first man shall be credited with one extra point 
and the others as above. 

The team scoring the greatest number of points shall be declared the 
winner. 

A team shall be limited to three riders, each of whom shall have been 



^^ BICYCLE RACING RULES. 

a member of the club entering the team for at least three months nre- 
viousto date of event. Each team member must also haTe re ided 
withm five miles of the city or town where the club has its head 
quarters for at least six months previous to the date of contest 

31 The contestants in the run-and-ride shall be started on foot in the 
ranTdi"''' "r ^^^^^^^^ ^'^^" '^^ ^^^^-ned on the trackatthe mount- 
ing and dismounting stations, who shall take account of the fairness of 
mounting and dismounting. Mounting before reaching, or d smount 

uT^i^T'T'T^' '''"'' '' '"^'''"^ ^^"^^ ^- ^-^-^"- 

tlTe^ntlerace'"^ ''''''' '^^'' ^' "°'-'^"^'^"" °^ '''' ^^^^^^^^ «f 

JL^y^?\ '*''' '''' P"'*"^'' ^^ ^^^^^ ^i^e^ "^««t be taken at the 
finish Of each heat. The first man shall count a number equal to that 

he t hiM two r '" T '''' '"'*' ''^ ^^^^"^ ^^^° «^^" «^-^t one less, 
the third two less, and so on. The competitor who scores the greates 
number of points shall be declared the winner 

33. Entries in a consolation race shall be limited to those who have 
wonnopnzeinanyeventof the meeting; provided, however, if onl/a 

Z nn.T' "" ^'T '"^ '"' '"^^ '""''^ "^^^^^^« «f the Winning team 
Shall not be considered to have won a prize and shall be eligible to the 
consolation race. 

34 Any Club or race promoters desiring to place upon their list of 
events a race of different nomenclature than those given above, must 
first explain the nature of the event to the chairman of the National 
Racmg Board and obtain his consent. The consent having been 
obtained, they shall print upon the entry blank and the programme of 
the day, a rule to define the race, that the officials and contestants may 
clearly understand the conditions of the contest 

35^ Any attendant, trainer or manager who shall, in the Judgment of 
the Racing Board, by reason of unfair conduct, coaching, blackmailing 
schemes, attempts to extort money from race promoters, or other 
ungeutlemanly action detrimental to the amateur racing interests of 
the League, may by a majority vote of the Racing Board, be ruled oif 
the race tracks and prohilnted from exercising his vocation, or appear- 
ing on the track at any race meet held under these rules, for such a 
tirne as the Board may determine. Violation of this rule will result in 
withdrawal of smction privileges from promoters permitting such 
infringement, and suspension from racing of racing man accepting 
service from such attendant during suspension. 

36. Ignorance of any of the foregoing rules will not be considered a 
valid excuse for violation. 

A printed copy of the above rules may be had of any member of the 
Racing Board by inclosing a stamp for return postage. 



Corj^clitioiis c^f S£ir\ction» 

As Adopted by the Racing Board of the L. A. W., 1894. 



Proarr">mmos must contain a notice similar to the foUowlng: Held 
under sanction of Li. A. W. Racing Board andL. A. V/. Rules. 

An obligation rests on the recipient of this sanction, to 
mall at the conclusion of the meet for which it is granted, u. 
copy of the programme with the name of each starter in each 
race checked, to the member of the Kacing Board granting same. 
No further sanctions will he granted unless this is do7ie at once. 

The racing men are divided in two classes. Class A, men 
who ride only in their own state or 200 miles from their legal 
residence, and for prizes not exceeding $50 in value, which 
must consist of medals, diplomas, plate, jewelry and cycle 
sundries only, and who are not allowed any expenses whatever, 
or payment from manufacturers. 

Class B.— Includes all men, other than the above, but who 
have not been declared professionals. A list of Class B, men 
may always be found in the last issue of the Official League 
paper, and should be referred to before programme is made up. 

A Class B rider may not compete for a prize value of over 
$150, unless special permission for greater prize values has 
been given to this meet. 

A Class A, rider must hold a special permit to ride outside 
the two hundred mile limit and exhibit same to be allowed to 
ride. 

The legal residence, city and state of each rider must appear on 
programme. 

The following explanation must appear on programme, ajid 
entrp blank. 

Notice to Riders. All races on this programme are limited 
as follows: Class A.— Riders that reside in this state or live 
within 200 miles of place of meet, and the prizes for which do 
not exceed $50. Class B — Such races that have prizes exceed- 
ing $50 in value, and open to any rider, under Class B defini- 
tion, according to L. A. W. rules. 

Riders are cautioned that to ride in Class B or to violate 
any clause of Class A will make them inelligible to future 
events in Class A. 

Note. As the racing men will be punished for promising 
to ride at a meet and then failing to appear, without good 
reason, yo?i as a race promoter are requested to refrain from 
advertising any man until you have his bona fide entry or his 
promise in writing to be present. 



Law^s ok Bowls. 



-^ A RINK. 



1. When two, three, four, or any number of players, not ex- 
ceeding eight, form sides and commence a game, they make 
what is called a rink. Eight players, that is four on each side, 
make a complete rink, and are classed as leaders, second and 
third players, and drivers. Each player plays two bowls, so 
that when a rink is complete sixteen bowls are played in all . 
In the absence of one player, his side is permitted to play his 
bowls, which are called '"odd." A toss up decides which party 
is to play first. One bowl of each side is played alternately. 
The space or division of the green is also commonly called a 
rink, 

2. The number of players in a rink is not to exceed eight. 
When there are four players in a side, the last part>' admitted 
to play second or third, as his driver may direct; but the 
leaders and drivers retain their position until the game is 
finished. 

LEADERS. 

3. The first player, or leader, to place the cloth and throw 
the jack. Before throwing the jack, he shall announce to the 
driver the result of the last end or state of the game, as in- 
structed, and shall alse be guided by him as to where to throw 
the jack. 

DRIVERS. 

4. Drivers shall have the sole charge of their respective rinks, 
and their instructions shall be implicitly obeyed by the other 
players. They may appoint substitutes to direct when they 
play themselves. They should be judges of all disputed points, 
and, if agreeing, their decision is final ; if not, the matter to 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 57 

i>e decided by an umpire appointed by them. No person should 
direct except the drivers and their substitutes, altliough the 
players on tlie same side may consult with or advise them. 
As soon as a bowl is greened, the driver must retire two yards 
at least from the jack, in order that the opposing party may 
witness the effects of the play. The second players should 
mark the game as called out by the leaders. 

SPACE. 

5. Previous to beginning a match game, the numbers of each 
mioccupied space should be put into a bag and one drawn out , 
within the limits of which the play of the party or rink must 
be confined, unless otherwise agreed upon. Promiscuous 
games may be played without having recourse to drawing, 
but the play in like "manner must be limited to the space. 

POINTS. 

6. An ordinary game shall consist of nine points, competition 
games, of 25 points ; but general match games may be deter- 
mined either by number or time, as agreed upon. When more 
than one rink is engaged in the same match, the points of 
each to be added together, and the gross number to decide the 
contest. 

PLACING THE MAT. 

7. The mat should not be moved from the place where it has 
been properly put at the beginning of the game ; and if moved 
by accident; it should be at once replaced. When playing, the 
player should have at least one foot on the mat. 

THROWING THE JACK. 

8. The throwing of the jack and playing first to be decided 
by toss-up or ballot, subsequently to be thrown by the leader 
of the side which secures the last head. If not thrown 20 
yards, or if it run into the ditch after the tlrst end, the oppo- 
site party to have the privilege of throwing it anew, but not 
of playing first. If it run within a yard of the ditch, it may be 
moved from one to two yards from it by either party. If it 
run too near the side of the space, it must be moved to a suf- 
ticient distance to allow both fore and back hand play. 



58 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

OKDER OF PLAY. 

9. Whicn side is to play first is usually decided by a toss-up 
The two leaders bowl about until all their bowls are played. 

I he second players follow, playing- all theirs, and so on. 
While the play is going on, the drivers should stand at the 
jack, for the purpose of directing the players on their side, 
until their own turn of play arrives. 

MARKING THE GAME. 

10. After the whole of the bowls have been played, the side 
having the nearest bowl to the jack counts one for each of 
whatever bowls they may have nearer to the jack than the 
nearest bowl of the other side. 

11. The jack, after being once played to, except when in the 
ditch, is not to be touched cr interfered with in any manner, 
otherwise than by the effects of the play, until the game is 
counted and both parties are satisfied. 

12. When the jack is run into the ditch by a bowl in the reg- 
ular course of the game, the place where it rests should be 
marked, and the jack may be placed on the edge of the green, 
so that the succeeding players may see where to play to. It 
must, however, be returned to its place in the ditch immedi- 
ately on their bowl being played, so that it may be liable to be 
acted on by any toucher that may be driven into the ditch. 
Should the jack be run against the bank, and rebound on to 
the green by the effect of the play, it is to be played to the 
same as if it had not touohed the bank. 

THE JACK "BURNED." 

13. When the jack or bowls are interfered with or displaced, 
otherwise than by the effects of the play, they are said to be 
"burned." When the jack is burned by a neutral party the 
end must be begun afresh. If burned by any of the players, 
the opposing party to have the option of playing out the end 
or beginning anew. 

BOWLS. 

14. Bowls are made of lignum vitae, and at a match must not 
exceed 16% inches in circumference, nt)r be loaded in any man- 



OFFICIAL SPORT INa IIULES. 59 

ner. In running, they ought to have a bias of at least one 
yard in thirty on an ordinary green. 

DITCHES. 

15. A bowl which runs off the green, or is driven off it by the 
effects of the play, and which has not previously touched the 
jack, is called a " ditcher" and must be immediately removed 
to the bank. Should a ditcher under any circumstances return 
to the green it must be removed. 

TOUCFIEKS. 

16. A Vjowl which on being played touches the jack is called 
a " toucher," and counts the same as any other bowl, wherever 
it may rest. A bowl which, after it stops running, falls over 
and touches the jack, is not to be reckoned a toucher if another 
bowl has been played. Touchers ought to be distinguished by 
a chalk or other mark. 

TOUCHERS IN THE DITCH. 

17. A toucher in the ditch should have the place where it 
rests marked, so that, if accidentally burned or shifted by a 
ditcher, it can be replaced. A toucher in the ditch can only be 
interfered with by another toucher. 

"BURNED" BOWLS. 

18. If a bowl, while running, is accidentally "burned" by 
another party, or by an opponent, it shall be in the option of 
the party playing to let it rest or play it over again. If 
" burned " by his own side, it may be put off the green. When a 
bowl while at rest is *' burned " by the side to which it belongs, 
it may be removed from the green, If " burned " by a neutral 
party or by an opponent, it is to be replaced as near to its 
original position as possible. 

19. No party to play until his opponent's bowl has ceased to 
run. A bowl so played may be stopped, and caused to be 
played again. 

BOWLS COMING TO REST. 

20. After the last bov/1 of an end stops running, a half min- 
ute to be allowed, if required, before counting the game. 



60 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

PLAYING BY MISTAKE. 

21. When a bowl is played by mistake, if belonging to the 
opposite side, it is to be replaced by the player's own bowl. If 
belonging to the players's side it must remain. 

PLAYING OUT OF ORDEK. 

22. If a bowl is played out of turn, the opponents may stop 
the bowl, allow it to remain where it rests, or cause it to be 
played over again in its proper order. If it has moved either 
jack or bowls, the opponents to have power to cause the end 
to be begun anew. A bowl not played in order cannot after- 
wards be played if the second succeeding bowl has been 

greened. 

CHANGING BOWLS. 

23. No player to change his bowls during the game without 
permission from the opposite side. 

ODD BOWLS. 

24. When the sides of a rink are unequal in number, they are 
to be balanced by the deficient party playing odd bowls. When 
the side playing the odd bowls consists of two or more, the 
first and second players each to play one of them. 

25. Under no circumstances is a cap or other object to be 
laid on the green, or placed on a bowl or the jack; but a cap 
or any other object may be held over one or the other, or in 
front of either, for the guidance of the player. 

EESULT OF EACH END. 

26. After an end is played, neither jack nor bowls to be 
touched until both sides are satisfied. When two or more 
bowls are touching each other, they are not to be disturbed < r 
removed until the result of the end is declared. When apart, 
each bowl may be removed and counted as soon as it is admit- 
ted to be a shot by the losing side. No measuring allowed 
during the playing of an end. 

ONLOOKERS. 

27. All players, while looking on, to stand jack high at least, 
and, unless acting as directors, not within three yards of the 
jack. 



offictatj sporting rules. 61 

28. Many of the preceding rules have no penalties attached 
to them, and all are framed on the understanding that none of 
them will be wilfully violated. When any of them are violated 
that have penalties annexed, the penalty cannot be enforced 
after the next played bowl has stopped. 



RUI^KS FOR SKITTLKS. 



1. That all pins be knocked down, but should one remain 
standing it shall be considered an extra " go." 

2. That if a pin be hit off the frame, and still stands up, it 
shall be considered " down ; " but if any part of the pin touch 
the frame it shall be an " up " pin. 

3. That should the ball rebound from the sides or back of the 
ground, and knock down a pin, it shall be considered foul, and 
must be set up again. If a pin, however, be hit by che play of 
the ball, it shall considered fair. 

4. That if a pin falls and rests upon two pins (or ball and pin), 
it shall be considered '• down ; " but if resting on one pin only, 
as an "up" pin. 

5. That all wood lying behind the centre corners of the 
frame, if no part lie over the frame may be removed at the 
option of either of the players. 

6. That the number of goes be limited to five. 

7. That all ties be decided by the first throw. 



Rules of tbe kmtric^D Amiitcur Bowliojf Union 
of tbe United J^taites. 



(Adopted September 10, 1SD2.) 



1. These rules shall be known as the Rules of the American Ama- 
teur Bowling" Union. 

2. The game to be played shall be the American Ten Frame Game, 
and shall be played on a regulation alley with reg'ulation pins and 
balls. 

3. A regulation alley shall not be less than forty-one and shall not 
exceed fort-two inches in width, and shall have a run, back of the 
foul line, of at least fifteen feet. The spots on the alley shall be 
twelve inches apart from centre to centre. The gutters shall incline 
down from a point about opposite the head pin to the pit, so that the 
gutter, where it enters the pit, shall be at least four inches in depth 
below the surface of the alley. The pit shall be at least ten inches in 
depth below the surface of the alley. No cushions shall be attached 
to the partitions between, or at the sides of the alleys or gutters, at 
any point opposite the pins; but the partitions may be covered with 
one layer of leather, only, not exceeding one-half an inch in thick- 
ness. The outside of the said covering shall not be less than twelve 
inches from the centre of the nearest corner pin spot. 

4. A regulation pin shall be fifteen inches in height, two-and-a- 
quarter inches in diameter at the bottom, fifteen inches in circum- 
ference at the body or thick(;t part (four-and-a-half inches from the 
bottom), five inches in circumference at the neck (ten inches from 
the bottom), and seven-and-three-quarters inches in circumference 
at the thickest part of the head (thirteen-and-a-half inches from the 
bottom.) 

5. A regulation bail shall not exceed twenty-seven inches in cir- 
cumference. 

6. In the playing of match games a line shall be drawn across the 
alleys and gutters, and continued upward at rig-ht angles at each 



OFFICIAL SPORTING ROLES. 63 

end, if possible, the centre point of which line on the alley shall be 
sixty feet from tlie centre of the head-pin spot. 

7. Match games shall be called at eight o'clock p.m., and must be 
started at or before 8.33 p. M. Should either club fail to produce any 
of its men at the latter hour the captain of the team present may 
claim the game. 

8. In match games an equal number of men from each club shall 
constitute the teams. In case a club shall not be able to produce a 
fall team, it may play, but the opposing club may play its full team 
if present. 

9. In playing, two alleys only shall be used; the players of the con- 
testing teams to roll successively, and but one frame at a time, and 
to change alleys each frame. The game shall consist of ten frames 
on each side. All strikes and spares made in the tenth frame shall 
be rolled off before leaving the alley, and on the same alley as made. 
Should there be a tie at the end of the tenth frame, play shall con- 
tinue upon the same alley until a majority of points upon an equal 
number of frames shall be attained, which shall conclude the 
game. 

10. Players must play in regular rotation, a,nd after the first frame 
no changes shall be made in players of their position unless with the 
consent of the captains. 

11. A player in delivering a ball must not step on or over the line, 
nor allow any part of his body to touch on or beyond the line, nor 
any portion of bis foot to project over the line, while at rest, until 
after the ball has reached the pins. Any ball so delivered shall be 
deemed foul, and the pins made on such ball, if any, shall be respot- 
ted. Should any ball delivered leave the alley before reaching the 
pins, or any ball rebound from the back cushion, the pins, if any, 
made on such balls shall not count, but must be respotted. All such 
balls to count as balls rolled. Pins knocked down by pin or pins 
rebounding from the side or back cushion shall count as pins down . 

12. The deadwood must bo removed from the alley after each ball 
rolled. Should any pins fall in removing the deadwood, such pins 
must be respotted. 

13. In all match games two umpires shall be selected by the 
captains of the competing teams, to be stationed at the points and 
to respectively perform the duties they may agree upon, 

14. In all match games there shall be two scorers appointed, one 
by the captain of each team, whose duty it shall be to keep a correct 



G4. OFFICIAL SPORTING EULES. 

record of the gauie, aiul at the conclusion thereof sign theirnames 
to the score. 

15. The umpire sliall tal^e great care that the regulations respect- 
ing the balls, alleys, pins and all the rules of the game are strictly 
observed. They shall be the judges of fair and unfair play at their 
respective stations, and shall determine all disputes and differences 
which may occur during the game. They shall take special care to 
declare all foul balls immediately upon their delivery, unasked, and 
in a distinct and audible voice. They shall in every instance, before 
leaving the alley, declare the winning club and sign their names to 
the scores. The decision of either of the umpire, respecting matters 
at their stations, shall in all cases be final. 

16. Neither umpires nor scorers shall be changed during a match 
game, unless with the consent of the captains of the teams. 

17. No person engaged in a match game as umpire or scorer shall 
be directly or indirectly interested in any bet upon the game. 



BOXING RULES 

OF THE 

AMATEUR ATHLETIC UNION 



1. In all open competitions the ring shall not be less 
than 16 feet or more than 24 feet square, and shall be 
formed of 8 stakes and ropes, the latter extending in 
double lines, the uppermost line four feet from the floor 
and the lower line two feet from the floor. 

2. Competitors to Box in regulation athletic costume, 
in shoes without spikes, or in socks, and to use boxing 
gloves of not more than 8 ounces in weight. 

8 Weights to be : Bantam, 105 lbs. and under; 
Feather, 115 lbs. and under; Light, 135 lbs. and under; 
Middle, 158 lbs. and under; Heavy Weight, 158 lbs. and 
over. 

4. Any athlete who weighs in and then fails to com- 
pete, without an excuse satisfactory to the Games 
Committee, shall be suspended for six months. 

5. In all open competitions the result shall be decided 
by two judges with a referee. A time-keeper shall be 
appointed. 

6. In all competitions the number of rounds to be con- 
tested shall be three. The duration of rounds in the 
trial bout shall be limited to three minutes each. In 
the ''finals,' the first two rounds will be three minutes 
each, and the final round four minutes. The interval 
between each round shall be one minute. 



f 
OFFICIAL SPOETING RULES. 



7. In all competitions, any competitor failing to come 
up when time is called shall lose the bout. 

8. Immediately before tlie competition each compet- 
itor shall draw his number and compete as follows : 
To have a preliminary round of as many contests as the 
total number of contestants esceeds2, 4, 8, 16 or 32, and 
drop the losers. This leaves in 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 contes- 
tants, and the rounds then proceed regularly with no 
byes or uneven contests. 

9. Each competitor shall be entitled to the assistance 
of one second only, and no advice or coaching shall be 
given to any competitor by his second, or by any other 
person during the progress of any round. 

10. The manner of judging shall be as follows: The 
two judges and referee shall be stationed apart. At the 
end of each bout, each judge shall write the name of the 
competitor who in his opinion has won, and shall hand 
the same to the announcer (or master of ceremonies). 
In case the judges agree, the master of ceremonies shall 
announce the name of the winner, but in cases where 
the judges disagree, the master of ceremonies shall so 
inform the referee, who shall thereupon himself decide. 
It. The referee shall have power to give his casting 
vote when the judges disagree to caution or disqualify 
a competitor for infringing rules, or to stop a round in 
the event of either man being knocked down, providing 
that the stopping of either of the first two rounds shall 
not disqualify any competitor from competing in the 
final round to decide the competition in the event of 
either man showing so marked a superiority over the 
other that a continuation of the contest would serve 
only to show the loser's ability to take punishment. 
And the referee can order a further round, limited to 
two m nutes, in the event of the judges disagreeing. 

12. The decision of the judges or referee, as the case 
may be, shall be final. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 67 

13. In all competitions the decision shall be given in 
favor of the competitor who displays the best style, and 
obtains the greatest number of points. The points 
shall be : For attack, direct clean hits with the knuckles 
of either hand, on any part of the front or sides of the 
head, or body above the belt ; defense, guarding, slip- 
ping, ducking, counter-hitting or getting away. Where 
points are otherwise equal, consideration to be given 
the man who does most of the leading off. 

14. The referee may disqualify a competitor who is 
boxing unfairly, by flicking or hitting with the open 
glove, by hitting with the inside or butt of the hand, 
the wrist or elbow, hitting or catching hold below the 
waist, or hitting when down (one knee and one hand 
or both knees on the floor), butting with the head or 
shoulder, wrestWng or roughing at the ropes, using 
offensive and scurrilous language, or not obeying the 
orders of the referee. 

15. All competitors who have been beaten by the 
winner shall be entitled to qompete for second place, 
and all who have been beaten by ttie winners of either 
first or second place shall be entitled to compete for 
third place. 

16. Any athlete who competes in a boxing contest of 
more than four rounds shall be suspended for such 
stated period as may be determined by the Board of 
Managers of the association of the A. A. U. in whose 
territory the offense was committed. 

17. In the event of any question arising not provided 
for in these rules, the referee to have full power to 
decide such ques* ion or interpretation of rule. 



AARQai5 or QCJEEN5BCJRT RCJLE5. 

1. To be a fair stand-up boxing match in a twenty-four foot 
ring or as near that size as practicable. 

2. No wrestling or hugging allowed. 

3. The rounds to be of three minutes' duration, and one min- 
ute time between rounds. 

4. If either man fall, through weakness or otherwise, he must 
get up unassisted, ten seconds to be allowed him to do so, the 
other man meanwhile to return to his corner, and when the fallen 
man is on his legs the round is to be resumed and continued until 
the three minutes have expired. If one man fails to come to the 
scratch in the ten seconds allowed, it shall be in the power of the 
referee to give his award in favor of the other man. 

5. A man hanging on the ropes in a helpless state, with his 
toes off the ground, shall be considered down. 

6. No seconds or any other person to be allowed ir\ the ring 
during the rounds. 

7. Should the contest be stopped by any unavoidable interfer. 
ence, the referee to name time and place, as soon as possible, for 
finishing the contest ; so that the match must be won and lost, 
unless the backers of both men agree to draw the stakes. 

8. The gloves to be fair-sized boxing gloves of the best quality, 
and new. 

9. Should a glove burst, or come off, it must be replaced to the 
referee's satisfaction. 

10. A man on one knee is considered down, and if struck is 
entitled to the stakes. 

11. No shoes or boots with springs allowed. 

12. The contest in all other respects to be governed by the re 
vised rules of the London Prize Ring. 



RULES 

OF THE 

LONDON PRIZE RING. 



1. The ring shall be made on turf, and shall be four-and- 
twenty feet square, formed of eight stakes and ropes, the latter 
extending in double lines, the uppermost line being four feet from 
the ground, and the lower two feet from the ground. In the cen- 
tre of the ring a mark be formed, to be termed a scratch. 

2. Each man shall be attended to the ring by two seconds and 
a bottle-holder. The combatants, on shaking hands, shall retire 
until the seconds of each have tossed for choice of position, which 
adjusted, the winner shall choose his corner according to the state 
of the wind or sun, and conduct his man thereto; the loser taking 
the opposite diagonal corner. 

3. Each man shall be provided with a handkerchief of a color 
suitable to his own fancy, "and the seconds shall entwine these 
handkerchiefs at the upper end of one of the centre stakes. These 
handkerchiefs shall be called "Colors," and the winner of the 
battle at its conclusion shall be entitled to their possession as the 
trophy of victory. 

4. The two umpires shall be chosen by the seconds or backers 
to watch the progress of the battle, and take exception to any 
breach of the rules hereafter stated. A referee shall be chosen 
by the umpires, unless otherwise agreed on, to whom all disputes 
shall be referred ; and the decision of this referee, whatever it 
may be, shall be final and strictly binding on all parties, whether 
as to the matter in dispute or the issue of the battle. The referee 
shall be provided with a watch for the purpose of calling time ; 
the call of that referee only to be attended lo, and no other per- 



70 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

son whatever shall interfere in calling time. The referee shall 
withhold all opinion till appealed by the umpires, and the um- 
pires strictly abide by his decision without dispute. 

5. On the men being stripped it shall be the duty of the sec- 
onds to examine their drawers, and if any objection arises as to 
insertion of improper substances therein, they shall appeal to their 
umpires, who, with the concurrence of the referee, shall direct 
what alterations shall be made. 

6. The spikes in the fighting boots shall be confined to three 
in number, which shall not exceed three-eighths of an inch from 
the sole of the boot, and shall not be less than one-eighth of an 
inch broad at the point ; two to be placed in the broadest part of 
the sole and one in the heel ; and in the event of a man wearing 
any other spikes, either in toes or elsewhere, he shall be compelled 
either to remove them or provide other boots properly spiked, the 
penalty for refusal to be a loss of the stakes. 

7. Both men being ready, each shall be conducted to that side 
of the scratch next his corner previously chosen ; and the second 
on the one side, and the men on the other, having shaken hands 
the former shall immediately leave the ring, and there remain un- 
til the round be finished, on no pretense whatever approaching 
their principles during the round, without permission from the 
referee. The penalty to be the loss of the battle to the offending 
parties. 

8. At the conclusion of the round when one or both of the men 
shall be down, the second shall step into the ring and carry or 
conduct their principles to his corner, there affording him the 
necessary assistance, and no person whatever be permitted to in- 
terfere in his duty. 

9. On the expiration of thirty seconds the referee appointed 
shall cry " Time," upon which each man shall rise from the knee 
of his second and walk to his own side of the scratch unaided ; 
the seconds immediately leaving the ring. The penalty for either 
of them remaining eight seconds after the call of time to be the 
loss of the battle to his principal ; and either man failing to be at 
the scratch within eight seconds shall be deemed to have lost the 
battle. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING BULES. 71 

10. On no consideration whatever shall any person except the 
seconds and the referee be permitted to enter the ring during the 
battle ; nor till it shall have been concluded ; and in the event of 
of such unfair practice, or the ropes or stakes being disturbed or 
removed, it shall be in the power of the referee to award the victory 
to that man who, in his honest opinion, shall have the best of the 
contest. 

11. The seconds shall not interfere, advise or direct the adver- 
sary of their principal, and shall refrain from all offensive and ir- 
ratating expressions, in all respects conducting themselves with 
order and decorum, and confine themselves to the deligent and 
careful discharge of their duties to their principles. 

12. In picking up their men, should the second willfully injure 
the antagonist of their principal, the latter shall be deemed to have 
forfeited the battle on the decision of the referee. 

13. It shall be a fair "stand up fight," and if either men shall 
willfully throw himself down without receiving a blow, whether 
blows shall havs been preznotisly exchanged or not, he shall be 
deemed to have lost the battle ; but this rule shall not apply to a 
man who in a close slips down from the grasp of his opponent to 
avoid punishment, or from obvious accident or weakness. 

14. Butting with the head shall be deemed foul, and the party 
resorting to this practice shall be deemed to have lost the battle. 

15. A blow struck when a man is thrown or down shall be 
deemed foul. A man with one knee and one hand on the ground, 
or with both knees on the ground, shall be deemed down ; and a 
blow given in either of these positions shall be considered foul, 
providing always that, when in such position, the man so down 
shall not himself strike, or attempt to strike. 

16. A blow struck below the waistband shall be deemed foul, 
ind in a close, seizing an antagonist below the waist, by the thigh 
or otherwise, shall be deemed foul. 

17. All attempts to inflict injury by gouging, or tearing the 
flesh with the fingers or nails, and biting shall be deemed foul. 

18. Kicking, or deliberately falling on an antagonist with th 
knees or otherwise when down, shall be deemed foul. 

19. All bets shall be paid as the battle money after a fight is 
awarded. 



72 OPFICIAIi SPORTINO RULES. 

20. The referee and umpires shall take their positions in Iront 
of the centre stake, outside the ropes. 

21. Due notice shall be iiiven by the stakeholder of the day 
and place where the battle money is to be given up, and he be 
exonerated from all responsibility upon obeying the direction of 
the referee ; all parties be strictly bound by these rules ; and lu 
future, all articles of agreement for a contest be entered into with 
a strict and willing adherence to the letter and spirit of tnese 

rules. 

22 In the event of magisterial of other interference, or m case 
of darkness coming on, the referee (or stakeholder in case no 
referee has been chosen) shall have the power to name the time 
and place for the next meeting, if possible on the same day, or 
as soon after as may be. In naming the second or third place the 
nearest spot shall be selected to the original place of fighting 
where there is a chance o t its being fought out. 

23 Should the fight not be decided on the day all bets shall 
be drawn, unless the fight shall be resumed the same week, be- 
tween Sunday and Sunday, in which case the referee's duties 
shall continue and the bets shall stand and be decided by the event. 
The battle money shall remain in the hands of the stakeholder 
until fairly won or lost by a fight, unless a draw be mutually 
agreed upon, or, in case of a postponement, one of the principals 
shall be absent, when the man in the ring shall be awarded the 

^ 2^* Any pugilist voluntarily quitting the ring previous to the 
deliberate judgment of the referee being obtained shall be deemed 
to have lost the fight. . 

25. On an objection being made by the seconds or umpire the 
men shall retire to their corners, and there remain until the deci- 
sion of the appointed authorities shall be obtained : if pronounced 
-foul "the battle shall be at an end, but if "fair," " time " shall 
be called by the party appointed, and the man absent from the 
scratch in eight seconds after shall be deemed to have lost the 
fight. The decision in all cases to be given promptly and irrevoc- 
ably, for which purpose the umpires and the referee should be in. 
variably close together. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RtTIiES. 73 

26. If a man leaves the ring, either to escape punishment or 
tor any other purpose without the permission of the referee, un- 
less he is involuntarily forced out, shall forfeit the battle. 

27. The use of hard substances, such as stones or sticks, or of 
resin in the hand during the battle shall be deemed foul, and on 
the requisition of the seconds of either man the accused shall open 
his hands for the examination of the referee. 

28. Hugging on the ropes shall be deemed foul. A man held 
by the neck against the stakes or upon or against the ropes shall 
be considered down, and all interference with him in that position 
shall be foul. If a man in any way makes use of the ropes or 
stakes to aid him in squeezing his adversary he shall be deemed 
the loser of the battle, and if a man in C close reaches the ground 
with his knees his adversary shall immediately loose him or lose 
the battle. 

29. All glove or room fights be as nearly as possible in con- 
formity with the foregoing rules. 



MOUNTED BROADSWORD RUUETS. 



Contestants shall be required to furnish their own horses, 
weapons, and equipments, and no allowance will be made for 
the failure to continue the contest for want of same. 

All contests must be fought with regulation broadswords. 

Contestants will toss for choice of position before the attack . 

When the trumpeter sounds the signal for the attack, the 
(•ontestants shall gallop their horses to the center and meet 
light hand to right hand and continue the attack on the other 
for a space of two minutes, which shall be considered the 
length of each round; referee to decide the winner of each 
round at the expiration of it ; nine two minute rounds shal I 
constitute the battle; the referee and judges shall give their 
decision to the contestant gaining the largest number of 
rounds at the conclusion of the battle. 

Should both contestants strike at the same time, the referee 
shall award the point to the contestant who, in his estimation, 
has delivered the most effective cut. 

Both contestants shall show fair and equal play. 

Should either keep out of the reach of the other for more 
than two ndnutes, the usual one minute rest will be taken, 
and then the judges shall draw four lines each four feet apart 
and on the signal of attack, each swordsman shall be required 
to bring his horse (within thirty seconds) to his opponent or 
forfeit a point. 

Immediate disqualification shall follow the deliberate strik- 
i ;ig of an opponent's horse by an opponent. One minute shall 
be allowed to expire between each round. 

Should the contestant be disabled and the judges do not 
consider his injuries as serious, he shall be allowed live min- 
utes to renew the battle, if he chooses to. 

A point can only be scored by a blow on the armor ; no cut 
on head or arms shall count. It is fair to strike an opponent 
anywhere above the lower part of the armor ; any cut delivered 
below the armor shall be considered a foul, and cause the loss 
of a point. 

Should the swordsman be unhorsed during the attack, he 
shall be allowed to continue on foot until round is ended, th^-n 
be shall be remounted and continue until contest is decided. 



Canoe: ^ association. 



K RACING REGULATIONS. H' 



KuiiE 1. A canoe, to compete in any race of the A.C.A., must 
be sharp at both ends, with no counter stern or transom, and 
capable of being efficiently paddled by one man, and must 
come within the prescribed limits, as follows: Maximum 
length, 16 ft., and for that length a maximum beam of 30 in. 
Minimum beam, 28 in. Eeam may be increased >^ in. for each 
full inch of length decreased. No canoe shall have a draft of 
more than 10 in., except the unclassified boats, to which class 
the limits of length and breadth only shall apply. 

In centreboard canoes, the keel outside of the garboard shall 
not exceed 1% in. in depth, including a metal keel band of not 
over ^ in. deep. . The centreboard must not drop more than 
18 in. below the garboard, and when hauled up must not project 
below the keel. Canoes without centreboards may carry keels 
not over 3 in. deep below garboard, and not weighing more 
than 36 lbs. Leeboards may be carried by canoes not having 
centreboards. 

Measurement.— The length shall be taken between perpen- 
diculars at the fore side of stem and the aft side of stern. The 
beam shall be taken at the widest part, not including the bead- 
ing, which shall not exceed 1% in. in depth. If deeper, it shall 
be included in the beam. The word "beam" shall mean the 
breadth formed by the fair lines of the boat, and the beam at 
and near the water line shall bear a reasonable proportion to 
the beam at the gunwale. 



96 OFFICIAL RPORTTXG RUIjES. 

The "general purpose" canoe shall be one which conforms 
to the above conditions, and, in addition, has a well not less 
than 16 in. wide for a length of 3 it. 6 in., with a sleeping space 
of 6 ft., of which at least 5 ft. shall be clear. There must be no 
projecting centreboard when housed. The sliding seat shall 
not be longer than the beam of the boat, and no standing sail 
shall be used. The Regatta Committee may rule out any 
canoe which, in their opinion, does not conform to the spirit 
of these regulations. 

^ The foregoing rules of measurement shall not be interpreted 
to disqualify any canoe built prior to January 1, 1890, which 
conforms to the rules prior to that date. 

Rule 2. None but members of the American Canoe Associa- 
tion, unless upon the invitation of the Regatta Committee, 
shall be permitted to enter its races, and no canoe shall enter 
that is not enrolled on the ^Secretary's books, and no member 
who is in arrears to the Association shall compece in any race 
or claim any prize while such arrears remain unpaid. 

No canoe shall be entered at any one meet by more than one 
man. The "crew" of each canoe shall consist of one man only, 
unless the programme of the Regatta states the contrary. 
Members must paddle or sail their own canoes. 

A canoe Avhich is not owned or used for racing by any other 
member present, shall be deemed to be the canoe of the mem- 
ber bringing it to camp. In double canoe races, the owner 
may associate with any other member with himself. 

Rule 3. All entries must be in writing, on the blank pro- 
vided, and must be handed in to the Regatta Committee within 
such time as they may direct. 

Rule 4. Every canoe entering, except for an upset race, 
must have her entry number conspicuously placed on canoe or 
man when paddling, and on both sides of mainsail while sail- 
i ng. The clerk of the course will provide each uum, when he 
makes his entry, with three prints of his number on cloth. 

Rule 5. Flags shall be given as prizes as follows : A first 
prize in each race, and a second in each race, where more than 
two finish. 

The winners of the Paddling Trophy, the Sailing Trophy 
and the first record men shall be given large practical bunting 



offiotatj sporting rules. 77 

flags, with the year and race plainly marked thereon, and the 
five best flags at the disposal of the Regatta Committee shall 
be given to the first five record men. Prizes donated for spe- 
cial races or competitions may be accepted at the discretion 
of the Regata Committee. No prizes of money shall be raced 
for. 

i^aces.— There shall be three record races: No. 1, paddling 
and sailing combined ; No. 2, paddling; No. 3, sailing. To ob- 
tain a place on the record, a contestant must enter and finish 
in all three record races. None but men who have entered for 
the record will be allowed to enter in any record races. Only 
f-uch contestants as finish in all three races will receive a credit 
number according to position, relative to each other in each 
race— the highest number given in each race being equal to 
the number of the contestants, the next one less, and so on ; 
the three numbers given added together give the credit 
amount of the record. 

In case of unavoidable accident which prevents a man from 
finishing in any one race, the Regatta Committee may, at its 
discretion, permit such canoe to enter the other two races, and 
her marks to be counted for the record, but he shall receive 
zero for the race which he does not finish. 

The contestant obtaining the highest aggregation of points 
becomes the leadincj honor man for the year. There shall be a 
race for the paddling trophy. The total number of contestants 
shall be unlimited. There shi 11 be a race for the A.C.A. sailing 
trophy. Conditions as follows : Sailing canoe, A.C.A. rules, no 
limit to rig or balast ; time limi , 3% hours ; distance, 9 miles. 
Accredited representatives of foreign clubs, not exceeding five 
in number, shall be eligible. In case of more than five foreign 
entries, the first five received shall be eligible to start. The 
total number of starters shall not exceed fifteen, and the ten 
or more vacancies (after deducting the foreign entries) shall 
be selected from competitors in the special '-Unlimited Race," 
as follows : The Regatta Committee shall nominate two, and 
the balance (after deducting foreign entries) shall be taken 
from the leading men at the finish in their order. 

Rule 6. The mode of turning stakeboats, and all directions 
for each race, shall be announced in the programme of the 
Regatta Committee or posted on the bulletin board one hour 



78 OFFICIAL SPOETTNO RTTTiT!S. 

before the race is called ; and any competitor not knowing the 
course, or mistaking it, or not following these Rules, does so at 
his own risk. Stakeboats and buoys will be left on the port 
hand, when not stated distinctly to the contrary. The Com- 
mittee shall have the power to change the direction of the 
race at any time before the first signal, and shall indicate the 
same by the flags according to Rule 13. 

Rule 7. No pilotage or direction from any boat or from the 
shore will be allowed, and any one accepting such assistance 
may be disqualifled. 

Rule 8. A canoe touching a buoy or other canoe, unless 
wrongfully compelled to do so by another canoe, shall be dis- 
qualifled. In case of a foul, the non-fouling canoe must go 
over the course, unless disabled beyond the possibility of tem- 
porary repair, in order to claim the race. Every canoe must 
stand by its own accidents. If a canoe, in consequence of the 
violation of any of the Rules shall foul another canoe, or com- 
pel another canoe to foul any canoe, buoy or obstruction, or to 
run aground, she shall be disqualifled. 

Rule 9. Should the owner of any canoe, duly entered for a 
race, consider that he has fair ground of complaint against 
another, he must give notice of same, before leaving his boat 
on the finish of the race, to the judge, and must present the 
same in writing to the Regatta Committe v/ithin one hour of 
the judge's decision, if appealed from said decision. 

The sum of $1 shall be deposited with each appeal, to be for- 
feited to the Association should the appeal not be sustained. 
The Regatta Committee shall, after hearing such evidence as 
they may deem necessary, decide the appeal, and the decision, 
if unanimous, shall be final ; but, if not unanimous, a second 
appeal may be made to the Executive Committee, whose 
decision shall be final. 

No member of either committee shall take part in the decis- 
ion of any question in which he is interested. In all cases 
where a protest is lodged on the ground of fouling, evidence 
of actual contact shall be necessary to substantiate the pro- 
test. The Regatta Committee shall, without protest, dis- 
qualify any canoo which, to their knowledge, has committed 
a breach of the Rules. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 79 

PADDLING RACES. 

Rule 10. Paddling races shall be started by the starter ask- 
ing, '-Are you ready?" On receiving no answer, he shall say 
"Go." if he considers the start unfair, he may recall the 
boats, and any canoe refusing to start again shall be distanced. 

The combined paddling and sailing race shall be started in 
the same manner, the word " Go" being immediately followed 
by a gun. 

Rule 11. A canoe's own water is the straight course from 
the station assigned it at starting. Any canoe leaving its own 
water shall do so at its peril ; but if the stern of one canoe is a 
canoe's length ahead of the bow of another, the former may 
take the water of the latter, which then becomes its own 
water, and it shall only leave it at its peril. 

SAILING RACES. 

Rule 12. The paddle shall not be used in sailing races, ex- 
cept for steering when the rudder is disabled, or for shoving 
off when aground, afoul of anything, or in extreme danger, as 
from a passing steamer or from a squall. 

Rule 13. Five minutes before the start, a signal Avill be 
given and a blue flag hoisted, and four minutes later a second 
signal will be given and a red flag hoisted, and one minute 
later a third signal will be given to start and an A.C.A. flag 
hoisted and left up. 

Any canoe which crosses to the course side of the starting 
line prior to the third signal must return above the line and 
recross it, keeping out of the way of all competing canoes, 
using the paddle if necessary; but after the third signal the 
start shall be considered as made, and all canoes on either side 
of the line shall be amenable to the Sailing Rules. Canoes 
may take any position for starting, and, prior to the third sig- 
nal, may be sailed and worked in any manner (outside aid not 
allowed). A green flag displayed signifles that buoj's are to 
be left to starboard, and a red flag means to port. The Regatta 
Committee may vary the manner of starting at their discre- 
tion, but all sailing races shoud be started to windward vrhen 
practicable. 



80 OFFICIAli SPOBTING EULES. 

EuLE 14. All shiftable ballast, except centreboards, shall be 
carried within the canoe, and no fixed Ijallast shall be carried 
below the keelband. Ballast may be shifted, but no ballast 
shall be taken in or thrown out during a racje. 

Rule 15. A canoe overtaking another shall keep out of the 
way of the latter ; but when rounding any buoy or vessel used 
to mark out the course, if two canoes are not clear of each 
other when the leading canoe is close to and is altering her 
helm to round the mark, the outside canoe must give the 
other room to pass clear of the mark, whichever canoe is in 
danger of fouling. No canoe shall be considered clear of 
another unless so much ahead as to give fiee choice to the 
other on which side she will pass. An overtaking canoe shall 
not, however, be justified in attempting to establish an over- 
lay, and thus force a passage between the leading canoe and 
the mark after the latter has altered her helm for rounding. 

EuiiE 16. Canoes close-hauled on the port tack shall give way 
to those on the starboard tack. In the event of a collision 
being imminent, owing to the canoe on the port tack not giving 
Avay, the canoe on the starboard tack shall luff and go about, 
but shall never bear away. A canoe on the port tack compell- 
ing a canoe on the starboard tack thus to give way forfeits all 
claim to the prize. 

EuLE 17. Canoes going free shall always give way to those 
close-hauled on either tack. 

EciLE 18. When canoes close-hauled are approaching ashore, 
buoy, or other obstruction, and are so close that the leeward- 
most cannot tack clear of the canoe to the windward of her, 
and by standing on would be in danger of fouling the obstruc- 
tion, the canoe to windward shall, on being requested, go 
about, and the canoe requesting her to do so shall also tack at 
once. 

EuLE 19. Should two or more canoes he approaching a 
weather shore or any obstruction with the wind free, and be 
so close to each other that the weathermost one cannot bear 
away clear of the one to the leeward of her, and by standing 
on would be in danger of running aground or of fouling the 
obstruction, then the canoe that is to leeward shall, on being 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 81 

requested, at once bear away until sufficient room is allowed 
for the weather niofit canoe to clear the obstruction. 

Rule 2C. A canoe may luff as she pleases in order to prevent 
another from passing her to windward, provided she begins to 
luff before an overlap has been established. An overlap is 
established when an overtaking canoe has no longer a free 
choice on which side she Avill pass, and continue to exist as 
long as tlie leeward canoe by luffing or the weather canoe by 
bearing away, is in danger of fouling. A canoe must never 
bear away out of her course to prevent the other passing to 
leeward; the lee side to be considered that on which the lead- 
ing canoe of the two carries her mainboom. The overtaking 
canoe, if to leeward, must not luff until she has drawn clear 
ahead of the canoe she has overtaken. 

Rule 21. A canoe may anchor during a race, provided the 
anchor is attached or weighed on board the canoe during the 
remainder of the race. 

Rule 22. A change in these rules desired by any member of 
the association shall be presented by the Regatta Committee, 
with their approval or disaproval, to the Executive Committee 
for final action ; notice of such change having been given in 
the official organs at least two weeks before the meeting of 
the Executive Committee at which they are to be acted upon. 

Rule 23. In case of temporary vacancies in the Regatta 
Committee, the other members shall appoint substitutes. 




L..X\V!S OK CRlCKE:a\ 



As Kf.visko uv thk .M.vk\ i.kisdnk Ckukkt Club, Mav. ISOO. 

1. A luatoh is played betv.oeii t\vi> sidos of oloviMi iilayors 
oat'h. unless othor\vi.v(^ a jrroiHl to; oaeh side lias two innings, 
taken alternately, exeept in the ease provided for in Law 53. 
The ehoiee of inninjrs shall be decided by tossinj?. 

•2. The seore shall be leekoned by runs. A run is seored— 
1st. so often as the batsmen after a hit, or at any lime -while 
the ball is in play, shall have erossed, and niado good their 
ground from end to end. 2d, for penalties under Laws 10, 84. 
41. and allowances under 44. Any run or runs so seored shall 
be duly nvorded by scorers appointed for the purpose. The 
side which scores the greatest number of runs wins the nuitch. 
Xv> match is won unlesb played out or given up. except in the 
t'ase provided for in Law 4"\ 

8. Before the commencement of the match two umpires 
shall l>e appointed, one tor each end. 

4. The ball shall weigh not less than 0^3 ounces, nor moi-e 
than 5.^4 ounces. It shall measure not less than i> inches nor 
more than \)}i inches in circumference. At the beginning of 
each innings either sMde nuiy demand a new ball. 

5. The bat shall not excetnl i}i inches in the widest part ; it 
shall not be more than 3S inches in length. 

(\. The wickets shall be pitched opposite and piirailel to each 
other, at a distance of 22 yards. Each wicket shall In? eight 
inches in width and consist of three stumps, with two Imiis 
upon the top. The stumps shall be of equal and sutticient si/e 
to prevent the ball from passing through, and 27 inches out of 
the groimd. The bails shall be each four inches in length, and 
when in position, on the top of the stumps, shall not proje<.'t 



OPr'HJIAL HPOUTINO TUILKS. 83 

iiuji<5 tli.'iri one-half in(;h above Ihom. The wickotB Bhall not 
be chaiig(!(l dui'in^ a iiiat,ch, unle8B the ^roiirul between them 
beeorne unlit for play, and then only by connent of both Bides. 

7. Th<' bowling crease Hhall be in a line with the stumps six 
feet ei^ht inehes in length; tlie stumps in the centre, with a 
return crease at each end, at right uncles behind the wicket. 

8. The popping crease shall be marked four feet from th<- 
wicket, parallel to it, and be deemed unlimited in lengtli. 

0. The gi'ound shall not be roiled, watered, covered, mown 
or beaten during a match, exce[>t before the commei)cement 
of each innings and each day's play, when, unless the inside 
object, the groimd shall be swept and rolled for not more than 
ten minutes. This shall not prevent the batsman from beat- 
ing the ground with his bat, nor the batsmen nor lx>wler from 
using sawdust in order to obtain a projxjr foothold. 

10. The ball must be bowi<'(| ; if thrown or jerked, the umpiie 
shall call "No ball." 

11. The bowler shall deliver the ball with one foot on the 
ground behind the bowling crease, and within the return 
crease, otherwise the umpire shall call " No ball." 

12. If the bowler shall bowl the ball so high over or ho wide 
of the wicket that in the oi)inion of the umpire it is not within 
leach of the striker, th(^ umpire shall call " Wide ball." 

13. The ball shall be bowled in overs of live balls from each 
wicket alternately. When live l>alls have been bowled and the 
1 all is linally settled in the bowlei's or wicket-keeper's hands, 
tlie umi)iie shall call "Over." Neither a "no-ball" nor a 

■ wide-ball " shall be reckoned as one of the "over." 

14. The Ijowler shall be allowed to change ends as often as 
he pleases, provided only that he does not bowl two overs 
consecutively in one innings. 

15. The bowler may require the batsman at the wicket from 
which he is bowling to stand on that side of it which he may 
direct. 

16. The striker may hit a "no-ball," and whatever runs 
result shall be added U) his score ; but he shall not be out from 
a " no-ball*" unless he be run out, or bi-eak Laws 26, 27, 29, 30. 
All runs made from a "no-ball," otherwise than from the bat. 



84 OFPICTAL SPORTING RUTiES. 

shall be scored " no-balls," and if no run be made, one run shall 
be added to that score. From a " wide ball " as many runs as 
are run shall be added to the score as " wide balls," and if no 
run be otherwise obtained one run shall be so added. 

17. If the ball, not having been called " wide" or " no-ball," 
pass the striker, without tt)uching his bat or person, and any 
runs be obtained, the umpire shall call " Bye ; " but if the ball 
touch any part of the striker's person (hand excepted) and any 
run be obtained, the umpire shall call " Leg-bye," such runs 
to be scored " byes " and " leg-byes " respectively. 

18. At the beginning of the match, and of each innings, the 
umpire at the bowler's wicket shall call "Play;" from that 
time no trial ball shall be allowed to any bowler on the ground 
between the wickets, and when one of the batsmen is out the 
use of the bat shall not be allowed to any person until the next 
batsman shall come in, 

19. A batsman shall be held to be " out of his ground " unless 
his bat in hand or some part of his person be grounded within 
the line of the popping crease. 

23. The wicket shall be held to be '• doAvn" when either of 
t lie bails is struck off, or, if both bails be off, when a stump is 
strruck out of the ground. 

The striker is out : 

21. If the wicket be bowled down, even if the ball firet touch 
the striker's bat or person :— " Bowled." 

22. Or, if the ball, from a stroke of the bat or hand, but not 
the wrist, be held before it touch the ground, although it be 
hugged to the body of the catcher :— " Caught." 

23. Or, if in playing at the ball, provided it be not touched 
by the bat or hand, the striker be out of his ground, and the 
wicket be put down by the wicket-keeper with the ball or with 
the hand or arm, with ball in hand:— "Stumped." 

24. Or, if with any part of his person he stop the balf^hich 
in the opinion of the umpire at the bowler's wicket shall have 
been pitched in a straight line from it to the striker's wicket 
and would have hit it :— " Leg before wicket." 

25. Or, if in playing at the ball he hit down his wicket with 
his bat or any part of his person or dress :— " Hit wicket." 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 86 

26. Or, if under pretence of running, or otherwise, eitlier of 
the batsmen willfully prevent a ball from being caught: — "Ob- 
structing the field." 

27. Or, if the ball be struck, or be stopped by any part of his 
l)erson, and he wilfully strike it again, except it be done for 
the purpose of guarding his wicket, which he may do with his 
bat, or any part of his person, except his hands:— "Hit the 
])all twice." 

Either batsman is out : 

28. If in runiiing, or at any other time, while the ball is in 
play he be out of his ground, and his wicket be struck down 
by the ball after touching any fieldsman, or by the hand or 
arm, with ball in hand, of any lieldsman :— " Run out." 

29. Or, if he touch with his hands or take up the ball while 
in play, unless at the request of the opposite side :— " Handled 
the ball." 

30. Or, if he wilfully obstruct anj^ fieldsman :— Obstructing 
the field." 

31. If the batsmen have crossed each other, he that runs for 
the wicket which is put dow^n is out; if they have not crossed, 
he that has left the wicket which is put down is out. 

32. The striker being caught no run shall be scored. A bats- 
man being run out, that run which was being attempted shall 
not be scored. 

33. A batsman being out from any cause, the ball shall be 
"dead." 

34. If a ball in play cannot be found or recovered, any fields- 
man may call "Lost Ball," when the ball shall be "dead;" 
six runs shall be added to the score, but if more than six runs 
have been run before " lost ball " has been called, as many runs 
as have been run shall be scored. 

35. After the ball shall have been finally settled in the 
wicket-keeper's or bowler's hand it shall be " dead ; " but when 
the bowler is about to deliver the ball, if the batsman at his 
wicket be out of his ground before actual delivery, the said 
bowler may run him out; but if the bowler throw at that 
wicket and any run result it shall be scored " no ball." 



86 OFFICIAL SPORTING RTTLE^. 

36. A batsman shall not retire from his wicket and return 
to it to complete his innings after another has beenin Avithout 
the consent of the opposite side. 

37. A substitute shall be allowed to held or run between 
wickets for any player Avho may during the match be inca- 
pacitated from illness or injury, but for no other reason, 
except with the consent of the opposite side. 

38. In all cases where a substitute shall be allowed, the con- 
sent of the opposite side shall be obtained as to the person to 
act as substitute and the place in the field which he shall take. 

39. In case any substitute shall be allowed to run between 
wickets, the striker may be run out if either he or his substi- 
tute be out of his ground. If the striker be out of his ground 
while the ball is in play, that wicket which he has left may be 
put down and the striker given out, although the other bats- 
man may have made good the ground at that end, and the 
striker and his substitute at the other end. 

40. A batsman is liable to be out for any infringement of the 
laws by his substitute. 

41. The fieldsman may stop the ball with any jjart of his 
person, bat if he wilfully stop it otherwise the ball shall be 
" dead," and five runs added to the score. Whatever runs may 
have been made five only shall be added. 

42. The wicket-keeper shall stand behind the wicket. If he 
shall take the ball for the purpose of stumping before it has 
passed the wicket, or if he shall incommode the striker by any 
noise, or motion, or if any part of his person be over or before 
the wicket, the striker shall not be out, excepting under Laws 
26, 27,28, 29 and 30. 

43. The umpires are the sole judges of fair or unfair play, of 
the fitness of the ground, the weather, and the light for play ; 
all disputes shall be determined by them, and if they disagree 
the actual state of things shall continue. 

44. They shall pitch fair wickets, arrange boundaries where 
necessary, and the allowances to be made for them, and 
change ends after each side has had one innings. 

45. They shall allow two minutes for each striker to come in 
and ten minutes between each innings. When they shall call 
" Play," the side refusing to play shall lose the match. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 87 

4f). Thoy shall not ordor a batHman out uiiIobb appealed to 
by Uie other side. 

47. Tlio umpire at the bowler's wicket shall be appealed to 
beforo the oth<!r iimi)ire in all eases except in those of stump- 
ing, hit wicket, run out at the striker's wicket, or arising 
under Law 42, but in any case in which an umpire is unable to 
give a decision he shall appeal to the other umpire, whose 
decision shall Ije llnal. 

4SA. If the umpire at tlx-i bowler's end be not satisfied of 
the absolute fairness ef tfie delivery of any ball, he shall call 
"Xo ball." 

4SB. The unipiie shall take especial care to call " No ball " 
instantly upon delivery, "Wide ball" as soon as it shall have 
passed the sticker. 

49. If either batsman run a short run, the umpire shall call 
'"One short," and the run shall not be scored. 

50. After the umpire has called "Over" the ball is " dead," 
but an appeal may be made as to whether either batsman is 
out, such appeal, however, shall not be made after the delivery 
of the next ball, nor after any cessation of play. 

51. No umpire shall be allowed to bet. 

52. No unjpire shall be changed during a match unless with 
the consent of both sides, except in case of violation of Law 51, 
then either side may dismiss him. 

53. The side which goes in second shall follow their innings 
if they have scored 80 runs less than the opposite side. 

54. On the last day of a match, and in a one-day match at 
any time, the inside shall be empowf^red to declare their 
innings at an end. 

ONE-DAY MATCHES. 

1. The. side whicli goes In second shall follow their innings 
if they have scored 60 runs less than tlie opposite side. 

2. The mat<.*h, unless played out, shall be decided by the first 
innin.;.s. 

3. Prior to the commencement of a mat<;h it may be agreed 
that the over consist of 5 or 6 balls. 



CROQUET RULES, 



Note.— The following Rules, though adapted and adopted for Loose 
Croquet, are, nevertheless, used by the most prominent clubs of the country 
as authority in Tight Croquet. Some rulings are to be construed as referring 
only to Loose Croquet. But of these there can be uo doubt, from the 
nature of the game and the wording of the Rules. 



INTERFERING WITH PLAYERS. 

Rule 1.— No player or other person shall be permitted 
to interfere with the result of a game by any 
word or act calculated to embarrass the player, 
nor shall any one, except a partner, speak to a 
player while in the act of shooting. 

ORDER OF COLORS. 

Rule 2.— The order of colors shall be red, white, blue, 
black. 

MALLETS. 

Rule 3. — There shall be no restriction as to kind or 
size of mallet used — one or two hands may be 
used in striking. 

Rule 4. — No player shall change his mallet during a 
game without permission of his opponent, except 
in case of accident, or to make a '' jump shot." 

Rule 5.— Should a ball or mallet break in striking, the 
player may demand another stroke, with a new 
ball or mallet. 

CLIPS OR MARKERS. 

Rule 6.— Every player shall be provided with a clip or 
indicator of the same color as his ball, painted 
on one side only, which he must affix to his arch 
next in order in course of play, before his part- 
ner plays, with the painted side towards the 
front of the arch. Should he fail to do so his 
cliv) must remain upon the arch it rested on be- 
fore he played, and he must make the points 



OFFIOTATi sroRTTNG RTTliES. 89 

again. Should he move his marker beyond or 
back of the point he is for, his attention must be 
called to such error before he plays again, other- 
wise it shall stand. Should a player put a ball 
through its arch, he must move the correspond- 
ing clip to its proper arch before the next ball 
is played, otherwise, the clip remains as before. 

OPENING OF GAME. 
Rule 7. — All games shall be opened by scoring from an 
imaginary line through the middle wicket, and 
playing towards the turning stake. The balls 
must be so played that they rest below the first 
arch from the turning stake, and if dislodged 
must be replaced — all balls being in play from 
where they jest — the ball nearest the stake play- 
ing first. 

BALLS.-HOW STRUCK. 
Rule 8.— The ball must be struck with the face of the 
mallet, the stroke being delivered whenever 
touching the ball it moves it. Should a stake or 
wire intervene, the stroke is not allowed unless 
the ball is struck at the same time, and if the 
ball is moved, without being struck by the face 
of the mallet, it shall remain where it rests, and 
should a point or roquet be made, it shall not be 
allowed, except by the decision of the uuTpire as 
to the fairness of the shot. All balls thus moved 
by a false shot may be replaced or not at the 
option of the opponent. 

Rule 9.— When making a direct shot {L e. roquet), the 
player must not push or follow the ball with his 
mallot ; but when taking croquet from a ball 
(two balls being in contact), he may follow his 
ball with the mallet ; but must not strike it 
twice. 

Rule 10. — If a player strikes his ball before his oppo- 
nent has finished his play, the stroke shall stand, 
or be made over, at the option of the opponent. 

Rule 11. — Should a ball rest against or near a wire, and 
the umpire, or other person agreed on, should 
decide that in order to pass through the arch, 
an unfair or push shot would have to be made, it 
shall not be allowed if made. 



90 (jFFICIAIj SPOKTINO KUIiES. 

FOUL STROKE. 

Rule 12. — Should a player in making a stroke move 
with his mallet any other than his object ball, 
it shall be a foul and his play ceases, and all 
balls moved shall be replaced as before the 
stroke, or remain where they rest, at the option 
of the opponent. 

Ilui.E 13. — If a dead ball in contact with another ball 
moves, on account of the inequality of the 
ground, while playing the other ball away froui 
it, the player does not lose his shot. 

BALLS.-WHEN NOT TO BE TOUCHED. 

Ri:le 14. — A ball must not be touched while on the field, 
except after a roquet, when it is necessary to 
place it beside the roqueted ball for the purpose 
of croquet, or to replace it when it has been 
moved by accident — except by permission of the 
opponent. 

ROQUET AND CROQUET. 

Rile 15.— A ball roquets another when it comes in con- 
tact with it by a blow from the player's mallet, 
,.or rebounds from a wicket or a stake or the bor- 
der; also when it comes in contact with it when 
croquet is taken from another ball. 

Rule 16. — A player after making roquet shall not stop 
his Ymll for the purpose of preventing its hitting" 
another. Should he do so his play ceases and 
all balls shall be replaced as before the stroke, 
or remain, at the option of the opponent. 

Rule 17.— Roquet gives to the player the privilege o» 
roquet-croquet only, and play must be made 
from the roqueted ball. 

Rule 18. — If a player in taking a croquet from a ball, 
fails to move it, such stroke ends his play, and 
his ball must be returned, or left where it stops, 
at the option of the opponent. 

Rule 19. — A player, in each turn of play, is at liberty 
to roquet any ball on the ground once only be- 
fore making a point. 



I 



OFFICIAL SPOKTINQ RULES. Si 

Rule 20.— Should a player croquet a ball he has not ro- 
queted, he loses his turn, and all balls moved by 
such play must be replaced to the satisfaction of 
the umpire, or adversary. Should the mistake 
not be discovered before the player has made 
another stroke, the play shall be valid, and the 
player continue his play. 

Rule 31. — In taking croquet from a ball, if player's 
ball strikes another, to which he is dead, such 
stroke does not end his play. 

Rule 23. — If a player roquets two or more balls at the 
same stroke, only the first can be croqueted. 



MAKING OF POINTS. 

Rule 33. - A player makes a point in the game when his 
ball makes an arch or hits a stake in proper 
play. 

Rule 34. -If a player makes a point, and afterwards at 
the same stroke roquets a ball, he must take the 
point, and use theball. If the roqueted ball is 
beyond the arch, as determined by rule 45, and 
playing ball rests through the arch, the arch is 
held to be first made.* 

Rule 35.— If a ball roquets another, and afterwards at 
the same stroke makes a point, it must take the 
ball and reject the point. 

Rule 36. — A player continues to play so long as he 
makes a point in the game, or roquets another 
ball to which he is in play. 

Rule 27. — A ball making two or more points at the 
same stroke, has only the same privilege as if it 
made but one. 

Rule 38. — Should a ball be driven through its arch, or 
against its stake by croquet or concussion, it is 
a point made by that ball, except it be a rover. 
[See Rule 52.] 



* Note. — While this is not mathematically correct, the rule is bo made to 
avoid disputes and difficult measurements. 



92 offictatj sporting TJULES. 

PLAYING ON DEAD BALL. 

Rule 29. — If a player play by direct shot on a dead ball, 
all balls displaced by such shot shall be replaced 
in their former position, and the player's ball 
placed against the dead ball on the side from 
which it came ; or all balls shall rest where they 
lie, at the option of the opponent. 

Rule 30. — If a player, in making a direct shot, strike a 
ball on whice he has already played, i. e., a dead 
ball, his play ceases. Any point or part of a 
point or ball struck, after striking the dead ball, 
is not allowed, and both balls must be replaced 
in accordance with the preceding rule. A dead 
ball displaced by other than direct shot, shall 
not be replaced. 

Rule 31. — If playing ball in passing through its arch 
strike a dead ball that is beyond the arch, as 
determined by rule 45, the ball shall not be con- 
sidered a dead ball if playing ball rests through 
its arch, and the point shall be allowed. 

BALLS MOVED OR INTERFERED WITH BY ACCI- 
DENT OR DESIGN. 

Rule 32. — A ball accidentally displaced, otherwise than 
as provided for in Rule 12, must be returned to 
its position before play can proceed. 

Rule 33. — If a ball is stopped or diverted from its course 
by an opponent, the player may repeat the shot 
or not as he chooses. Should he decline to re- 
peat the shot, the ball must remain where it 
stops, and, if play mg ball, must play from there. 

Rule 34. — If a ball is stopped or diverted from its course 
by a player or his partner, the opponent may 
demand a repetition of the shot if he chooses. 
Should he decline to do so, the ball must remain 
where it stops, and, if playing ball, must play 
from there. 

Rule 35.— If a ball is stopped or diverted from its course 
by any object inside the ground, not pertaing to 
the game or ground, other than provided for in 
Rules 33 and 34, the shot may be repeated or 
allow^ed to remain, at the option of the player. 
If not repeated, the ball must remain where it 
stops, and, if playing ball, play from there. 



r 



OFFICIAL. SPORTING KULES. 98 

BALLS IN CONTACT. 

Rule 36.— Should a player, on commencing his play, 
find his ball in contact with another, he may hit 
his own as he likes, and then have subsequent 
privileges the same as though the balls were 
feeparated an inch or more. 

RULES CONCERNING BOUNDARY. 

[The boundary is a line extending around the field, nsiially 30 inches from 
the border, and parallel with it.] 

Rule 37. — A ball shot over boundary or border must be 
returned at right angles from where it stops be- 
fore play can proceed. 

Rule 38. — A ball is in the field only when the whole 
ball is within the boundary line. 

Rule 39. — No play is allowed from beyond the bounda- 
ry line, except when a ball is placed in contact 
with another for the purpose of croquet. 

Rule 40. — If a player strikes his ball when over the 
boundary line, he shall lose his stroke, and the 
balls shall be replaced or left where they stop, 
at the option of the opponent. 

Rule 41. — If a player hit a ball off the field by a direct 
shot, his play ceases, and the roqueted ball is 
placed on the boundary opposite the point 
where it lay before being thus hit. But if a ball 
off the field is hit from a croquet, the hit shall 
not be allowed, the ball shall be replaced prop- 
erly in the field, and the play shall not cease. 

[Note.— The three following rules apply more particularly to the old 
ptyle of grounds with square corners, and are retained for some clubs that 
have not adopted the new style of grounds.] 

Rule 43. — The first ball driven over the boundary line 
into a corner must be placed on the corner at 
the intersection of the two boundary lines. 

Rule 43. — If a ball, having been struck over the bound- 
ary line, is returnable at the corner, another 
ball being on or entitled to the corner, it shall 
be placed on that side of the corner ball on 
which it went oft'. 

Rule 44. — If two balls, having been shot over the 
boundary line, re>st directly behind one another 



94 omcIAIi SPOUTING KULES. 

at right angles with boundary line, they shall 
be placed on the line along side of each other in 
the same relative position in which they were 
played off. This can occur only when the cen- 
ters of the two balls rest directly behind one 
another at right angles with the boundary line. 

BALL.-WHEN THROUGH AN ARCH. 
Rule 45. — A ball is not through an arch when a straight 
edge, laid across the two wires on the side from 
which the ball came, touches the ball without 
moving the arch. 

BALLS WHEN IN POSITION. 
Rule 46. —If a ball has been placed under an arch, for 
the purpose of croquet, it is not in position to 
run that arch. 

Rule 47. — If a ball be driven under its arch from the 
wrong direction, and rests there, it is not in po- 
sition to run that arch in the right direction. 

Rule 48.— If a ball, shot through its arch in the right 
direction, rolls back through or under that arch, 
the point is not made, but the ball is in position 
if left there. 

HITTING BALL WHILE MAKING WICKET. 

Rule 49. — The cage wicket may be made in one, two or 
more turns, provided the ball stops within limit 
of the cage. 

Rule 50. — Any playing ball within, or under, a wicket, 
becomes dead to advancement through the 
wicket from that position, if it comes in contact 
with any other ball by a direct shot. 

ROVERS. 
Rule 5L — A rover has the right of roquet and conse- 
quent croquet on every ball once during each 
turn of play, and is subject to roquet and cro- 
quet by any ball in play. 

Rule 52. — Rovers must be continued in the game until 
partners become rovers, and go out successively, 
and a rover that has been driven against the 
stake cannot be removed to make way for the 
next rover. 



t 



t 



p 



OFFICIALi SPORTING KULES. 95 

PLAYING OUT OF TURN, OR WRONG BALL. 
Rule 53. — If a pLayer plays out of bis proper turn, 
whether with his own or any other ball, or in 
his proper turn plays the wrong ball, and the 
mistake is discovered before the next player has 
commenced his play, all benefit from any point 
or points made is lost, and his turn of play is 
forfeited. All balls moved by the misplay must 
be returned to their former position by the um- 
pire or adversary. If the mistake is not discov- 
ered until after the next player has made his 
first stroke, the error must stand. 

POINTS RE-MADE. 
Rule 54. — If a player makes a point he has already 
made, his marker not being on that point, and 
the mistake is discovered before the proper ])oint 
is made, the play ceases with the shot by which 
the wicket was re-made, and the marker remains 
where it stood at the beginning of this play. 
All balls shall be left in the position they had at 
the time the wieket was re made. If not dis- 
covered before the proper point is made, the 
points so made are good, and play proceeds the 
same as if no error had been made. 

ERROR IN ORDER OF PLAY. 
Rule 55. — If an error in order is discovered after a play- 
er has struck his ball, he shall be allowed to 
finish Iiis play, provided he is playing in the 
regular sequence of his partner's ball last played. 
In case of dispute as to proper sequence of balls, 
it shall be decided by the umpire ; if there is no 
umpire, by lot. No recourse shall be had to lot 
unless each party expresses the belief that the 
other is wrong. 

Rule 56.— At any time an error in order is discovered, 
theop])osite side shall follow with the same ball 
last played (the proper sequence) ; but before 
playing, their opponents shall have privilege to 
demand a transposition of adversaries' balls. 

Example.— B'ack plays by mistake after Red— the 
error is not discovered — Blue plays in the proper 
sequence of his partner Red, and seeing that 
Black has just played, is thus led to believe it 



Stj OlFKUAL SPORTING RULiifci. 

the innocent ball, and upon concluding his play, 
leaves Black by Red. Now, if error in order is 
discovered, the player of Red and Blue can de- 
mand that the position of Black and White be 
transposed. 

CHANGING SURFACE OF GROUND. 

Rule 57. — The surface of grounds shall not be changed 
during a game by either player, unless by eon- 
sent of the umpire, and if so changed at the time 
of playing, the shot shall be declared lost. 

DIRECTION THROUGH WICKETS. 

Rule 58. — In making all side or corner wickets the play- 
ing ball shall pass through them towards the 
center. 

PENALTY. -GENERAL RULE. 

Rule 59.— If a rule is violated, a penalty for which has 
not been provided, the player shall cease his 
play. 



"OUKNAMENT RULES, 

(1892.) 



KtJLE 1.— The tournament games shall be played in accordance 
with the rules of the National Croquet Association. 

Rule 2.— Each Club shall be entitled to enter three players, 
each of whom shall play one game with each mernber 
of the class to which he is assigned. 

KuLE 3.— No player shall be allowed to enter aftei- 8 o'clock 
Wednesday morning, except by consent of the Com- 
mittee of Arrangements. 

KuLE 4.— AIj players are expected to remain till the finish and 
play all games assigned to them ; should any player 
leave before he has played all his games, his name and 
games shall be stricken from the list. 

Rule 5.— The order of play shall be determined by lot, names 
being drawn i)y the Committee of Arrangements. 

Rule 6.— Should any player fail to be present when his turn 
comes, the next in order shall play, and the former's 
game be forfeited, unless excused by the Committee of 
Arrangements. 

Rule 7.— All disputed points shall be referred to an umpire, 
to be chosen before play by the contestants, and in 
case of his inability to decide, to three referees, to be 
chosen by the Committee of Arrangements. 

Rule 8.— Games shall be called by 8 a.m., and no game shall 
be begun after 6 p.m., unless by mutual consent. 

Rule 9.— All ties shall be played ofl" in accordance with the 
above rules. 

]{ule 10.— In case of darkness coming on during a game, the 
umpire shall decide when a game shall stop, and if 
stopped, shall be continued first in order the next 
morning, if the players are on time. 

Rule 11.— The players shall be divided into four classes. 

Rule 12.— Three delegates may be admitted to play from 
any club, for live dollars"; and others may enter from 
the same club upon payment of two dollars additional 
for each player. 

The social tournament games will be governed by the same 
rules as the prize tournament games. 



''"^ OFFICIAL «ruliTi2\a KULiES. 

The Association was organised, and tlie ioiiowinf^; 
officers elected for the ensuins:: vear : 

Pres't, Ira B. Read, A'ew York ; Vice Pres't, J. W. 
Hooker, Norwich, Conn.; Sec'v and Treas., G. W. John- 
son, Pliiladelphia ; Corresi>i»ndin<»- See'y, C. H. Botsford, 
New York. 

The Committee on By-Laws reported the following, 
which were adopted. 

BY-LAWS. 

1. This organization slmll be known as the National 
American Croquet Association. 

3. Its ofBcers shall be President, three Vice Pi'esi- 
dents, Secretary and Treasurer and Corresponding- 
Secretary. 

3. They shall be elected yearly at the annual meeting. 

4. Any club may become a member of this Associa- 
tion by adopting its rules, and paying the initiation fee 
of five dollars. 

5. Each club shall be entitled to three delegates. 

6. The Association shall, at each annual meeting, fix 
on a place where the next annual meeting shall be held. 

7. Special mertings may be called by the President 
when he may deem it necessary. 

8. The annual meeting shall b»' liold the second* Tuesday 
of August, at 8 o'clock, p.m. 

9. A majority of the members of the Association shall 
constitute a quorum at all meetings. 

10. All question and elections shall be decided by a 
majority vote. 

11. These By-Laws may be amended at any meeting, 
by p vote of two-thirds of the members of the Associa- 
tion. 

ADOPTED 1887. 

12. The President shall be authorized to fill any va 
eancy among the officers that occurs through removal 
or otherwise, 

ADOPTEI) 1889. 

13. Clubs having more than eight members can pay 
ten dolk-s entrance tee, and be entitled to six delegates. 

ADOPTED 1891. 

14. Clubs entering four players shall pay seven dol- 
lars, and nine dollars if entering five. 

* Practically annulled by vote of Association to meet the third Tuesday. 



COURT te:nxis I.y\W^S, 



IMPLEMENTS, AXU CHOICE OF SIDES. 

JiallH and RcjU'kaiH.—l. The bail.s sliall be not lo8s than 'll4u\.. 
and not nioio tlian 2%\n. in diameter; and shall i>e not Ichb 
tlian 2%oz., and not more than 2%(jz. in weight. 
Note.— There Is to restriction as to the sbspe or size of the rackets. 
Choice of Sides.— 2. (a) The choice ofsideH at the y>eginningof 

the fir«t set is det<Tmined by S[>in, 
(hj In Bubeequent sets of a series, tlie players sliall ixigin 
each set on tiie sides on which they linislied tiie s<it i^- 
fore it. 

SER VICE. -Delivery. 

3. Tiie ball served must be struck with the racliet, and may 
be delivered from any pait of the service-side. 

Service.— 4:. The ball served must touch the service-ijent- 
house before touching any other part of the court, except the 
rest of the side-pent-house and the service wall; and it must 
diop in the service-court, or on one of the lines which b^jund it. 

Service when good.—o. The service is good, 

(a) if the ball served touch (in its descent; any part of the 
service-pent-house, so as to rise again from it ; or 

(h) if the ball served strike the service-wail, and afterward;, 
touch fin its descent) any part of the service-pent-house, 
even though it do m)t rise again from it ; or 

(cj if the Vjall served diop in the winning-gallery. 

FauLlH Not lleturnahle. — 0. A fault may not be returned. 

Pas.'^efi Not Returnable.— 1. A jjass may not be returned ; but 
a ball served, which has not gone ar-ross the pass-line on the 
pent-house, may be volleyed, although, if untouched, it might 
have dropped in the pass-court. If a pass touch the striker- 



100 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES, 

out, or if a service (before it has dropped) touch him, when 
standing with both feet in the pass-court and not having at- 
tempted to strike the ball, it is still counted as a pass. 

Faults Annulled.— K pass annuls a previous fault. 

^Service and Faidls Annulled.,— 'd. If the striker-out {ie(;lare 
himself not ready for service, and liave made no attempt to re- 
turn it, that service is counted for nothing, though it be a 
faalt. It annuls a previous fault. The striker-out, having 
been asked if he be ready, and h.-iving declared himself ready, 
may not similarly refuse a second service. 

Continuation of Service.- 10. The server continues to serve 
\uitil two chases be made, or one chase when the score of either 
player is at forty or advantage (see Law 25) : the players then 
change sides, the server becomes striker-out, and the striker- 
out becomes server. 

RETURN.— Return When Good. 

11. The return is good, if the ball in-play be struck with the 
racket so that it passes the net without touching a gallery- 
post or anything lixed or lying in an opening on the side from 
which it is struck, and without going out-of-court. 
Return When Not Good.— 12. The return is not good, 
(a) if not in accordance with the terms of Law 11 ; or 
(6)if the ball be struck more than once, or be not definitely 

struck ; or 
(c) if the ball in-play, having passed the net, come back and 
drop on the side from which it was struck, unless it should 
have touched a gallery-post or anything fixed or lying in 
an opening on that side of the court which is opposed 
to the striker. 
Ball, When Not Returnable.— 1'^. A ball whi(?h is no longer in- 
play may not be returned, 

SCORING.— The Server, When He Wins a Stroke. 

14. The server wins a stroke (except as provided in Law lit. 
(a) if a good service enter the winning-gallery or the grille ; or, 
[h) if the striker-out fail to return a good service (except 

when it makes a chase : see Laws 17-19) : or 
[0 if the striker-out fail to return the ]>all in-play (except 
when it makes a chase : see Laws 17-10) ; (u- 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING RUIiES. 101 

{(l) if he himself return the ball in-play so that it enters the 
winning-gallery or grille, or falls on or beyond the service 
line ; or 

(e) if he serve or return the ball in-play that it drops or falls 
npon a ball, or other object, which is on or beyond the service- 
line; or 

(/) if he win a chase (see Law 20); or 

ig) if the striker-out lose a stroke (see Law 16). 

The Siriker-out, When He Wins a Stroke.~15. The striker- 
out wins a stroke (except as provided in Law 9). 

(n) if the server serve two consecutive faults [except as pro- 
vided in Law 31 (b)] ; or 

(b) if the server fail to return the ball in-play (except when 
it makes a chase : see Laws 17-19) ; or 

(c) if he himself return the ball in-play so that it enters the 
dedans ; or 

(d) if he win a chase ; or 

(e) if the server lose a stroke (see Law 16). 

Either Flayer, When He Loses a Stroke.— W. Either player 
loses a stroke, 

(a) if he lose a chase (see Law 21) ; or 

(b) if the ball in-play (except as provided in Law 7), touch 
him or anything which he wears or carries (except his 
racket in the act of returning the ball); or 

(c) if he touch or strike the ball in-play with his racket more 
than once, or do not delinitely strike it. 

Chases, How Made and Marked.— 17. Wben a ball in-play (on 
either sids of the net, not being that on which the striker is 
standing) 

{a) falls on on any part of the tloor, except on or be yon d the 
service-line; or 

(b) enters any gallery except the winning-gallery; or 

ic) touches a gallery-post ; 
it is marked a chase 

{A) at the line on the floor on Avhich it fell ; or 

(B) better or worse than that line on the floor whicrh is near- 
est to the point at which it f».'ll ; or 

(C) at the gallery the post of which it touched; 
except, as provided in Laws 18 and 19. 



102 OFFICIAL SPORTING BUIiES. 

Note (a).— A ball In-play, which touches the net-post and drops on the 
side opposed to the striker, Is marked a chase at the line on the side on 
which it drops. 

Note (b).— a ball In-pIay, which enters a gallery, is marked a cha'e at 
that gallery ;wbich it enters, notwlthstaddlng that It may have touched 
an adjacect gallery-post without touching the floor in the interim. 

Note (c).— The gallery lines on the floor correspond , and are equivalent, 
to the galleries of which they bear the names. 

A Ball dropping or falling in net, or hounding over net after 
dropping, how marked. — 18. "When a ball in-play 
(a) drops or falls in the net, on the side opposed to the 

striker ; or 
(6) drops on the floor, on the side opposed to the striker, and, 
bounding over the net, falls on that side of it from which 
it was struck, whether it touches the net in its bound or 
not; 
it is marked a chase at the line on the side opposed to the 
striker. 

A Ball Dropping or Falling Upon Anothrr Ball How Marked. 
—19. When a ball in-play drops or falls upon a ball, or other 
object, which is on the floor [except when it is on or beyond 
the service-line: see Law 14 (e)], it is marked a chase at the 
point at which that ball, or other object, was when the ball in- 
play dropped or fell upon it. 

Chases, How Won— 20. Either player wins a chase 

(a) if he serve or return the ball so that it enters a winning- 
opening ; or 

(b) if he serve or return the ball so that it falls better than 
the chase for which he played ; or enters a gallery, or 
touches a gallery-post, better than the gallery, or the gal- 
lery-line, at which the chase was, for which he played ; or 

((•) if he serve or return the ball so that it drops or falls upon 
a ball, or other object, which, or at the gallery correspond- 
ing to which the chase was, for which he played ; or 

{d) if his antagonist fail to return the ball in-play except 
when it falls worse than the chase in question. 

(Jhases, How Lost.~21. Either player loses a chase. 

(ft) if he fail to return the ball in-play, except when it falls 
worse than the chase in question ; or 

{b) If he return the ball in-play so that it falls worse than 
the chase, or enters a gallery, or touches a gallery-post. 



OFFICIAL. SPORTING KULES. 103 

worse than the gallery, or the gallery-line, at which the 
chase was, for which he played ; or 
(c) if he return the ball in-play so that it drops or fall upon a 
ball, or other object, which is at a point on the floor worse 
than that at which the chase was, for which he played. 
Chase-off.— 22. When a ball in-play. 

(a) falls at a point on the floor neither better nor worse than 
that at which, or at the gallery corresponding to which, 
the chase was, for which the striker played ; or 
{b) enters that gallery, or the gallery corresponding to that 
gallery-line, or touches the post of that gallery , or falls on 
the gallery-line corresponding to that gallery, at which 
the chase was, for which the striker played ; or 
(c) drops or falls upon a ball, or other object which is at a 
point on the floor, neither better nor worse than that at 
which or at the gallery corresponding to which, the chase 
was, for which the striker plaj^ed; 
it is marked chase-off; it is not scored as a stroke won by 
either player; the chase is annulled, and the striker has not to 
play for it again. 

Chases When Played Fo7\—2S. As soon as two chases are 
marked, or one chase when the score of either player is at forty 
or advantage (see Law 25), the players change sides; the 
player who made the first chase now defends it, while the 
other plays to win it; and so with the second chase, except 
when only one has been marked. 

Chases Marked in Error, Annulled.— 24:. If by an error three 
chases have been marked or two chases when the score of 
either player is at forty or advantage (see Law 25), the last 
chase in each case is annulled. 

Strokes, How Scored.— 25. On either player winning his first 
stroke, the score is called fifteen for that player; on either 
player winning his second stroke, the score is called thirty 
for that player; on either player winning his third stroke, the 
score is called forty for that player; and the fourth stroke 
won by either player is scored game for that player ; except, 
as below : 

if both players have won three strokes, the score is called 
deuce, and the next stroke won by either player is 
scored advantage for that player ; if the same player win 



lOi OFFICIAL SPORTING RITLES. 

the following' stroke, he wins the game; if he lose the 
following stroke, the score is again called a deuce ; and so 
on, until either player win the two strokes immediately 
following the score of deuce, when the game is scored for 
that player. 
(kimes, How Scored.— 26. The player who ftrst wins six games 
wins a set ; except as below : 

if both players win live games, the score is called games- 
all, and the next game won by either player is scored 
advantage-game for that player ; if the same player win 
the following game, he wins the set; if he lose the 
following game, the score is again called games-all; and 
so on, until either player win the two games immediately 
following the score of games-all, when he wins the set. 

NoTK.— Players often a:ree not to play advantage-sets, but to decide 
the set by one game after arriving at tbe score of games-all. 

Doubtful and Disputed Cases, How Decided.— 27. Every chase 
is marked, and every stroke scored, by the marker, who is en- 
titled to consult the dedans, when he is in doubt. A player, 
who is dissatisfied with the marker's deoision, is entitled to 
appeal to the dedans. A majority of the dedans confirms or 
reverses the marker's decision. An appeal must be made be- 
fore a recommencement of play. 

NoTB —Tbe Cedans should cot give a decision, unasked, on «. question 
of marking a chase or stroke ; but may, and should, correct Inaccurate 
scoring of chase', strokes, games, or sets. 

THREE-HANDED, or FOUR-HANDED GAMES (sometimes 
called DOUBLE GAMES).— Order of Play. 

28. The partners swerve and strike-out in alternate games ; 
unless it shall have been previously agreed to the contrary. 

NoTB —la Is usually, but not alv^ays agr ed that the strlker-out may leave 
to his partner such services as pass him. 

The former Laws apply to these, as well as to Single, Games ; 
the advantages and disadvantages attaching to a single player 
under the former Laws here attaching to a pair of players. 

ODDS. — Bisques and Half-bisques When Taken, Generally. 

29. (a) A bisque or a half-bisque, may not be taken after the 
service has been delivered. 



I 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 105 

(6) The server may not take a bisque after a fault ; but the 
striker-out may do so. 

Bisques and Half-bisques When Taken, in Changing Sides. 
30. A player, who wishes to take a bisque, or a half-bisque, 
there being a chase, or two chases marked, may take it either 
before or after changing sides ; but lie may not, after changing 
sides, go back to take it. 

Round Services.— SI. (a) When the odds of round services are 
given, the ball served by the giver of the odds must touch the 
grille-pent-house after touching the service-pent-house, and 
before dropping in the service-court, or on one of the lines 
Avliich bound it. 
(6) Neither faults, nor failures in complying with the above 
condition, are counted against the giver of the odds; but 
the recipient of the odds may decline to return such ser- 
vices as do not touch both the pent-houses : if, however, 
he attempt and fail to return any such service, it is counted 
against him. 

Half -Court. —The players having agreed, into which half- 
court, on each side of the net, the giver of the odds «hall play, 
the latter loses a stroke if the ball, returned by him, drop in 
either of the other half-courts : 
but a ball, returned by the giver of the odds, which 
(a) drops on the half-court-line ; or 

(&) drops in his half-court and touches the dedans-post be- 
fore falling; or 

(c) drops in his half-court and falls in the dedans, even 
though on the other side of the dedans-post; or 

(d) touches the dedans-post before dropping; 
is counted for the giver of the odds : 

and a return, boasted against any wall by the giver of the odds, 
which 

(e) drops in his half-court ; or 

(/) drops on the half-court line ; or 
(fir) touches the dedans-post before dropping ; or 
{h) touches any pent-house, battery, or wall, before dropping 
in his half-court, dropping on the half-court-line, or touch- 
ing the dedans-post ; 
is also counted for the giver of the odds. 



106 OFPIOIAIi SPORTING EUIiES. 

NoTB.— It Is, of course, evident that the giver of theae odds may make a 
chase, or win a chase or a stroke, with a ball which drops in his half court, 
or on the half-court-line, but falls in the other half -court 

Nicks, When A U-the-icalls or Side-walls are given.— 33, When 
the odds of toiieh-iio- walls, or touch-no-side-walls, are given, 
a ball returned by the giver of the odds, which makes a nick 
in falling, is counted for the striker. 

DIRECTIONS TO THE MARKER. 

It is the duty of the marker 
to call the faults, and the passes ; 
to call the strokes, when won, or when he is asked to 

do so; 
to call the games, and sets, at the end of each, or when 

asked to do so ; 
to mark the chases, when made ; 
to call the chases, when there are two, in the order in 

which they were made ; or the chase, when there is one 

with the score at forty or advantage ; and then 
to direct the players to change sides; 
to call the chase or chases again, in order as above, when 

the players have changed sides, and each chase as a 

player has to play for it ; 
not to call play or not play in doubtful cases before the 

conclusion of the rest, unless asked to do so ; 
to decide all doubtful and disputed strokes, subject to an 

appeal to the dedans ; 
to warn the players of any balls lying on the floor in their 

way, or to their danger or disadvantage, and to remove 

all such balls ; 
to collect the balls into the ball-basket; and 
to keep the ball troughs constantly replenished in the 

dedans and last gallery, and the latter especially in 

three-handed and four-handed games. 



Rules for Curling— Rink Medals. 



Sec. 1. The length of the rink played shall be forty-two yards. 
The tees shall be put down thirty-eight yards apart. In a continued 
straight line with the tees, and four yards distant from each, a circle, 
eighteen inches in diameter, shall be drawn on the left-liand side of 
said line (looking in the direction to be played), and its edge just 
touching it. Within this circle, Avhether standing on the ice, or on 
any rest, support, or abutment whatsoever, permitted by the rules, 
each player, when playing his stone, shall place his right foot and 
liis left toot on the left-hand side of the central line (the circle to Vje 
on the opposite side of the line if the player be left-handed). When 
a hack or hatch in the ice is used, it must be behind the circle above 
described, and not of greater length than fourteen inches, measuring 
from the central line. A circle of seven feet radius to be described 
from each tee as a centre to, and no stone to count which passes this, 
and beyond a line drawn across the further edge of the seven-feet 
circle; such stone to be treated as out of the game, and put off the 
ice. Should this be neglected, and another stone stopped against it, 
and within seven feet of the tee, the stone so stopped to be counted 
in the game. The hog-score to be distant from each tee one-sixth 
l>art of the w^hole rink played. Every one to be a hog which does not 
clear a square placed upon this score ; but no stone to be considered 
a hog which has stru^.k another stone lying over the hog-score. A 
line shall be drawn on the ice at right angles to the rink, half-way 
betwixt the tees, which shall be called "The Middle Line." In no 
case shall the rink played be less than thirty-two yards. 

As soon as the rink is marked off, and before beginning to play, 



108 OFFICIAL SPORTING BULES 

the terms of the match or game must be distinctly stated and fixed 
by the skips, if they have not been previously arranged. These 
terms may either be, that the parties shall play for a specified time, 
or a game of a certain number of shots or heads. Though the terms 
liave been previously fixed, they should here be repeated. 

Sec. 2. Every rink to be composed of four players a side, each with 
two stones. Before commencing the game, each skip shall state to 
liis opposing skip the rotation in which his men are to play, and the 
rotation so fixed is not to be changed during the game. Each pair 
of players shall play one stone alternately with his oppenent, till he 
has played both. 

Sec. 3. The two skips opposing each other shall settle by lot, or any 
other way they may agree upon, which party shall lead, after which 
the winning party of the last end shall do so. 

Sec. 4. All curling stones shall be of a circular shape. No stone 
shall be of a greater weight than forty-four pounds imperial, nor les.s 
than thirty-two pounds, nor of greater circumference than thirty- 
six inches, nor of less height than one-eighth part of its greatest 
circumference, imless the club uses iron blocks. No iron block to 
exceed over seventy pounds in w^eight. And the same rules as to size 
must govern the iron blocks which govern the stones. Players maj' 
change the side of their stones once during the game, but they shall 
not be allowed to change them oftener, or change stones after the 
commencement of a game, unless by mutual consent of the skips, 
except one or both may be broken, and then the largest portion of 
the broken stone to count, without any necessity for playing with it 
more. If the played stone rolls and stops on its side or top, it shall 
not be counted, but put off the ice. Should the handle quit the stone 
in the delivery, the player must keep hold of it, otherwise he shall 
not be entitled to replay his shot. 

Sec. 5. Each party, before beginning to play, and during the course 
of each end, to be arranged along the sides of the rink, anywhere 
betwixt the middle line and the tee which their skip may direct ; but 



OPFIOIAIi SPORTING BULES. 109 

no party, except when sweeping" according to rule, shall go upon the 
middle of the rink, nor cross it under any pretence whatever. The 
skips alone to stand at or about the tee, as their turn requires. 

Sec. 6. If a player plays out of turn , the stone so played may be 
stopped in its progress, and returned to the player. If the mistake 
shall not be discovered till the stone is again at rest, the opposite 
party shall have the option to add one to theii- score, and the game 
proceed in its original rotation, or to declare the end null and void. 

Sec. 7. The sweeping department shall be under the exclusive 
direction and control of the skips. The player's party shall be 
allowed to sweep when the stone is past the middle line, and till it 
reaches the tee ; the adverse party, when it has passed the tee. The 
sweeping to be always to a side or across the rink ; and no sweepings 
to be moved forward and left in front of a running stone, so as to 
stop or obstruct its course. Either party may sweep behind the tee, 
before or after the stone has been played, or while in motion. 

Sec. 8. If in sweeping or otherwise a running stone be marred by 
any of the party to which it belongs, it shall be put off the ice; if 
by any of the adverse party, it shall be placed where the skip of the 
party to which it belongs shall direct. If marred by any other 
means, the player shall replay his stone. Should any played stone 
be accidentally displaced by any of the opposing party before the 
last stone is played, for the first offence it shall be replaced by the 
skip to whom it belongs, in a position as near as possible before it 
was displaced; and for the second offence by the same party, the 
opposing party shall have the privilege of declaring the end null and 
void, or of replacing the stone. If a played stone is moved acci- 
dentally by any of the party to whom it belongs, it shall be in tfio 
decision of the opposing skip to replace the stone as nearl y as. pos- 
sible to where it was before being moved, or to allow it to remaiu 
where it was accidentally moved to. No stone displaced by either 

NotB.— In all these preliminary drawings and descriptions, distinct refereucu in 
to be ma-fe to the terms used In the preflxed diagram or plan called "Thb Rink " 



110 OI'FICIAL SPOETING Rl/LES. 

party shall be allowed to be moved if it has been struck or moved by 
a running stone, before the claim for moving has been made. 

Sec. 9. Each player to come provided with a besom, to be ready to 
play when his turn comes, and not to take more than a reasonable 
time to play his stone. Should he accidentally play a wrong stone, 
any of the players may stop it while running ; if not stopped till it is 
again at rest, it shall be replaced by the one which he ought to have 
played. 

Sec. 10. No measuring of shots allowed previous to the termination 
of the end. Disputed shots to be determined by the skips, or, if they 
disagree, by the umpire; or, when there is no umpire, by some neu- 
tral person mutually chosen by them, whose decision shall le final. 
All measurements to be taken from the centre of the tee, to the part 
of the stone which is nearest to it. No stone shall be considered 
within or without a circle unless it clear it ; and every stone shall be 
held as resting on a line which does not completely clear it— in every 
case that is to be determined by placing a square on the ice at that 
part of the circle or line in dispute. 

Sec. 11. Each skip shall have the exclusive regulation and direc- 
tion of the game for his party, and may play in what part of it he 
pleases; but having chosen his place at the beginning, he must retain 
it till the end of the game ; but no skip, when his turn to play comes, 
after having appointed one of his party to take charge for him, shall 
be allowed after leaving the ice to go back and examine the end, but 
shall take directions from the party appointed by himself. The 
players may give their advice, but cannot control their director; nor 
are they, upon any pretext, to address themselves to the person 
about to play. Each skip, when his own turn to play comes, shall 
name one of his party to take charge for him. Every player to fol- 
low implicitly the directions given him. If any player shall improp- 
erly speak to, taunt or interrupt another while in the act of delivering 
his stone, one shot shall be added to the score of the party inter- 
rupted, and the end proceed as before. 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING RULES. Ill 

Sec. 12. If from any change of weather, after a game lias been 
begun, or from any other reasonable cause whatsoever, one party 
shall desire to shorten the rink, or to change to another one, and if 
the two skips cannot agree upon it, the umpire for the occasion shall 
be called, and he shall, after seeing one end played, determine 
whether the rink shall be shortened, and how much, or whether it 
shall be changed, and his determination shall be final and binding on 
all parties. Should there be no umpire appointed for the occasion , 
or should he be otherwise engaged, the two skips may call in any 
curler unconnected with the disputing parties whose services can 
most readily be got, and subject to the same conditions ; his power 
shall be equally extensive as the umpire aforesaid. 

Sec. 13. Should any question arise, the detetermination of which is 
not provided for by the words and spirit of the rules now estab- 
lished, it may be referred to the Executive Committee. 



# 



Rules for Local Competition. 

(POINT GAME.) 

1. Competitors shall draw lots for rotation of play, and shall use 

two stones. 

2. The length of the rink shall not exceed « yards ; any lesser dis- 
tance shall be determined by the umpire. 

3 Circles of 7 feet and 4 feet radius shall be drawn round the t«e 
and a central line through the centre of the 4-foot circle to the hog- 
score. ^ 

4. Every competitor shall play four shots at each of the eight fol- 
lowing points of the game, viz.: Striking, inwicking, drawing 
guarding, chap and lie, wick and curl in, raising and chipping the' 
winner, according to the following definition (See diagram next 
page) : 

5. In Nos. 2, 6, 8 and 9, two chances on the left and two on the right. 

DIAGRAM TO BE DRAWN ON THE ICE PREVIOUS 
TO PLAYING. 



I 
o 
o Placed stones shown • 

CO 

O Played stones shown O 




..fn.lTL.r^ s.ve much time If In playlag local matches, two rinks be prepared 
ylog parallel to each other, the tee of the one b.lng at the reverse end of the oJher 
rluk every competitor play both stones up the one rink, anl ImmedlLly ^ffer. 
wards both down the other, nnlshlng thus at each rounk all his chances at that 
poln It will also save time If a coda of signals be arranged Ltwee^the mar Jer 

h^nd^^hlr,"''"'^^-''; ""^^ *" "'«" ^'^ ^«°^ whenlisscored and both 
hands when 2 are scare^J. In case cf a miss hands to be kept down. 



ornOIAL SPORTING RUIiBS. 



113 




1 . Striking . — A stone 
plained on the tee. If struck . 
to count 1 ; if struck out of 
the 7 foot circle, to count 2. 




2. Inwicking.—\ stone be- 
in^ placed on the tee, and 
another with its inner edge 
2 feet 6 inches from the tee, 
and its fore edge on a line 
drawn from the tee at an 
angle of 4:5« with the central 
line. 




3. Drawing.— It the stone 
played lies within or on the 
7 foot circle, to count 1; if 
within or on the 4 foot circle, 
to count 2. 




4. Guarding. — A stone 
placed on the tee. If the 
stone played rests within 6 
inches of the central line, to 
count 1; if on the line, to 
count 2. It shall be over the 
hog, but not touch the stone 
to be guarded. 



114 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 




5. Chap and Lie.~lt a stone | 
placed on the tee be struck 
out of the 7 foot circle, and 
the played stone lie within or 
on the same circle, to count 1 ; 
if struck out of the 7 foot cir- 
cle, and the played stone be 
within or on the 4 foot circle, 
to count 2. 

6, Wick and Curl in.— A 
stone being placed with its 
inner edge 7 feet distant from 
the tee, and its fore edge on 
a line, making an angle of 
45° with the central line. If 
the stone is struck, and the 
played stone curls on or 
within the 7 foot circle, to 

count 1 ; if struck, and the played stone curls on or within the 4 foot 
circle, to count 2. 

7. Raising. — A stone placed 
with its centre on the central 
line and its inner edge 8 feet 
distant from the tee. If 
struck into or on the 7 foot 
circle, to count 1 ; if struck 
Into or on the 4 foot circle, to 
count 2. 

8. Chipping the Winner.— 
A stone being placed on the 
tee, and another with its in- 
ner edge 10 feet distant, just 
touching the central line, and 
half guarding the one on the 
tee, with its inner edge 
touching the central line, but 
on the opposite side from 
that on which the guard is placed. If the stone strikes the stone 
placed behind the tee, to count 1 ; if it strikes the stone on the tee, to 
count 2. 




OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 115 

y/*^ ^"NjPO V gj^-- 9. OM^it'icfcmgf.— In the event 

/^ ^ — ^^ of two or more competitors 

/ /^ w^ \ gaming- the same number of 

/ / ^2. \ I ^^^ sliots, they shall play for shots 

1 I y 1 at Ouiuyicking , that is, a stone 

\ \^ ^ I being placed with its inner 

\^ / edge 7 feet distant from the 

^"--~.,__-^ ■ tee, and its centre on a line, 

making an angle of 45® with 
the central line. If struck within or on the 7 foot circle, to count 1 ; 
if within or on the 4 foot circle, to count 2. If the competition can- 
not be decided with the shots, the \mipire shall order one or more of 
the preceding points to be played again by the competitors w^ho are 
equal. 



\ 



fENeiNS F^ULES 

— OK THE— 

/CMATEUR fENCERS' IsEjAGUE 



OF AMERICA. 



Adopted by the Amateur Athletic Union, March i, 1892, 



Adopted April 20, 1892 ; Revised May 2-.*, 1893, 



FOIL. 



1. The competition sliall be conducted by a jury of three or 
live experienced fencers, for each bout, who shall select a i-ef- 
eree from amongst their number, and whose decision shall be 
final and without appeal. 

2. The English language only shall be spoken by the judges 
during the competition. 

3. At the command of any of the judges, contestants must 
take the tirst position and lower their weapons. 

4. Each contestant shall fence a bout with every other con- 
testant. 

5. Each bout shall be for an aggregate of live (5) touches, 
each touch to count one point. 

6. Each judge, without consulting his fellow judges, m'\, 
award to each contestant In the bout a maxinmm of .50 of a 
point for defence, .50 of a point for attack, and .50 of a point 
for general good form, or any part thereof. The award shall 
be determined by the average of the points thus allowed by 
the judges. This method of judging is based upon the idea 
that the contest is intended ns an exhibition of skill as well as 
the Jiecurin''- of touches. 



OFFICIATE SPORTING RULES. ll7 

7. Touches shall count only when made upon the body, 
within the limits bounded by the collar of the fencing jacket, 
the median line, the hip, and a line drawn from the hip to the 
posterior limit of the armpit, around tlie front of the arm and 
along the crest of the shoulder to tlie collar, A touch on any 
of the boundary lines shall count. 

8. Whenever a touch is made outside the limits, and it is 
evident to the judges that it would have been good if the 
adversary had not made an illegitimate movement, it shall 
count. An illegitimate movement is one by which the adver- 
sary seeks to avoid a touch within the limits prescribed by 
purposely presenting some other part of his body to the 
point. 

9. A touch is of no value when the point is twisted on to the 
body after the slap of the foil. 

10. A touch, whether fair or foul, invalidates the riposte. 

11. The competitor attacked should parry; if a stop thrust 
be made it shall only count in favor of the giver, provided it 
be perceptir.ly in advance of the touch made by the attacking 
party. If both be touched simultaneously, the count shall be 
credited to the one who lunged. If both lunged, neither 
counts. 

12. The judges ww,9^ stop a corps-a-corps as soon as made. 

13. A disarmament is of no value. A touch immediately fol- 
lowing a disarmament counts. 

14. Each contestant shall fence v^ith the same hand through- 
out the bout. 

15. The contestant .scoring the highest aggregate of points 
shall be declared the winner, the next highest se<u)nd, and s«» 
on. 

16. A point scored from a thrust started with the en)Ow he- 
hind the body (jab thrusts) shall not count, 

17. Each competitor shall wear a dark fencing suit, so that 
the white chalk marks can be easily seen. 

18. Contestants shall fence within a marked space twenty 
feet long and thirty-six inches wide. Should any part of a 
contestant's foot extend beyond th3 boundary line, .50 point 
Bhall be deducted from his Hnal score for each offense. When 



118 OFFICIAL SPORTINO BTlLES. 

I. contestant oversteps a boundary line, the judges shall stop 
the bout and start the contestants again in the middle of the 
tuarked space . 
19. Foil blades shall not be more than 34 inches in length. 

DUELLING SWORD. 

1. The diameter of the boll guard shall not exceed 5 inches, 
and the blade shall not be more than 34 inches long. 

2. A touch on any part of the adversary counts, and the limi- 
tation of space shall not hold. 

3. There shall be no award for attack, defense or general 
good form. 

4. Each bout shall be for an aggregate of 3 touches. 

5. If both contestants are touched by simultaneous lunges, 
the judges shall deduct one-fourth of a point for each offense 

rom each contestant. 

6. Each competitor shall wear a dark fencing suit and dark 
gloves. 

SABRE. 

1. Sabre blades shall not be more than 33 inches long. 

2. The sabre competition shall be governed by the same 
rules as the foil competition, except that a cut or thrust on 
any part of the body above the hip shall count, and the limita- 
tion of space shall not hold. 



GAELIC FOOTBALL RULES. 



Sizp. of Ground— \. The ground for full teams (21 a side) shall be 
196 yards long by 140 yards broad, or as near that size as can be 
got. The ground must be properly marked by boundary lines. 
Boundary lines to be at least 5 yards from the fences. 

Note. — There is no objection to a larger ground, but no ground 
should be less than 140 yards long by 84 yards broad. 

Number of Men— 2. There shall not be less than 14 or more than 21 
players a side in regular matches. 

Game Officials— 3. The«"e shall be two umpires and a referee. Where 
the umpires disagree, th« referee's decision shall be final. There 
shall also be a goal umpire at each end of the ground to watch for 
goals and points. The referee shall keep the time, and throw up the 
ball at the commencement of each half time. 

Goals and Foinis. — 4. The goal-posts shall stand at each end, in 
center of the goal-line. They shall be 21 feet apart, with a cross-bar 8 
feet from the ground. Besides the goal-post, there shall be two up- 
right-posts standing in each goal-line 21 feet from the goal-posts. A 
goal is won when the ball is driven between the goal-posts and under 
the cross-bar. A point is counted when the ball is driven over the 
cross-bar, or over the goal-line within 21 feet of either goal-post. 

Choice of Sides— 5. The captains of the teams shall toss for choice 
of sides before commencing play, and the players shall stand in two 
ranks, opposite each other, in the center of the field until the ball is 
thrown up, each holding the hand of one of the other side. 

Foul Play— 6. Pushing from behind, butting with the head, tripp- 
ing and holding, shall be deemed foul; and the player so offending 
shall be ordered to stand aside for such time as the referee may think 
fit, and his side cannot substitute another man. The referee may also 



120 OFFICTATi RPOKTING EUIjES. 

allow a free kick, if he sees reason for it. If a player be hurt and un- 
able to play, through any breach of this rule, the referee shall allow 
his side to take in a man in his place. 

Time of Play— 7. The time of actual play shall be one hour (unless 
otherwise arranged), sides to be changed only at half time. 

General Rules— S. When a player drives a ball over the side line, 
it shall be thrown back from the point where it lirst crossed the line 
by a player on the opposite side. It may be thrown in any direction^ 
but the thrower must not play it himself until it has been touched by 
some other player. Neither goal nor point can be scored from a 
throw-in from the side lines, unless the ball be struck by some player 
after the throw-in, and before it crosses the goal-line. When the ball 
is driven over the goal-line, the goal-keeper shall have a free kick 
from goal ; no player on the opposite side ta approach nearer than 
the 21-yard line till the ball is kicked. No player of the kicker's side 
to be further out from his goal-line than the center of the ground, 
until the ball is kicked. If a ball that otherwise would not have 
crossed the line be driven over the cross-bar, or over any part of the 
goal-line outside the goal-posts by a player whose goal-line it is, the 
opposite side shall have a free kick 40 yards out from the goal-post. 

Decision of Oame—9. The match shall be decided by the greater 
number of goals ; when no goal is made, or when the goals are even, 
it shall be decided by the greater number of points. 

Striking the Ball— 10. The ball may be struck with the hand. It 
may be caught Avhen off the ground, and the player so catching it 
may kick it any way he pleases, but must not carry or throw it. 

Note.— There is nothing in this rule to prevent the player throw- 
ing the ball a little in front to allow himself more freedom in kick- 
ing it. 

Free Kicks— 11. Where the rules are broken, the referee may allow 
a free kick if he thinks fit. In all free kicks, the ball must be kicked 
from the ground ; no player on the opposite side to approach nearer 
than U yards until the ball is kicked; but if the free kick is al- 
lowed nearer than 14 yards off the goal-line, the opposite players 
need not stand behind that line. 



OPFIOIAIi SPORTING RULES. 121 

Out of Ptay— 12. If the ball strikes a bystander iiear.the side-line, 
except the referee or umpire, it shall be considered out of play, and 
must be thrown in as directed in Kule 8. If it occurs at the g-oal-Iine, 
It also shall be considered out of play, and must be kicked from the 
goal. In the latter case the referee may allow a point or joroal if 
lie considers that the ball would have passed through the goal 
or point space but for being stopped. 

Unfair Play-13. The umpires shall have, daring the match, full 
power t( disqualify any player, or order him to stand aside and dis- 
continue play, for any act they may consider unfair, as set down in 
Kule 6. 

14. Any player or players fouling another outside of the boundary 
lines shall be excluded from the game, for such time as the umpires 
deem proper. 

No nails or iron tips allowed on the boots. Strips of leather fas- 
tened on the boots will prevent slipping. 

The dress for football to be knee-breeches, stockings and shoes or 
boots. 

N. B.— The rules shall be read carefully. The referee of a laatcU 
should see they are observed to the letter. 




Associotior^ F^ootball. 



1. The limits of the ground shall be, maximum length, 200 yards; 
minimum length, 100 yards ; maximum breadth, 100 yards ; minimum 
breadth, 50 yards. The length and breadth shall be marked off with 
flags and touch line ; and a line defining 6 yards from the goal posts 
and 12 yards from the goal lines shall also be marked out. The 
center of the ground shall be indicated by a suitable mark, and a 



122 OFFICIAL SPORTING KUIiES. 

circle with a 10-yard radius shall be made round it. The goals shall 
be upright posts, 8 yards apart, Avith a bar across them, 8 feet from 
tlie ground. The average circumference of the Association ball shall 
be not less than 27 inches, and not more than 28 inches; and in inter- 
national matches, at the commencement of the game the weight of 
tlie ball shall be from 13 to 15 ounces. 

2. The winners of the toss shall have the option of kick-off, or 
choice of goals. The game shall be commenced by a place-kick from 
the center of the ground in the direction of the opposite goal -line; 
the other side shall not approach within 10 yards of the ball until it 
is kicked off, nor shall any player on either side pass the center of 
the ground in the direction of his opponents' goal until the ball is 
kicked off. 

3. Ends shall only be changed at half-time. After a goal is won 
tlie losing side shall kick off, but after the change of ends at half- 
time the bail shall be kicked off by the opr "^site side from that which 
originally did so; and always as provided in Rule 2. 

4. A goal shall be won when the ball has passed between the goal- 
posts under the bar, not being thrown, knocked on, or carried by 
any one of the attacking side. The ball hitting the goal or boundary 
posts, or goal-bar, and rebounding into play, is considered in play. 
The ball crossing the goal or touch-line, either on the ground or in 
the air, is out of play. 

5. When the ball is in touch, a player of the opposite side to that 
which kicked it out shall throw it in from the point on the boundary 
line where it left the ground. The thrower facing the field of play 
shall throw the ball over his head with both hands in any direction, 
and it shall be in play when thrown in. The thrower shall not play 
until the ball has been played by another player. 

6. When a player kicks the ball, or throws it in from touch, any 
one of the same side who at such moment of kicking or throwing is 
nearer to the opponents' goal-line is out of play, and may not touch 
the ball himself, or in any way whatever prevent any other player 
from doing so, until the ball has been played, unless there are at such 
moment of kicking or throwing at least three of his opponents 
nearer their own goal-line; but no player is out of play in case of a 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 123 

corner kick, or when the ball is kicked off from goal, or when it has 
been last played by an opponent. 

7. When the ball is played behind the goal-line by one of the oppo- 
site side, it shall be kicked off by any one of the players behind 
whose goal-line it went, within 6 yards of the goal-post nearest the 
point where the ball left the field of play; but, if played behind by 
any one of the side whose goal-line it is, a player of the opposite side 
shall kick it from within one yard of the nearest corner flag-post. 
In either case no opponent shall be allowed within 6 yards of the 
ball until it is kicked off. 

8. No player shall carry, knock on, or handle the ball under any 
pretence whatever, except in the case of the goal-keeper, who, within 
his own half of the ground, shall be allowed to use his hands in 
defense of his goal, either by knocking on or throwing, but not carry- 
ing the ball. The goal-keeper may be changed during the game, but 
not more than one player shall act as goal-keeper at the same time, 
and no second player shall step in and ict during any period in which 
the regular goal-keeper may have vacated his position. 

9. In no case shall a goal be scored from any free kick — except as 
provided in Rule 13— nor shall the ball be again played by the kicker 
until it has been played by anol her player. The kick-off, corner-flag 
kick and goal kick, shall be free kicks within the meaning of this 
rule. 

10. Neither tripping, hacking, nor jumping at a player shall be 
allowed, and no player shall use his hands to hold or push his adver- 
sary. No player may charge an opponent from behind, unless such 
opponent be not only facing his own goal, but is, in the opinion of 
the referee, wilfully impeding his adversary while in that position. 

11. No player shall wear any nails, excepting such as have their 
heads driven in flush with the leather, or iron plates, or gutta percha. 
on the soles or heels of his boots, or on his shin guards. If bars or 
studs on the soles or heels of the boots are used, they shall not pro- 
ject more than half an inch, and shall have all their fastenings driven 
in flush with the leather. Bars should be transverse and flat, not 
less than one and a half inches in length, and half an inch in width . 
Studs shall be round in plan, not less than half an inch in diameter, 
and in no case conical or pointed. Any playpu discovered infringing 



124 OFFICIAL SPOETING EUIiBS. 

this rule shall be prohibited from taking further part in the 
match. 

12. A referee shall be appointed, whose duties shall be to enforce 
the rules and decide all disputed points. He shall also keep a record 
of the game and act as timekeeper; and, in the event of any ungen- 
.tlemanly behavior on the part of any of the contestants, the offender 
or offenders shall be cautioned, and if the offence is repeated, or in 
case of violent conduct, vrithout any previous caution, the referee 
shall have power to rule the offending player or players out of play, 
and shall transmit the name or names of such player or players to 
his or their association, in whom shall be solely vested the right of 
accepting an apology. The referee shall have power to terminate 
the game whenever, by reason of darkness, interference by specta- 
tors, or other cause, he shall think fit, and he shall report the same 
to the association nnder whose jurisdiction the match was played, 
who shall have full power to deal with the matter. Two linesmen 
shall be appointed, whose duty— subject to the decision of the ref- 
eree—shall be to decide when the ball is out of play, and which side 
is entitled to the corner-flag kick, goal kick, or throw-in. Any undue 
interference by a linesman shall be reported by the referee to the 
association to which the linesman belongs, who shall deal with the 
matter in such manner as they may deem necessary. The referee 
shall have power to award a free kick without any appeal in any case 
where he thinks that the conduct of a player is dangerous, or likely 
to prove dangerous, but not sufficiently so as to justify him in put- 
ting in force the greater powers vested in him as above. 

13, If any player shall intentionally trip any opposing player, or 
deliberately handle the ball, within 12 yards from his own goal-line, 
the refeiee shall, on appeal, award the opposing side a penalty kick, 
to be taken from any point 12 yards from the goal-line, under the fol- 
loAving conditions : All players, with the exception of the player tak- 
ing the penalty kick and the opposing goal-keeper (who shall not ad- 
vance more than 6 yards from the goal-line), shall stand at least 6 
yards from behind the ball. The ball shall be in play when the kick 
is taken, and a goal may be scored from the penalty kick. 

14. In the event of an appeal for any supposed infringement oC the 
rules, the ball shall be in play until a decision has been given. 



OFPICIAIi SPORTING RULES. 125 

15 Tlie referee shall have power to stop the game for such a time 
as he may think fit,, whenever he may deem it necessary to do so. 

16. In the event of any temporary suspension of play from any 
cause, the ball not having gone into touch, or behind the goal-line, 
the game shall be restarted by the referee throwing up the ball at 
the spot where play was suspended, and the players on either side 
shall not play the ball until it has touched the ground. 

17. In the event of any infringement of Kules 2, 5, 6, 8, 0, 10 or 16, a 
free kick shall be forfeited to the opposite side, from the spot where 
the infringement took place. 

DEFINITION OF TEEMS. 

A Place Kick is a kick at the ball while it is on the ground, in any 
position in which the kicker may choose to place it. 

A Free Kick is a kick at the ball in any direction the player pleases, 
when it is lyiiig on the ground, none of the kicker's opponents being 
allowed within 6 yards of the ball, unless they be standing on their 
own goal-line. The ball must at least be rolled over before it shall 
be considered played. 

Hacking is kicking an adversary intentionally. 
Tripping is throwing, or attempting to throw, an adversary bj^ the 
use of the legs, or by stooping in front of or behind him. 

Knocking on m v7\\Qn a player strikes or propels the ball with his 
hands or arms. 

Holding includes the obstruction of a player by tlie hand or any 
part of the arm extending from the body. 

Handling is understood to be playing the ball with the hand or 
arm. 

Touch IS that part of the held, on either side of the ground, which 
is beyond the line of play. 

Carrying is taking more than two steps while holding the ball. 



GYMNASTIC RULES 

OF THE 

Amateur Athletic Union 



HORIZONTAL BAR, PAIIALLKL BARS, FLYING RINGS 

VAULTING HORSE (SIDE AND REAR) AND 

CLUB SWINGING. 

1. The competition shall be conducted by a jury com- 
posed of three judges, whose decisions shall be final and 
without appeal. 

2. The judges must place themselves upon both sides 
of the contestants, in order to observe their general 
form. 

3. The contestants shall draw lots and then perform 
in rotation. 

4. Each competitor shall perform three exercises of 
his own selection or combination. 

5. Except in case of accident to the apparatusno 
second trials shall be allowed. 

6. The judges shall mark, each for himself, in a ratio 
to five i>oints for a perfect performance, taking into 
consideration: 1. The difficulty of the exercise. 2. The 
beauty of the combination and its execution. 3. The 
general form of the contestant. 

7. The winner of the comr.etition shall be the one 
having obtained the highest aggregate number of 
points, next highest socoml, and so on. 

INDIAN CLUB SWINGING. 

Clubs weighing three pounds each shall be used, and 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING RULES. 127 

each contestant be allowed five minutes for a perform- 
ance. 

ROPE CLIMBING. 

1. The rope, measured from the floor to a tambourine 
or bell fastened above, shall be as nearly twenty-five 
feet as the height of the hall will allow. 

2. The start shall be by a pistol shot, and the time 
taken when the contestant strikes the bell or tam- 
bourine. 

3. Each contestant shall sit on the floor, with legs ex 
tended in front, and shall not touch the floor with any 
part of his person after the pistol shot. 

4. Each contestant shall be allowed three trials. 



RULES FOR THE GAME OF GOLF, 

AS PliAYED BY 

The Koyal and Ancient Golf Club of St. Andrews. 

1. The game of golf is played by two or more sides, each playing: 
its own ball. A side may consist of one or more persons. 

2. The game consists in each side playing a ball from a tee into a 
hole by successive strokes, and the hole is won by the side holing its 
ball in the fewest strokes, except as otherwise provided for in the 
rules. If two sides hole out in the same number of strokes, the hole 
is halved. 

3. The teeing-ground shall be indicated by two marks placed in a 
line at right angles to the course, and the player shall not tee in 
front of, nor on either side of, these marks, nor more than two club 
lengths behind them. A ball played from outside the limits of the 
teeing-ground, as thus defined, may be recalled by the opposite side. 

The holes shall be 4^ inches in diameter, and at least 4 inches 
deep. 

4. The ball must be fairly struck at, and not pushed scraped or 
spooned, under penalty of the loss of the hole. Any movement of 
the club which is intended to strike the ball is a stroke. 

5. The game commences by each side playing a ball from the first 
teeing-ground. In a match with two or more on a side, the partners 
shall strike off alternately from the tees, and shall strike alternately 
during the play of the hole. 

The players who are to strike against each other shall be named at 
starting, and shall continue in the same order during the match. 

The player who shall play first on eacii side shall be named by his 
own side. 

In case of failure to agree, it shall be settled by lot or toss which 
side shall have the option of leading. 

6. If a player shall play when his partner should have done so, his 
side shall lose the hole, except in the case of the tee shot, when the 
sLroke may be recalled at the option of the opponents. 



OFFICIAL SPOUTING RULES. 129 

7. The side winning a hole shall lead in starting for the next hole, 
and may recall the opponent's stroke should he play out of order. 
This privilege is called the "honor." On starting for a new match, 
the winner of the long match in the previous round is entitled to the 
"honor." Should the first match have been halved, the winner of 
the last hole gained is entitled to the "honor." 

8. One round of the links— generally 18 holes— is a match, unless 
otherwise agreed upon. The match is won by the side which gets 
more holes ahead than there remains holes to be plaj^ed, or by the 
side winning the last hole when the match was all even at the second 
last hole. If both sides have won the same number it is a half 
match. 

9. After the balls are struck from the tee, the ball farthest from 
the hole to which the parties are playing shall be played first, except 
as otherwise provided for in the rules. Should the wrong side play 
first the opponent may recall the stroke before his side has played. 

10. Unless with the opponent's consent, a ball struck from the tee 
shall not be changed, touched or moved before the hole is played out, 
under the penalty of one stroke, except as otherwise provided for in 
the rules. 

11. In playing through the green, all loose impediments, within a 
club's length of a ball which is not lying in or touching a hazard, 
may be removed, but loose impediments which aie more than a 
club's length from the ball shall not be removed under the penalty of 
one stroke. 

12. Before striking at the ball, the player shall not move, bend or 
break anything fixed or growing near the ball, except in the act of 
placing his feet on the ground forthe purpose of addressing the ball, 
and in soiling his club to address the ball, under the penalty of the 
loss of the hole, except as provided for in Rule 18. 

13. A ball stuck fast in wet ground or sand may be taken out and 
replaced loosely in the hole which it has made. 

14. When a ball lies in or touches a hazard, the club shall not touch 
the ground, nor shall anything be touched or moved before the player 
strikes at the ball, except that the player may place his feet firmly 
on the ground for the purpose of addressing the ball, under the 
penalty of the loss of the hole. 

15. A "hazard" shall be any bunker of whatever nature: water, 
sand, loose earth, molehills, paths, roads or railways, whins, bushes, 
rushes, rabbit scrapes, fences, ditches, or anything which is not the 



130 OFFICIAL. JSPOKTING BUIiES, 

the ordinary green of the course, except sand blown on to the grass 
by wind, or sprinicled on grass for the preservation of the links, or 
snow or ice, or bare patches on the course. 

16. A player or a player's caddie shall not press down or remove 
any irregularities of surface near the ball, except at the teeing- 
grourvd, under the penalty of the loss of the hole. 

17. If any vessel, wheel-barrow, tool, roller, grass-cutter, box, or 
other similar obstruction has been placed upon the course, such 
obstruction may be removed. A ball lying on or touching such 
obstvuction, or on clothes, or nets, or on ground under repair or tem- 
porarily covered up or opened, may be lifted and dropped at the 
nea'-est point of the course, but a ball lifted in a hazard shall be 
dropped in the hazard. A ball lying in a golf hole or flag hole, may 
be lifted and dropped not more than a club's length behind such hole. 

IH. When a ball is complete,y covered with fog, bent, whins, etc., 
on'y so much thereof shall be set aside as that the player shall have 
a \ iew of his ball before he plays, whether in a line with the hole or 
otherwise. 

19. When a ball is to be dropped, the player shall drop it. He shall 
front the hole, stand erect behind the hazard, keep the spot from 
which the ball was lifted (or in the case of running water, the spot at 
which it entered) in a line between him and the hole, and drop the 
ba)l behind him from his head, standing as far behind tl-e hazard as 
he may please. 

20. When the balls in play lie within six inches of each other — 
measured from their earnest points — the ball nearer the hole shall be 
lifted until the other is played, and shall then be replaced as nearly 
as possible in its original position. Should the ball farther from the 
hole be accidentally moved in so doing, it shall be replaced. Should 
the lie of the lifted ball be altered by the opponent in playing, it may 
be placed in a lie near to, and as nearly as possible similar to, that 
from which it was lifted. 

21. If the ball lie or be lost in water, the player may drop a ball, 
under the penalty of one stroke. 

22. Whatever happens by accident to a ball in motion, such as its 
being deflected or stopped by any agency outside the match, or by 
the forecaddie, is a "rub of the green," and the ball shall be played 
from where it lies. Should a ball lodge in anything: moving, such 
ball, or if it cannot be recovered, another ball shall be dropped as 
nearly as possible at the spot where the object was when the ball 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 131 

lodged in it. But if a ball at rest be displaced by any agency outside 
the match, the player shall drop it or another ball as nearly as pos- 
sible at the spot where it lay. On the putting-green the ball may be 
replaced by hand. 

23. If the player's ball strike, or be accidentally moved by an oppo- 
nent, or an opponent's caddie or dubs, the opponent loses the hole. 

24. If the player's ball strike, or be stopped by himself or his part- 
ner, or either of their caddies or clubs, or if, while in the act of play- 
ing, the player strike the ball twice, his side loses the hole. 

25. If the player, when not making a stroke, or his partner or 
either of their caddies touch their side's ball, except at the tee, so as 
to move it, or by touching anything cause it to move, the penalty is 
one stroke. 

26. A ball is considered to have been moved if it leave its original 
position in the least degree and stop in another; but if a player touch 
his ball and thereby cause it to oscillate, without causing it to leave 
its original position, it is not moved in the sense of Kule 25. 

27. A player's side loses a stroke if he play the opponent's ball, 
unless (1) the opponent then play the player's ball, whereby the 
penalty is canceled, and the hole must be played out with the balls 
thus exchanged, or (2) the mistake occur through wrong information 
given by the opponent, in which case the mistake, *if discovered 
before the opponent has played, must be rectified by placing a ball 
as nearly as possible where the opponent's ball lay. 

If it be discovered before either side has struck off at the tee that 
one side has played out the previous hole with the ball of a party not 
engaged in the match, that side loses that hole. 

28. If a ball be lost, the player's side loses the hole. A ball shall be 
held as lost if it be not found within five minutes after the search 
is begun. 

29. A ball must be played wherever it lies, or the hole be given up, 
except as otherwise provided for in the Rules. 

30. The term "putting-green" shall mean the ground within 20 
yards of the hole, excepting hazaids. 

31. All loose impediments may be removed from the putting-green, 
except the opponent's ball when at a greater distance from the play- 
er's than six inches. 

32. In a match of three or more sides, a ball in any degree lying 
between the player and the hole must be lifted, or, if on the putting- 
green, holed out. 



132 OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 

33. When the ball is on the putting-green, no mark shall be placed, 
nor line drawn as a guide. The line to tlie hole may be pointed out, 
but the person doing so may not touch the ground with the hand or 
club. 

The player may have his own or his partner's caddie to stand at 
the hole, but none of the players or their caddies may move so as to 
shield the ball from, or expose it to, the wind. 

The penalty for any breach of this rule is the loss of the hole. 

34. The player, or his caddie, may remove (but not press down ) 
sand, earth, worm casts or snow lying around the hole or on the line 
of his putt. This shall be done by brushing lightly, with the hand 
only across the putt and not along it. Dung may be removed to a 
side by an iron club, but the club must not be laid with more than 
its own v^eight upon the ground. The putting line must not be 
touched by the club, hand or foot, except as above authorized, or im- 
mediately in front of the ball in the act of addressing it, under the 
penalty of the loss of the hole. 

35. Either side is entitled to have the flag-stick removed when ap- 
proaching the hole. If the ball rest against the flag-stick when in 
the hole, the player shall be entitled to remove the stick, and if the 
ball fall in, it shall be considered as holed out in the previous stroke. 

36. A player shall not play until the opponent's ball shall have 
ceased to roll, under the penalty of one stroke. Should the player's 
ball knock in the opponent's ball, the latter shall be counted as holed 
out in the previous stroke. If, in playing, the player's ball displace 
the opponent's ball, the opponent shall have the option of re- 
placing it. 

37. A player shall not ask for advice, nor be knowingly advised 
about the game by word, look or^ gesture from any one except his 
own caddie, or his partner or partner's caddie, under the penalty of 
the loss of the hole. 

38. If a ball split into separate pieces, another ball may be put 
down where the largest portion lies, or if two pieces are apparently 
of equal size, it may be put where either piece lies, at the option of 
the player. If a ball crack or become implayable, the player may 
change it, on intimating to his opponent his intention to do so. 

39. A penalty stroke shall not be counted the stroke of a player, 
and shall not affect the rotation of play. 

40. Should any dispute aiise on any point, the players have the 
right of determining the party or parties to whom the dispute shall 



OFFIOIAIj sporting RUIiES. 133 

be referred, but should they not agree, either party may refer it to 
the Green Committee of the green where the dispute occurs, and 
their decision shall be final. Should the dispute not be covered by 
the rules of golf, the arbiters must decide it by equity. 

SPECIAL RULES FOR MEDAb PbAY. 

1. In club competitions, the competitor doing the stipulated course 
in the fewest strokes shall jje the winner. 

2. If the lowest score be made by two or more competitors, the ties 
shall be decided by another round to be played either on the same or 
on any other day as the captain, or, in his absence, the secretary 
shatl direct. 

3. New holes shall be made for the medal round, and thereafter no 
member shall play any stroke on a putting-green before competing. 

4. The scores shall be kept by a special marker, or by the competi- 
tors noting each other's scores. The scores marked shall be checked 
at the finish of each hole. On completion of the course, the score of 
the player shall be signed by the person keeping the score and 
handed to the secretary. 

5. If a ball be lost, the player shall return as nearly as possible to 
the spot where the ball was struck, tee another ball and lose a 
stroke. If the lost ball be found before he has struck the other ball, 
the first shall continue in play. 

6. If the player's ball strike himself, or his clubs or caddie, or if, in 
the act of playing, the player strike the ball twice, the penalty shall 
be one stroke. 

7. If a competitor's ball strike the other player, or his clubs or 
caddie, it is a "rub of the green," and the ball shall be played from 
where it lies. 

8. A ball may, under a penalty of two strokes, be lifted out of a 
diflticulty of any description, and be teed behind same. 

9. All balls shall be holed out, and when play is on the putting- 
green, the flag shall be removed, and the competitor whose ball is 
nearest the hole shall have the option of holing out first, or of lifting 
his ball, if it be in such a position that it might, if left, give an ad- 
vantage to the other competitor. Throughout the green a competi- 
tor can have the other competitor's ball lifted, if he find that it in- 
terferes with his stroke. 



AND 

E^X F» U>5s. N ^^T I O W S. 



Twenty-one aces shall constitute a game. 

An ace is when a server sends the ball to any part of the outer court 
beyond the aco line, and it is not returned to the front wall by an op- 
ponent. All balls must be recoverd on the first bound after reaching 
the floor. That is, a ball can take the circuit of the four walls before 
it can be termed returnable. The service is considered to be very 
difficult when the ball, after hitting the front wall, takes in either the 
side walls on a fly, bounds on the floor, an A then comes off the back 
wall; or after hitting one side wall bounds from the floor to tLe back 
wall, and thence to the other side wall. The great trouble in recover- 
ing these balls is that the force of their flight is expended when they 
come in contact with the last wall, and, therefore, drop dead to the 
floor. If the ball is returned to the front wall the server must re- 
cover it, either on the fly or flrst bound ; if he fails the hand is out, 
and his opponent becomes a server. It is allowable to serve at either 
side of the court, but always within the two parallel lines. Stepping 
beyond the inner line twice in succession, or hitting either side wall, 
roof or floor before striking the front wall, or serving three short 
balls in succession, shall cause the loss of a hand. 

A low sharp service that can be placed at a side angle of the court 
without any rise to the ball, or sent to the extreme outside corners, 
is particularly destructive. Then there are the "Scotch twist," a high 
service that sends the ball around the court in an irritating fashion, 
and a towering ball, that does not commence to drop until reaching 
the corners, and then continues its fall close to the wall. There are 
a few players, but they can be counted upon one's Angers, who can 
serve the ball to the right and left without changing their position. 
This requires a great deal of skill and experience, but it can be done 
effectively, and should be seen oftener in practice. 

The ball shall be 1% inches in diameter and 1% ounces in weight. 



OPPIOTATj sporting RUIiES. 135 

The briliianey of the game depends as much upon a good ball as a 
good pair of hands. An improperly made ball is discouraging to an 
expert; in fact, no one who has any regard for the safety of his hands, 
should indulge in the game without first testing the quality of the 
little sphere. While no general regulations have ever existed in re- 
gard to this matter, the Brooklyn Handball Club, the leading organi- 
z ition of the kind in the world, has adopted a standard ball which is 
recognized at all the prominent courts in America as the best for all 
purposes. It is constructed with as much care as the Spalding regu- 
lation baseball, or the standard cricket ball of England. The founda- 
tion is laid with a round bit of cork or solid rubber. That is 
wrapped with a thin strip of rubber, upon the top of which is 
rolled yarn of the finest character. The covering is of horsehide, 
neatly stitched. A great deal depends on the strength of the 
wrapping whether the ball will be lively, or just moderately so. 
Some players like plenty of life in the ball, some admire a hard dead 
ball, while men like Casey, Dunne, Courtney and other leading ex- 
perts prefer a well made ball above anything else, one neither too 
hard nor too soft, but with a true and fairly lively bound. There is a 
great deal of time and labor expended in perfecting these little 
globes, and those of the best make are sold for $1 a piece. 

The Irish ball, as a general rule, differs considerably from the one 
used in America. They are smaller, and not near as much attention 
paid to the composition or finish. The harder the ball, the better an 
Irish expert likes it. As he depends chietly upon service for his suc- 
cess, he wants a ball that will fairly batter down a front wall. That 
is the reason while seven-eighths of the players in Ireland at the 
present time object to the American style of playing the game and 
adopting their ball. Take the service away from them, and you de- 
stroy all the effects of their playing. 

In a four-handed match, parties winning the toss are allowed only 
one hand at the commencement. The server's partner shall stand 
inside of the ace line, with his back to either the right or left wall, 
until the service ball strikes the front wall. All balls striking an 
opponent shall be a hinder. 

The server's partner and one ot the opponents generally stand side 
by side against the left hand wall, if the service is from the right. 



136 



OFFI(;iAIi SPOETTNG KTTLES. 



The recoveier is on the alert in the outer court the same as in a 
single-handed game. It is not compulsory, however, that the op- 
ponent of the server's partner shall stand just outside^of the ace line. 
He can go in the outer court and help his partner to recover service, 
but he may be more useful at the line, particularly to take all line 
service to the left on the fly. This is a very important position 
against a heavy server, because in a majority of instances it results 
in the disposing of the hand. 

A hinder is when a ball strikes your opponent and retards it from 
reaching the front wall. For instance, if the recoverer of service 
should strike either of his opponents with the ball on the way to its 
destination, it is termed a hinder. If said recoverer, however, strikes 
his partner instead of an opponent, it is an ace against him. Then 
again, if the server should be hit by his partner's ball it is a hand 
out. A great many of these hindrances are accidents pure and sim- 
ple, but in some instances they can be avoided, and, if in the opinion 
of the referee the hinder was intentional, an ace can be counted 
against the side committing it, or a hand be declared out just as the 
case may be. A server at work frequently hits his partner while 
standing within the ace line ; this is also called a hinder. If a ball 
from a server strikes either of his opponents, before or after bound- 
ing, it becomes non-playable and is counted an ace. 

When a ball from the server drops anywhere inside of the ace line, 
the player has the privilege of using his hand or foot; if the hand is 
used, it counts the same as if it was served regularly over the line; 
if the foot, the striker or his partner has the privilege of stopping 
the ball before it reaches the front wall. If the ball after being 
struck with the foot gets to the front wall, the striker or his partner 
!:hall have to return it before stopping it. 

The use of the foot is not very frequent, and is not considered to 
be at all scientiflc. There is considerable talk of barring the play 
altogether. It is claimed that it would b6 difficult as well as danger- 
ous to cultivate the style, and what effectiveness could be reached, 
would be more than offset by injuries to players. 

Only one hand shall be used in striking the ball, otherwise a foul is 
committed, and the punishment is the loss of a hand or an ace. 



OFFICIAL. SPORTING RULES. 137 

'After a server and partner shall have been retired, they must be 
allowed sufficient time to take their positions in the outer eourt. 

All claims shall be decided by the referee, whose decisions are liual. 

This is one of the most interesting- features connected with the 
game as it is played in America. If there is a single-handed or 
d<Kible-handed match, a man is usually selected for referee who has 
the entire confidence of the principals and spectators, and strange to 
say that in all the important contests within the experience of the 
writer, it has never been a difficult matter to agree upon that official. 
And his labors are very exacting, too, and without he makes himself 
master of the situation at once, he will be in a far worse position 
than the poor umpire on a baseball field. But, a conflict between a 
]iandball player and a referee rarely occurs. If an appeal is made by 
a player, and sometimes it is done very vigorously, the referee gener- 
ally decides the point quickly and with such flrmness that convinces 
the player, that to dispute the decision would be useless and costly. 
The referee has the power to inflict various punishments upon those 
who violate the playing rules, and obedience to that official is con- 
sidered to be imperative. 

While not being covered by the rules, it is incumbent upon each 
and every man to make as neat appearance as possible while in the 
court. This is carried out in almost every instance, and in no other 
athletic exercise is this feature so strictly observed. Twenty years 
ago men could play under any conditions— bare feet was a favorite 
with many, while in otlier instances scanty attire prevailed. If a 
man were to appear under these circumstances at the present time 
he would soon be told that he was not wanted. Most of the clubs in 
America has special uniforms, the Brooklyn Handball Club being the 
the first to establish such a proceeding. 



MITTCH AND KICK. 



The Field Judges shall decide the height at which the tam- 
bourine shall be placed, and shall regulate the succeeding ele- 
vations. 

Each competitor shall be allowed three trials at each height, 
and if on the third trial he shall fail, he shall be declared out 
of the competition. 

Competitors shall compete in order as placed in the pro- 
gramme ; then those failing, if any, shall have their second 
trial jump in a like order, after which those having failed 
twice shall make their third trial jump. 

Touching the tambourine with foot or any part of the leg 
below the knee, counts as a fair kick and nothing else. 

Springing and kicking without touching the object kicked 
at counts as a try, and must be recorded as one of the three 
trials. 

The distance of the run shall be unlimited. 

A competitor may decline at any height in his turn, and, by 
so doing, forfeits his right to again jump at the height de- 
clined. 

The contestants must spring, kick and alight on the same 
foot. 

The tambourine shall not be more than a foot in diameter. 



Rules of Hockey. 



1. The game is played with wliite, self-inflatiiig india-rubber balls, 
and light ash sticks with a crook at one end. The stick must not ex- 
ceed 34 inches in length, nor AX ounces in weight, and the crook 
must not be more than 4 inches long. The ball must not exceed 1% 
inches in diameter, nor 1 ounce in weight. 

2. The ground on which the game is played should be rectangular 
—about 125 yards long by about 54 yards wide. 

3. In the centre of each end of the ground, goals, such as are used 
for football, should be placed— posts 11 feet high, 18 feet apart, with 
a cross bar 10 feet from the ground. 

4. The object of the game is to strike the ball with the hockey 
stick, so as to make it pass between the goal-posts, under the cross- 
])ar, and touch the ground behind the goal. 

5. A line passing through the two goal posts, and at right angles 
to a line joining the centres of the two goals, shall be marked and 
called the goal-line . 

6. In front of each goal, and 60 feet from_the same, shall be drawn 
a line parallel to the goal-line and called the base-line. 

7. The number of players on each side shall be 15. 

8. The captains of the respective sides shall toss up before the com- 
mencement of the match, and the winner of the toss shall have the 
right to choose goal or hit-olT. 

9. No player is allowed to come between the base-line and goal- 
line of his opponent, unless the ball be there and be in play. 

10. The ball is not in play until it has been hit-off, wiiich may be 
done from any point behind the base-line. 

11. The ball ceases to be in play as soon as it has passed the side, 
or touch boundary or goal-line. 



140 OFl'ICIAIi SPOBTING EUIiES. 

12. If the ball goes into touch {L e. crosses the touch-line), the flrst 
player who touches it with his hand must bring it to the spot where 
it crossed the touch-line, and either (1) throw it out from that spot in 
a direction at right angles to the touch-line, or (2) place it on the 
ground at that spot, and strike it with his stick in any direction he 
pleases. As soon, however, as the ball is placed on the ground it is 
in play, and may be struck by any player. 

13. When the ball is in touch it may be struck with the hockey 
stick or kicked. 

U. When the ball has been struck behind the goal-line belonging 
to one side, and the player of the opposing side is the first to touch 
the ball with his hand he shall have the right to hit out— i. e. he shall 
bring the ball to the point where it crossed the goal-line, and from 
thence hit it out in any direction he pleases, provided that all the 
other players of his side be beyond the base-line at the moment of 
his placing the ball on the ground, and remain there until the ball is 
struck. As soon as the hockey stick touches the ball it is in play ; 
but until it does so no player of the defending side shall go beyond 
a line through the nearer goal-post at right angles to the goal-line, 
or outside the base-line. 

15. The goal-keeper may stop the ball in any way he pleases; but 
he must not hold the ball, or throw it, or strike it with anything but 
Ills hockey stick, and that in a direction from his right hand to his 
left. 

16. A player may only strike the ball with his hockey stick, and 
that in a direction from his right to his left. 

17. To be in such a position that you canr^ot lawfully strike the ball 
is to be "off side.'' 

18. A player may stop the ball with his hockey stick, held verti- 
cally in front of him, or on his right side; but if he strike the ball 
from his left hand to his right, or stop the ball intentionally with 
any part of his person, or intentionally or unintentionally with any 
part above the knee, he shall be at once pronounced "off-side," and 



OFFICIAL SPORTING EULES. 14l 

may not hit the ball again until one of the opposing side has done so. 

19. If "off side" having been cried, the penalty for it be disre- 
garded, the opposite party have a right to a "free hit," the ball 
being placed on the ground where the free hit occurred, and none of 
the side at fault coming nearer than ten paces to the ball until it is 
in play. 

20. The free hitter must be named by his captain. 

21. As soon as the ball has been touched by the hockey stick of the 
free hitter it is in play, but not until then. 

22. A free hit must be claimed at once, and cannot bo allowed if 
touched twice by any player or players belonging to the side claim- 
ing the free hit. 

23. No player may catch, or hold, (n- throw, or carry the ball; nor 
may he push the ball before him with his stick, or hook it towards 
him, except in a direction from his right hand to his left. 

24. A player cannot Avin a goal by a hit oiT side until the ball has 
been struck at least twice by a player or players belonging to the 
side opposed to the " off sider." 

25. A player cannot win a goal by making the ball rebound off his 
own person, or off that of any player of his own side; but he may 
lose a goal by so doing. 

26. A player cannot lose a goal by making the ball rebound off the 
person of an adversary ; but he may win a goal by so doing. 

27. If, after the ball has been properly hit through the goal-posts, 
it be struck back by a player or caught by the goal-keeper, before it 
touches the ground behind the goal, no goal shall be counted as won, 
and the ball shall be hit off again as at the commencement of the 
game. 

28. Whenever a goal shall have been obtained, the side whi(^h has 
lost the goal shall then hit off. 

29. Goals shall be changed at half-time. 

30. No shinning or striking players with hockey sticks shall be 
lawful. 



^*^ OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

31. No player may hold, or trip up, or push another player with his 
liands; and no player may hold or obstruct the hockey stick of 
another, except with his own hockey stick. 

32. All disputes should be referred at once to the captain, who 
shall have the sole and entire right to settle them as he thinks tit, 
as far as the then match is concerned. 



LACROSSE RULES 

— OK THE — 

jOcMATEUR/cTHLETIC UNION 



bAWS OF LACROSSE. 



RULE I. 

THE CROSSE. 

Seotion 1 . The crosse may be of any length to suit the player ; 
woven with catgut, which must not be bagged, ("Catgut" is 
intended to mean raw-hide, gut or clock strings ; not cord or 
soft leather.) The netting must be flat when the ball is not on 
it. In its widest part the crosse shall not exceed one foot. A 
string must be brought through a hole at the side of the tip of 
the turn, to prevent the point of the stick catching an oppo- 
nent's crosse. A leading string resting upon the top of the 
stick may be used, but must not be fastened, so as to form a 
pocket, lower down the stick than the end of the length strings. 
The length strings must be woven to within two inches of 
their termination, so that the ball cannot catch in the meshes. 
No metal of any kind cr in any shape shall be used upon the 
crosse. Splices must be made either with string or gut. A 
"bumper" may be used at lower end of netting to nrevent the 
ball from catching there, but must not be so formed or 
attached thereto, that it will hold the ball or interfere with 
its free passage up or down the netting. 



1^ OFFICIAL SPOKTING KULES. 

liULE II. 

THE BALL. 

Section 1. The ball shall be of India rubber sponge, size No. 
40, manufactured by the New York Eubber Company. Before 
every game the home team shall furnish four new balls to the 
Keferee. As often as the Eeferee declares the ball in play to 
be lost a spare ball shall be placed in play, and the home team 
shall furnish another ball to the Referee, so that he shall 
always have a spare ball in his possession. 

RULE III. 

THE GOALS. 

Section 1. The goal shall consist of two flag poles, 6 feet in 
length above tlie ground, including any top ornament, and 6 
feet apart. The goals shall be not more than 125 yards apart 
and not less than 100 yards, and in positions agreed upon by 
the Captains of the teams. In games they must be furnished 
oy the home team. 

RULE IV. 

THE GOAL CKEASE. 

Section 1. The goal crease shall be in the form of a square 
whose sides shall be 12 feet. The goal posts shall be on a line 
drawn across the square, 6 feet from either end, each post be- 
ing 3 feet from the respective sides. No attacking player shall 
be allowed within this crease. When the ball has passed the 
goal posts, players may cross over the crease, however, but in 
no case shall they remain in the crease, 

RULE V. 

THE TEAMS. 

Section 1. Twelve players shall constitute a full team, who 
shall be regular members in good standing of the club they 
represent. No player shall be allowed to change clubs during 
the season. 

Sec. 2. Every club which enters a team for the championship 
shall furnish to the Chairman of A, A. U. Lacrosse Committee 



OmOIAIi SPOKTING KUIjES. 145 

not later than two weeks before the date fixed for beginning' 
championiship series, a list of its players, not exceeding 25 In 
number. No player other than those so named shall be eligi- 
ble to compete for the championship, and any team which is 
found guilty of using a player or players not on its list shall 
forfeit to its opponents all games in which such player or 
players took part. 

Sec. 3. Should one team be deficient in the number of players. 
at the time fixed for starting a game, Lheir opponents may 
cither limit their own number, to equalize the sides, or compel 
the other team to play short-handed. 

Sec. 4 Should any player be injured or taken ill during a 
game, and be compelled lo leave the held, the opposite side 
shall drop a man to equalize the teams. In the event of any 
dispute between the Field Captains as to the injured player's 
(itnoss to continue the game, the matter shall at once be 
decided by the Keferee. 

Sec. 5. No change of players must be made after a game has 
commenced, except for reasons of illness or injury during the 
game. In the event of a game being postponed and resumed 
where left off, there shall be no change of players on either 
team, except by mutual consent of the competing clubs. 

Sec. 6. No Indian or professional shall be allowed to play in 
the team of any club competing for A. A. U. championship. 

EULE VI. 

CAPTAINS. 

Section 1. Captains to superintend the play shall be ap- 
pointed by each side previous to the commencement of a 
match. They shall be members of the club by whom they are 
appointed, and no other. I'Hiey may or may not be players in 
ihe match. 

Sec. 2. Captains who are non-players shall not carry a 
crosse, nor shall they be dressed in Lacrosse uniform, nor 
shall they in any manner obstruct the play or interfere with 
an opponent during a match, under the penalty hereinafter 
described for foul play. 



146 OFFICIAIj sporting RUIiES. 

Sec. 3. They shall be the representatives of their respective 
teams in all disputes, in which they may each be assisted by 
one player, whom they may select. 

Sec. 4. They shall select Umpires and Referees as laid down 
in these Rules, toss for choice of goals, and the said Captains 
shall be entitled to call "foul" during a match. They shall 
report any infringement of the laws during a match to the 
Referee. 

Sec. 5. Before the commencement of a match, each Captain 
shall furnish the Referee with a full and correct list of his 
twelve. 

Sec. 6. The Captains shall arrange, previous to a match, 
whether it is to be played out in one day, postponed at a stated 
hour in the event of rain, darkness, etc., or to be considered a 
draw under certain circumstances, and, if postponed, if it is to 
be resumed where left off. 

Sec. 7. No team will be allowed to use a professional as Field 
Captain, under any circumstances. 

RULE VII. 
referee. 

Section 1. The Referee in all cases must be a thoroughly 
competent and impartial person and, unless by mutual agree- 
ment, shall not be a member of either of the competing clubs. 

Sec. 2. Each club shall have the privilege of choosing the 
Referee for games on its own grounds, but shall notify visiting 
clubs of such selection not later than three days before the 
date fixed for game. Any club neglecting to send such notifi- 
cation within the limit specified shall forfeit to visiting clubs 
its right to appoint a Referee. 

Sec. 3. In the event of a club choosuig as Referee any person 
known to be either incompetent or partisan, the competing 
club may decline to accept him and play the game under pro- 
test, if he is continued in olTice after their objection is offered. 

Sec. 4. Before the game begins the Referee shall see that 
properly qualified Umpires are selected, as provided for in 
Rule VIII. All disputed points and matters of appeal that 
may arise during his continuance in ofTice shall be left to his 
decision, which, in all cases, must be final, without appeal. 



OFFICIAL SPOKTING EULES. 147 

Sec. 5. Before the game begins, he shall draw the players 
up in lines, and see that the regulations respecting the ball, 
crosses, spiked soles, etc., are complied with. He shall also 
see that the regulations respecting the goals are adhered to. 
He shall ascertain before the commencement of a game the 
number of games to be played, time for stopping, and any 
other arrangements that may have been made by the Cap- 
tains. He shall have the power to suspend at any time during 
the game any player infringing these laws— the game to go 
on during such suspension. 

Sec. 6. When "foul" has been called, the Referee shall 
immediately cry "time ' (unless satisfied that a foul has not 
been committed), after which the ball must not be touched by 
either party, nor must the players move from the positions in 
which they happen to be at the moment, until the Referee has 
called "play." If a player should be in possession of the ball 
when "time" is called, he must drop it on tne ground. If the 
ball enters goal after "time" has been called it shall not 
count. 

Sec. 7. His term of office shall only cover the time from 
which the game begins until it is concluded, and his decision 
awarding the game must then be given. His jurisdiction 
shall then end and he shall have no longer any power to act as 
Referee. At the commencement of the game, and after goals 
are scored or 'ball out of bounds," he shall see that the ball is 
properly faced, and when both sides are ready, shall call 
"play." He shall not express an opinion on any point sub- 
mitted to him until he has taken the evidence on both sides. 
After doing so, his decision in all cases shall be rtnal. Any 
side rejecting his decision, by refusing to continue the game, 
shall be declared losers. 

RULE VIII. 

umpires. 

Section 1. There shall be one Umpire at each goal. They 
shall be disinterested parties, and shall have no pecuniary 
interest, direct or indirect, In the result of the game. They 



148 ' OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

shall not be members of either club engaged in the match, 
unless by mutual consent of Captains, nor shall they be 
changed during the progress of the match without the con- 
sent of both Captains, unless as provided for in Section 4 of 
this rule. 

Sec. 2, Their jurisdiction shall last during the game for 
which they were appointed. They shall not change goals 
during a game. No person shall be allowed to speak to an 
Umpire, or in any way distract his attention, when the ball is 
near or nearing his goal. They shall stand behind the flags 
when the ball is near or nearing their goal. In the event of 
game being claimed, the Umpire at that goal shall at once 
decide whether or not the ball has fairly passed through the 
flags, his decision simply bemg "goal" or "no goal," without 
comment of any kind. He shall not be allowed to express an 
opinion, and his decision shall in all cases be linal, without 
appeal. 

Sec. 3. The Umpires shall be chosen by the Captains, but 
in the event of their failing to agree, after three nominations 
(in accordance with this rule) have been made by each party, 
it shall be the duty of the Keferee to appoint one or more 
Umpires as may be required, who shall not be one of the 
persons objected to, who must be duly qualified as required by 
this rule. 

Sec. 4. If, after the commencement of a game, it becomes 
apparent that either Umpire, on account of partisanship, or 
any other cause, is guilty of giving unjust decisions, the side 
offended against may enter a protest with the Eeferee against 
said Umpire's conduct, and ask for his immediate removal. 
After hearing the evidence from both sides, the Referee shall 
decide whether he shall be dismissed or continued in ofYice. 
If dismissed, the Eeferee shall at once appoint another Umpire 
to act in his stead. Any decision, however, which he may 
have given previous to his tlismissal shall hold good. 

Sec. 5. No professional shall be allowed to act as Umpire 
unless by mutual consent of \n)ih Captains, 



, OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 149 

RULE IX. 

THE GAME. 

Section 1. The Kefeiee shall start the game by facing the 
ball in the centre of the liekl between a player from each side. 
The facing at tlie beginning of a game, and whenever, for any 
reason, the ball is taken to centrelield during the progress of 
a game, is to be done in a square, whose sides shall be 12 feet, 
and no other players than the two facing shall be allowed 
within said square until the ball has passed out of the squares. 
The pall shall be laid upon the ground between the sticks of 
the players facing, and when both sides are ready the Referee 
shall call "play." The players facing shall have their left side 
toward the goal they are attacking, and shall not be allowed 
to use a loft-handed crosse. 

Sec. 2. A game shall be decided by the winning of the most 
goals in an hour and a half s actual play, with a rest of ten 
minutes at half time. Games must in all cases be won by put- 
ting the ball through the goal from the front side. 

Sec. 3. On the day selected, if only one team puts in an 
appearance, it shall be entitled to claim a victory by default. 
If its opponents refuse to fullil their engagements, or do not 
appear upon the ground at the specified time, the club com- 
plying with the terms agreed upon shall be declared the win- 
ner of the game. 

Sec. 4. When it happens, however, that neither team is ready 
to begin playing at the hour appointed for game, the team 
wnich completes its numbers lirst cannot claim a default from 
its opponent. Latter shall be entitled to 15 minutes additional 
lime, and if then unable to present a full team shall, if required 
by Its opponent, be obliged to play shorthanded or forfeit the 
game. 

Seo 6. A team which begins a game shorthanded must finish 
It with the same number of players with which it started 
the game, unless otherwise agreed to by its opponent. 

Sec. 6. After each game players must change goals. 

SeCo 7. Should tne ball be accidently put through a goal by 
one of the players defending it, it is game for the side attack- 



160 OFFlOlAIi SPORTING RULES. 

ing that goal. Should it be put through the goal by any one 
not actually a player, it shall not count. A ball thrown through 
the goal by the hand or kicked through when a player is out of 
play, shall not count a game. 

Sec. 8. In the event of a llag-pole being knocked down dur- 
ing a match, and the ball put through what would be the goal 
if the flag-pole were standing, it shall count game for the 
attacking side. 

Sec. 9. When a game is claimed and disallowed, the Keferee 
shall order the ball to be faced for, where it is picked up; but 
in no case must it be closer to the goals than ten yards in any 
direction. 

Sec. 10. The Goal-keeper while defending goal within the 
goal-crease, may pat away with his hand, or block the ball In 
any manner with his crosse or body. 

Sec. 11. Should the ball lodge in any place inaccessible to the 
crosse, it may be taken out with the liand, and the player pick- 
ing it up must " face ' with his nearest opponent. 

Sec. 12. Should the ball catch in the netting, the crosse must 
be struck on the ground to dislodge it. 

Sec. 13. Balls thrown out of bounds must be *' faced " for at 
the nearest spot within the bounds, and all the players shall 
remain in their places until the ball is " faced." The Referee 
shall see that this is properly done, and when both sides are 
ready shall call " play." The " bounds " must be distinctly 
settled by the Captains before the commencement of the match. 

Sec. 14. Players may change their crosse during a match. 

Sec. 15. If a player should be in possession of the ball when 
' time " is called, he must drop it on the ground. If the ball 
enters goal after "time " has been called, it shall not count. 

Sec. 16. In the settlement of any dispute, whether by the 
Lmpires or Referee, it must be distinctly understood that the 
Captains, with one player each, to be selected by them, have 
the right to speak on behalf of their respective clubs ; and any 
proposition or facts that any player may wish brought before 
the Referee must come through the Captains or the players 
selected by them. 

Sec. 17. In case neither side scores a goal within the time 
limit, the match shall continue until one goal is made. 



offigiaij sporting rules. 151 

RULE X. 

FOUL, PLAY. 

Section 1. No player shall grasp his opponent's erosse with 
his hands, hold it with his arms or between his legs, nor shall 
any player more than six feet from the ball hold his opponent s 
erosse with his erosse, run in front of him, or interfere in any 
way to keep him from the ball until another player reaches it. 

Sec. 2. No player with his erosse or otherwise shall hold 
another, push with the hand, or wrestle with the legs so as 
to throw an opponent. 

Sec. 3. No player shall hold the ball in his erosse, with his 
hand or person, or lie or sit upon it. 

Sec. 4. No player shall move from his position when " time ' 
Is called until the ball is again "faced."' Persistent infringe- 
ment of this rule shall subject the offenders to be ruled off for 
the remainder of the game by the Eeferee. 

Sec. 5. No player shall throw his erosse at a player or at the 
ball, under any circumstances; and such action will be consid- 
ered a " foul.' Should a player lose his erosse during a game, 
he shall consider himself ''out of play," and shall not be 
allowed to touch the ball in any way until he again recovers it. 
Kicking the ball is absolutely prohibited to players without a 
erosse. 

Sec. 6. The ball must not be touched with the hand, save in 
cases of Sections 10 and 11, Kule IX. 

Sec. 7. It shall be a foul to check the Goal-keeper from be- 
hind the goal. 

Sec. 8. No player shall wear spiked soles or boots, and any 
player attempting to evade this law shall be ruled out of the 
game. 

Sec. 9. Any player deliberately striking or tripping another, 
or raising his hand to strike, shall be Immediately ruled out 
of the game. No player shall delioerately kneel lie down or 
drop in front of an opponent, when both are in pursuit of the 
ball. 

Sec. 10. No player shall charge into another after iie uas 
thrown the ball. 



162 OFFICIAL SPORTING KULES. 

Sec. 11. The crosse or square check, which consists of one 
player charging- into another with both hands on the crosse so 
as to make the crosse strike the body of his opponent, is 
strictly forbidden. 

Sec. 12. No player shall interfere in any way with another, 
who is in pursuit of an opponent in possession of the ball. 

Sec. 13. "Shouldering" is allowed only when the players are 
within six feet of the ball, and then from the side only. No 
player must, under any circumstances, run into or shoulder 
an opponent from behind. The body-check is hereby defined 
as simply interposing or placing the body of the checker in the 
way of the player in possession of the ball. Any other use of 
it is strictly forbidden. 

Sec. 14. No player shall enter the goal-crease save when the 
ball has passed behind the goal-posts, when he may cross the 
crease. Should a player enter the {,oa]-crease, the ball is to 
be given the Goal-keeper, v.ho shall have a free throw, stand- 
ing within the crease. The Umpire shall decide when this rule 
has been violated. 

Sec. 15. The referee shall be the judge of fouls and shall call 
time to decide them. 

Sec. 16. When a foul is allowed by the Referee, the player 
fouled shall have the option of a free "run" or "throw" from 
the place where the foul occurred. For that purpose all play- 
ors within ten feet of said player shall move away to that dis- 
tance, all others retaming their positions. But if a foul is 
allowed within twenty yards of the goal, the nuxn fouled shall 
move away that distance from goal before taking the run or 
t^hrow allowed him. 

Sec. 17. If a foul is claimed and time called, and the foul then 
not allowed, the player accused of fouling shall be granted a 
free "run" or "throw" under the conditions above mentioned 
(Sec. 16). 

KULE XL 

settlement and penalty rOR "FOULS." 

Section 1. Any player considering himself purposely in- 
jured during the play, shall report to the Keferee, who shall 
warn the player complained of. 



OFFICIAL BPOETING RULES. 153 

Sec. 2. Except in cases already provided for, the penalty of 
fouling shall be discretionary with the Eeferee. For ordi- 
nary ''fouls," which in no way affect the result of the game, 
he shall caution the offender for the first offense; if repeated, 
the Keferee must suspend him for the rest of the game (not 
match) in which such "fouls" take place, without stopping 
the play. Sections 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,6 and 7 of Rule X shall be 
considered ordinary "fouls," and under this clause. 

Sec. 3, For deliberate fouls, which occasion injury to oppo- 
nents, or affect the result of the game— for the first offense, 
the Eeferee must suspend the player for the game (not match) 
in which such foul takes place. For a second offense, the Ref- 
eree must remove the offending player and compel his side to 
finish the match short-handed. Sections 10, 11, 12 and 13 
shall be considered as deliberate fouls under this clause. 

RULE XII. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

Section 1. Any player using profane or ungentlemanly lan- 
guage during a game shall be wai-ned by the Refere'^ for the 
first offense, and for the second offense shall be compelled to 
leave the field, and his team play short-handed. The Referee 
must enforce this rule. 

Sec. 2. A player charged with professionalism cannot be 
barred from playing until the charge made against him has 
been fully investigated and proved. 

Sec. 3. Clubs, however, illegally using a professional or pro- 
fessionals will forfeit all games won by teams on which such 
professional or professionals played. 

THROWING THE BASE BALL, OR L ACROSS BALL. 

A scratch line shall be marked on the ground. Each con- 
testant shall have throe throws. Stepping over the scratch 
line in a trial shall constitute a foul, I'he contestant can take 
as long a run as he pleases behind the line but must not step 
over it. 



LAWS OF LAWN TENNIS, 

As Adopted, Revised and Amended by the United 

States National Lawn Tennis Association, 

at Annual Convention 1892. 



THE COURT. 

I. The Court is 78 feet long, and 27 feet wide. 



It is 



divided across the middle by a net, the ends of which are 
attached to two posts, A and B, standing 3 feet outside of 



I 

G N 1 


5 

L E 


18 




21 


18 


>' 




' ^ 


' 


{ 3 


< D 

9 



H 



Ihe court on either side. The height of the net is 3 feet 6 
inches at the posts, and 3 feet at the middle. At each end 
of the court, parallel with the net, and 39 feet from it, are 
drawn t!ie base lines DE and FG, the ends of which are 
connected by the side Ihies DF and EG. Half way be- 
tween side lines, and parallel v/ith them, is drawn the half- 
court line 111, dividin^T Hie spare on each side of the net 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 



155 



into two equal parts, the right and left courts. On each 
side of the net, at a distance of 21 feet from it, and parallel 
with it, are drawn the service lines KL and MN. 

THE BALLS. 

2. The Bails shall be the Wright & Ditson, shall 
measure not less than 2if inches, nor more than 2 1^ inches 
in diameter; and shall weigh not less than i[| ozs., nor 

more than two ozs. 

I 

THE GAME. 

3. The choice of sides and the right to serve in the tirst 
game shall be decided by toss ; provided, that if the winner 
of the toss choose the right to serve, the other player shall 
have choice of sides, and vice versa, or the winner of the 
toss may insist upon a choice by his opponent. If one 
player chooses the court, the other may elect not to serve. 

4. The players shall stand on opposite sides of the net ; 
the player who first delivers the ball shall be called the 
server, and the other the striker-out. 

5. At the end of the first game the striker-out shall be- 
come server, and the server shall become striker-out ; and 
so on alternately in all the subsequent games of the set, 
or series of sets. 

6. The Server shall serve with one foot on the ground, 
immediately behind the base line ; the other foot may be 
anywhere, except touching the base line or the ground 
within the*court. He shall deliver the service from the right 
to the left courts, alternately ; beginning from the right. 

7. The ball served must drop between the service line, 
half-court line, and side line of the court, diagonally op- 
posite to that from which it was sei-ved. 

8. It is a Fau It if the server fails to strike the ball, or if* 
the ball sensed drops in the net, or beyond the service line. 



156 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

or out of court, or in the wrong court ; or if the server 
does not stand as directed by law 6. 

9. A fault cannot be taken. 

10. After a fault the server shall serve again from the 
same court from which he served that fault, unless it was 
a fault because he served from the wrong court. 

11. A fault cannot be claimed after the next service is 
delivered. 

12. The server shall not serve till the striker-out is ready. 
If the latter attempts to return the service he shall be 
deemed ready. 

13. A service or fault delivered when the striker-out is 
not ready, counts for nothing. 

14. The service shall not be volleyed, i. e., taken, before 
it has touched the ground. 

15. A ball is in play on lea\ang the server's racquet 
except as provided for in law 8. 

16. It is a good return, although the ball touches the net; 
but a service, otherwise good, which touches the net, 
shall count for nothing. 

17. The server wins a stroke if the striker-out volleys 
the service, or if he fails to return the service or the ball 
in play ; or if he returns the service or the ball in play so 
that it drops outside of his opponent's court ; or i^ he 
otherwise loses a stroke, as provided by law 20. 

18. The striker-out wins a stroke if the server serves 
two consecutive faults ; or if he fails to return the ball in 
play; or if he returns the ball in play so that it drops out- 
side of his opponent's court ; or if he otherwise loses a 
stroke, as provided by law 20. 

19. A ball falling on a line is regarded as falling in the 
court bounded by that line. 

20. Either player loses a stroke if the ball touches him, 
or anything that he wears or carries, except his racquet 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 157 

In the act of striking ; or if lie touches the ball wilh his 
racquet more than once; or if he touches the net or any of 
its supports while the ball is iu play ; or if he volleys the 
ball before it has passed the net. 

21. In case a player is obstructed by any accident, not 
within his control, the ball shall be considered a '* let.'' 
But where a permanent fixture of the court is the cause of 
the accident the point shall be counted. The benches 
and chairs placed around the court shall be considered 
permanent fixtures. If, however, a ball in play strikes a 
permanent fixture of the court (other than the net or 
posts), before it touches the ground, the point is lost ; if 
after it has touched the ground, the point shall be counted. 

22. On either player winning his first stroke, the score 
is called 15 for that player ; on either player winning his 
second stroke, the score is called 30 for that player ; on 
either player winning his third stroke, the stroke is called 
40 for that player ; and the fourth stroke won by either 
player is scored game for that player, except as below : 
If both players have won three strokes, the score is called 
deuce; and the next stroke won by either player is scored 
advantage for that player. If the same player wins the 
next stroke, he wins the game ; if he loses the next stroke 
the score returns to deuce ; and so on until one player 
wins the two strokes immediately following the score of 
deuce, when game is scored for that player. 

23. The player who first wins six games, wins the set, 
except as below : If both players win five games, the 
i.core is called games all; and the next game won by 
either player is scored advantage game for that player. 
If the same player wins the next game he wins the set ; 
if he loses the next game, the score returns to games all ; 
and so on until either player wins the two games imme- 
diately following the score of games all, when he wins 



158 OFFICIAL SPOBTINGJ BUIiES. 

the set. But the committee having charge of any tourna- 
ment may, in their discretion, modify tliis rule by the 
omission of advantage sets. 

24. The players shall change sides at the end of 
every set, but the umpire, on appeal from either 
player before the toss for choice, shall direct the 
players to change sides at the end of the first, 
third, lifth and every succeeding alternate game of 
each set; but if the appeal be made after the toss 
for choice the umpire may only direct the play- 
ers to change sides at the end of the lirst, 
third, tifth and every succeeding alternate game 
of the odd or deciding set. If the players change 
courts in the alternate games throughout the match 
as above, they shall play in the first game of 
each set after the lirst in the courts in which they 
respectively did not play in the lirst game of the 
set immediately preceding. 

25. When a vSeries of sets is pla3'ed, the player who 
served in the last game of one set shall be striker-out in 
the first game of the next. 

26. In all contests the play shall be continuous frot 1 
the first service until the match be concluded, provided, 
however, that between all sets after the second set, either 
player is entitled to a rest, which shall not exceed seven 
minutes, and, provided further, that in case of an unavoid- 
able accident, not within the control of the contestants, 
a cessation of play which shall not exceed, two minutes 
may be allowed between points, but this proviso shall 
be strictly construed, and the privilege never granted for 
the purpose of allowing a player to recover his strength 
or wind. The umpire, in his discretion, may at any time 
postpone the match on account of darkness or condition 
of the ground or weather, la any case of postponement 



OrnClATj SPOBTING RULES. 



the previous score shall hold good. Where the play has 
ceased for more than an hour, the player who at the cessa- 
tion thereof was in the court first chosen, shall have the 
choice of courts on the recommencement of play. He shall 
stay in the court he chooses for the remainder of th:.- set. 

The last two sentences of this rule do not apply when 
the players change every alternate game, as provided by 
Rule 24. 

27 The above laws shall apply to the three-handed and 
four-handed games, except as below : 



THE THREE-HANDHD AND FOUR-HANDED 
GAMES. 

A 



M 



B 

28, For the three-handed and four-handed games the 
court shall be 36 feet in width ; 4>^ feet inside the side 
lines, and parallel with them are drawn the service side 
lines KM and LN. The service lines are not drawn beyond 
the point at which they meet the service side lines, as 
shown in the diagram. 

29. In the three-handed game, the single player shall 
serve in every p-lternate game. 



160 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

30. In the four-handed game, the pair who have the 
right to serve in the first game shall decide which partner 
shall do so ; and the opposing pair shall decide in like 
manner for the second game. The partner of the plaj^er 
who served in the first game shall serve in the third, and 
the partner of the player who served in the second game 
shall serve in the fourth, and the same order shall be 
maintained in all the subsequent games of the set. 

31. At the beginning of the next set either partner of 
the pair which struck out in the last game of th*^ last set 
may serve ; and the same privilege is given to Jeir op- 
ponents in second game of the new set. 

32. The players shall take the service alternately 
throughout the game ; a player cannot receive a service 
delivered to his partner; and the order of service and 
striking-out once established shall not be altered, nor shall 
the striker-out change courts to receive the service, till 
the end of the set. 

33. If a player serve out of his turn, the umpire, as soon 
as the mistake is discovered, shall direct the player to 
serve who ought to have served. But all strokes scored 
before such discovery shall be counted. If a game shall 
have been completed before such discovery, then the 
service in the next alternate game shall be delivered by 
the player who did not serve out of his turn, and so on 
in regular rotation. 

34. It is a fault if the ball served does not drop between 
the service line, half-court line, and service side line of 
the court, diagonally opposite to that from which it was 
served. 

35. It is a fault if the ball served does not drop as pro- 
vided in law 34, or if it touches the server's partner or 
anything he wears or carries. 

36. There shall be a reiieree for every touffiament, 



OFFTCIATj SPOTiTTNa RULEft. 16i 

whose name shall be stated in the circulaf announcing 
3uch tournament. He shall have general charge of the 
matches, under the instructions and advice of the manag- 
ing committee, with such power and authority as may be 
given him by these rules and by said committee. He 
shall notify the committee in case he intends to leave the 
grounds during the matches, and the committee shall 
appoint a substitute to act, with like powers, during his 
absence. There shall be an umpire for each match, and 
as many linesmen as the players desire. The umpire 
may act as linesman also. The umpire shall have general 
charge of the match, and shall decide upon and call "lets,"' 
and also decide whether the player took the ball on the 
first or second bounce. The umpire shall also decide any 
question of interpretation or construction of the rules that 
may arise. The decision of the umpire upon any question 
of fact, or where a discretion is allowed to him under 
these rules, shall be final. Any player, however, may 
protest against any interpretation or construction of the 
rules by the umpire, and appeal to the referee. The de- 
cision of the referee upon such appeal should be final. 

The court shall be divided between the linesmen, and 
it shall be their only duty to decide, each for his share of 
the court, where the ball touched the ground, except, 
however, the linesmen for the base lines, who shall also 
call foot faults. The linesmen's decisions shall be final. 
If a lineman is unable to give a decision because he did 
not see or is uncertain of the fact, the umpire shall decide 
or direct the stroke to be played again. 



ODDS. 

37. A Bisque is one point which can be taken by the 

receiver ofthe odds at any time in the set, except as follows: 



162 OFFICIAL SPOKTINtt ItULES. 

{a. ) A biSqUft eamiot be taken after a service is delivered. 
{b.) The server may not take a bisque after a fault, r)ut 
the striker-out may do so. 

38. One or more bisques may be given to increase or 
diminish other odds. 

39. Half fifteen is one stroke given at the beginning ot 
llie second, fourth, aud every subsequent alternate game 
of a set. 

40. Fifteen is one stroke given at the beginning of 
every game of a set, 

41. Half thirty is one stroke given at the beginning of 
the first game, two strokes given at the beginning of the 
second game, and so on alternately in all the subsequent 
games of the set. 

42. Thirty is two strokes given at the beginning of 
every game of the set. 

43. Half forty is two strokes given at the beginning of 
the first game, three strokes given at the beginning of 
the second game, and so on alternately in all the subse- 
quent games of the set. 

44. Forty is three strokes given at the beginning of 
every game of a set. 

45. Half Court : the players may agree into which half 
court, right or left, the giver of the odds shall play ; and 
the latter loses a stroke if the ball returned by him drops 
outside any of the lines which bound that half court. 

46. Owed odds are where the giver of the odds starts 
behind scratch. 

47. Owe half fifteen is one stroke owed at the begin- 
ning of the first, third, and every subsequent alternate 
game of a set. 

48. Owe fifteen is one stroke owed at the beginning of 
every game of a set. 

49. Owe half thirty is two strokes owed at the begin' 



OFFICTAIi SPORTING RULES. 163 

ning of the first game, one stroke owed at the beginning 
of the second game, and so on alternately through all the 
subsequent games of the set. 

50. Owe thirtv is two strokes owed at the beginning oi 
every game of a set. 

51. Owe half forty is thre'^ strokes owed at the begin- 
ning of the first game, two strokes owed at the beginning 
of the second game, and so on alternately in all subse- 
quent games of the set. 

52. Ov^e forty is three strokes owed at the beginning oi 
every game of a set. 



"cjiy 



RE:GI_JLATriOISIS 

OF THE 

Na.tior\a.l Rifle Associa.tioi\ 

or 



I.— MANAGEMENT. 

A.— ANNUAL MEETINGS. 

1. Anftual meeting^s for competition will be conducted by an 
Executive Officer, wearing a tri-colored badge, aided by a Sta- 
tistical Officer, wearing a blue badge, a Financial Officer, 
wearing a tvhite badge, a Eange Officer, wearing a red badge, 
and assistants wearing badges corresponding in color to those 
worn by the chiefs of their respective departments. 

2. The Executive Officer shall have control of the Kange for 
the conduct of matches, and shall appoint an adjutant to 
assist him. 

3. The Statistical Officer shall have charge of all statistics. 

4 The Financial Officer shall have charge of all finances 
corinected with these meetings. 

5 The Kange Officer shall have charge of all Firing Points, 
and of the shooting thereat. 

B.— OTHER COMPETITIONS. 

1. All other Association competitions Avill be conducted by 
an Officer or Director of the Association, or other competent 
person previously designated as the Executive Officer. In the 
absence of the Officer, Director, or other person previously 
designated, the Assistant Secretary or Superintendent of 
Range shall act as the Executive Officer. 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING BULES. 166 

II —GENERAL REGULATIONS. 

1. During the progress of a match, no one, except the Offi- 
cers, Directors or employees of the Association, the competi- 
tors and the Scorekeepers, will be permitted within the ropes, 
without special permission of the Range Officer. 

2. The squads of competitors will be stationed not less than 
four yards in rear of the firing points, where each competitor 
must remain until called by the Scorekeeper to take his posi- 
tion at the firing point, and until he has completed his score. 
The Scorekeeper will be seated close to and in rear of the 
firing point stakes. 

3. Scorekeepers .<^hall, as each shot is signalled, call in a loud 
voice the name of the competitor and the value of the shot, 
and at the conclusion of the score of each competitor, announce 
in like manner his name and total score. 

Competitors must pay attention to the scores as announced and 
recorded, so that any error may be promptly investigated. 

Scorekeepers shall write upon the blackboard the names of 
the competitors in each squad or file, in the order in which 
they are to fire. They shall record each shot upon the black- 
board before entering it upon the score card, and shall not 
erase from tlie blackboard the names or scores of competitors 
until a proper officer has verified the score cards with them. 

4. All competitors will be allowed to examine the records of 
the Scorekeeper during the progress of any match upon appli- 
cation to the Range or Executive Officer. 

5. All protests and objections must be made to the Executive 
Officer, or, in his absence, to the Range Officer in charge. In 
case a competitor is dissatisfied with the decision of the latter, 
he may appeal to the Executive Officer, 

All protests must be niade in Avriting, in duplicate. These 
must be given to the Range Officer within two hours of the 
occurrence. One copy of the protest will be submitted to the 
party protested against, as soon as practicable. Except that 
when the protest charges fraud, it may be made at any time 
before the prizes for that competition have been awarded. 

6. Any competitor feeling himself aggrieved by the ruling of 
an Executive Officer may make to the Secretary a statement 
of his grievance in writing, giving the names of two or more 



166 OFFICIAIi SPORTTNCt RULES. 

witnesses in the case, which shall be handed to the Executive 
Committee at its first meeting thereafter for its consideration. 
Tiie decision of the Executive Committee shall be final, subject 
however, to the discretion of said Committee or any two 
members of it, to refer the matter to the Board ot Directors 
for its decision. 

7. All practice upon the Eange is subordinate and must give 
way to matches of the Association, except as directed by the 
Executive Officer or Kange Committee. 

8. These regulations and such special rules or directions ar 
the Executive Officer may give, must be rigidly complied wHh 
by competitors and all other persons upon the Kange grounds, 

III.-RIFLES. 

The riftes allowed in the competitions are : First, Military 
rifles; second, Special Military rifles; third, any rifle and 
must comply with the following conditions; viz. : 

1. Military Rifles to be such as have been adopted by the 
United States Government, for use in the army, or by any State 
or Territory for the use of its uniformed militia— except such 
rifles as have been specially issued to sharpshooters, or for 
experimental purposes. Filing or altering the sights of such 
rifles, except as authorized by the proper military authorities, 
is strictly prohibited. 

2. Special Military Rifles, to be fitted with an arrange- 
ment for fixing a bayonet, or such other device as may be 
employed to take the place of a bayonet. Stock to be suffi- 
ciently strong for service purposes, and to be fitted with a 
metal cleaning rod and swivels for a sling ; weight (without 
bayonet) not to exceed nine and one-quarter pounds. In all 
military rifles the minimum trigger pull shall be six pounds. 
JSights may be such as are allowed on military rifles or of 
such other pattern as may have been approved by the Board 
of Directors of the National Rifle Association. The sight 
protector of the front sight may be used as a shade for the 
same. 

3. Any Rifle, maximum weight ten pounds, minimum pull 
of trigger three pounds; sights of any description except 
telescope, magnifying and such front aperture sights as solid 



OFPICIATi SPORTING RULES. 167 

disks or bushes pierced in the centre, which cover the target 
so as to conceal the danger signal when displayed. No stirrup 
constructed of metal or other substance, cjnnected to the rifle 
by straps of any kind, for the purpose of taking up or lessen- 
ing its recoil, will be allowed. 

4. The usual military sling and swivels may be used. 

5. Competitors shall submit their rifles and ammunition 
for inspection whenever required. 

6. No hair or set trigger will be allowed. 

7. No fixed or artificial rests will be alloweil. 

IV.- AM MUNITION. 

For any military or special military rifle, any form of fixed 
ammunition may be used in which the bullet is securely in- 
serted in the shell to a depth not less than two-third the 
diameter of the bore, so that the cartridge may be carried in 
a belt, bullet down. 

For any rifle any ammunition may be used. When a breech- 
loader is used it must not be loaded, or when a muzzle-loader 
is used it must not be capped until the competitor has taken 
up his position at the firing point. 

v.— TARGETS. 

The targets are divided into three classes, and shall be of 
the following sizes, unless otherwise stated in the terms of 
the match : 

1. Third Class, to be used at all distances up to, and includ- 
ing, 300 yards— Target 4x6 feet. 

Bullseye, circular, 8 inches in diameter. 
Centre, " 26 

Inner, '• 46 " " 

Outer, remainder of target. 

2. Second Class, to be used at all distances over 800, to, and 
including, 600 yards— Target 6x6. 

Bullseye, circular, 22 inches in diameter. 
Centre, '• 38 •■ 

Inner, " 54 " '• 

Outer, remainder of target. 



168 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

3. First Class, to be used at all distances over 600 yards- 
Target 6x12. 

Bullseye, circular, 36 inches in diameter. 
Centre, •' 54 " " 

Inner, square, 6x6 feet. 
Outer, remainder of target. 

VI.— MAKKING, SCORING AND SIGNALLING. 

1. Bullseye, counts 5; signal, white circular disk. 

Centre, ■' 4; " red 

Inner, "3; " white and black " 

Outer, " 2; " black 

Ricochet, scored R ; " red flag waved twice, right 
and left, in front of the target. Ricochet hits will be marked 
out after the flag signal. 

2. When a shot strikes the angle iron upon which the target 
stands, the marker will open the trap and raise and lower his 
flag three times in front of the target. 

3. Any objection to the record of a shot as signalled, or to 
one not signalled, must be made before another shot is fired. 
Any competitor challenging the marking of a shot, shall first 
deposit with the Executive Officer, or his representative, the 
sum of $1. If his challenge is sustained the money shall be 
returned. In case the challenge is not sustained, the money 
shall be forfeited to the Association. The challenger shall 
not be permitted to inspect the target. 

4. When two shots strike the target simultaneously, the 
shot having the higher value will be marked first, and the 
competitor whose proper turn it was to shoot will be credited 
with that value. 

5. Any alteration of a scoring ticket must be witnessed by 
the officers in charge of the firing point, and indorsed with his 
initials. 

VII.— BULLSEYE TARGETS. 

1. Bullseye targets will be open all the time during the 
Annual Meetings. 

2. Tickets (entitling the holder to one shot at any Bullseye 
target) will be sold at the office of the Financial Officer, upon 
the Range, at 10 cents each, or twelve for $1. 



officiaij sportixg rules. 169 

3. Each competitor making a Bullseye will receive a Bulls- 
eye ticket, provided he fires in the position authorized at that 
Range. 

4. At the close of the firing each evening, the pool receipts 
(less one-half retained for expenses) will be divided pro ra^a 
among those making Bullseyes, on presentation of their tickets. 

5. No person will be allowed to fire more than three shots 
consecutively at any Bullseye target, provided others are 
waiting to fire. 

VIII.- MATCHES. 

1. The commencement of the Annual Meetings will be sig- 
nalled by the firing of a gun, or blowing a horn at intervals of 
fifteen minutes. The first will be the signal for competitors 
and scorekeepers to assemble at the firing points, and the 
s»^cond to commence firing. 

2. The matches will take place, if possible, at the hour pre- 
viously named. Any deviation from the programmes will be 
posted upon the bulletin-board as long beforehand as practica- 
ble. The posting upon such buUetin-board will be considered 
sufficient notice to alt competitors of everything so posted. It 
should be examined by all competitors daily, both morning 
and afternoon, before the shooting commences. 

3. In team matches, at Annual Meetings, an officer will be 
assigned to each of the firing points as Supervisor, and will, 
in connection with the Scorekeeper, keep a record of the firing ; 
and any disagreement between such Officer and Scorekeeper 
will be decided by the Executive Officer, subject to appeal, as 
provided for in the Regulations. 

4. Each Team may appoint a responsible person to act as 
Supervisor, whose duty it shall be to see that the rules of the 
N.R.A. are strictly adhered to by the team at whose target he 
may be assigned. 

5. No practice will be allowed upon the Range on any of 
the days of the Annual Meetings, unless speciall\' authorized 
bylhe Executive Officer This does not apply to days upon 
which special matches of the Association, or of affiliating asso- 
ciations or clubs, take place. 



170 OFFICIAIi SPORTING BULES. :' 

IX.— ENTRIES. 

A.— ANNUAL MEETINGS. 

1. In all cases competitors for prizes offered to military or- 
ganizations must be either officers or regularly enlisted mem- 
bers in good standing of the Regiment, Battalion, Company 
or Troop which they represent, and shall have been such for 
at least three months prior to the match for which they are 
entered. 

2. Entries must be made at the office of the Association, in 
New York City, prior to the Sunday preceding the commence- 
ment of the meetings, and all subsequent entries shall be 
called Post Entries, and a charge of 25 per cent, additional will 
be imposed upon all such Post Entries. This does not apply 
to re-entry matches. 

3. Competitors who are prevented from being present at any 
meeting shall have the entrance fees they have paid returned 
after the meeting, provided that they send their tickets, and 
give written notice to the Secretary before the day on which 
the prize for which they have entered has been announced for 
competition. 

4. Competitors prevented from competing by illness will 
receive back their entrance fees in full, on production of a 
medical certiiicate and their entry tickets. 

5. The holders of post entry tickets may be ordered to fire 
whenever target accommodations can be provided, but should 
they be precluded from competing by deficiency of target 
accommodation, their entrance fees will be returned to them, 
the Executive Oftlcer not being able to guarantee accommo- 
dation for all such entries. 

6. All entries are received upon the express condition that 
the competitor is to appear at the firing-point at the exact 
time named upon his score card, and complete his score within 
the limitation of time prescribed, regardless of weather or 
any other cause. 

7. The same person shall not be a member of more than one 
team in the same match. 

8. Competitors selected to shoot in team matches, or who 
are detailed to shoot off a tie, at a particular hour, and who 
find that such engagements will interfere with their shooting 



OFFlOIATi SPORTTNri ItULiES. 171 

In other competitions, must at once communicate with thf 
Executive Officer. These cases will be provided for, ivhen pos- 
sible, by altering the hour; and when that cannot be done, the 
entry will be cancelled and the entranee fee refunded, except 
in cases of ties, when he takes the next lowest prize. 

B.— GENERAL REGULATIONS. 

1. A register ticket may be transferred at any time before 
the firing for the match has commenced, by exchanging it at 
the office of the Statistical Officer for one having the name 
of the new holder. It is available only for the hour and target 
for which it was originally issued. Any erasure or alteration 
of hour or target not initialed by the Executive Officer will 
render the ticket invalid. 

2. No post entries shall be received for any competition 
after the firing in such competition has commenced, unless 
expressly permitted by the terms of a match. 

X. -SHOOTING. 

1. Competitors must be present at the firing-points punctu- 
ally at the time stated upon their tickets, or forfeit their right 
to shoot. 

2. After a competitor has joined a squad he shall not quit it 
until he has completed his firing, or retired. 

3. No two competitors squadded to fire at the same time 
shall shoot with the same ritle. 

4. In all competitions confined to members of niilitary or- 
ganizations, competitors shall shoot in a uniform, to consist 
of a military head-dress, uniform jacket or coat, and a body 
belt, to be worn as is usual in their corps. 

5. In each match of the Annual Meetings, except where 
otherwise stated, the squad or team assigned to each target 
will be required to commence firing at the time named on the 
score card, and to continue firing at the rate of one shot per 
minute until the completion of tne score. 

6. The time for each squad to commence and close, will be 
signalled by firing a gun or blowing a horn every thirty min- 
utes, from 9 A. M. to 5.30 p. M.; and no firing by any of its 
members will be permitted except between those signals. In 
case a competitor, without fault on his part, has been pre- 



]L72 Ol'FlCMALi SPOKTING RULES. 

vent^ed from linishing his score within that time, he may apply 
to the Executive Officer for further assignment, t he granting 
of which will be in the discretion of that officer. 

7. Competitors retiring from matches forfeit all claims 
therein. 

8. No sighting shots will he allowed in any match, but targets 
will be assigned as Bullseye Targets at which competitors may 
practice at any time, provided such practice does not inter- 
fere with their presence at the designated time at the firing- 
point to which they may have been assigned, or in case of 
teams, after the hour named for the commencement of their 
shooting. 

9. In all competitions restricted to military rifles, the com- 
petitors shall place themselves at the firing-point by twos, 
and shall fire alternately until they have fired all their shots. 

IjO. In other competitions the competitors shall fire their 
shots alternately throughout the squad. 

11. No rifle shall be cleaned or wiped out, except between 
ranges, unless specially allowed by the terms of the match 

12. Whenever the danger signal is displayed, competitors 
about to fire will be required to ope a the breech block of their 
rifles (if breech-loaders). If they leave the firing-point the>' 
must withdraw the cartridge. 

13. Any competitor delaying his squad, will be passed by. 
In no case will the firing be delayed to enable a competitor to 
procure a rifle. 

- 14. Competitors must shoot their scores at different dis- 
tances, in the order named in the conditions of the compe- 
tition. 

15. In all competitions, unless otherwise provided by their 
terms, competitors will be allowed one minute to each shot. 

16. Warning shots must be fired into the bank between the 
targets. 

XI.— POSITION. 

UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED IN THE TERMS OF THE MATCH, 
SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 

1; In all matches (except those specially for carbines), the 
position up to and including 303 yards, shall be standing. The 
elbow may be rested against the body. 



offioiatj sporting rules. IVS 

2. In carbine matches, the position at 200 yardi sliali be 
standig; at 300 yards, tineeling or sitting; over that distance, 
any position (as prescribed for infantry). 

3. In all other matches, at distances above 300 yards, any 
position maj' be talven without artificial rest to the ritle or 
body. 

4. One-armed competitors will be allowed to use false arms 
without extra support, in the standing, sirtiii;^: and kneeling 
[.((sitions. 

5. In all cases the ritte shall be held clear of the ground. 

XII.— TIES. 

t . Ties shall be decided as follows : 

A.— IN INDIVIDUALi SHOOTING. 

1. When the firing takes place at more than one distance, by 
1 he total score maile at the longest distance ; and if still a, t ie, 
and there be three distances in the competition by the total 
score at the second distance. 

2. By the fewest outers in the entire score. 

3. By the fewest inners in the entire score. 

4. In handicap matches (after the preceding), by the fewest 
CENTRES in the entire score. 

5. If still a tie, by inverse order of shots, counting singly 
from the last to the tirst. 

6. In matches where two or more scores added together 
count, if still a tie, by adding together the last shots of each 
single score, and if still a tie, by adding together the next to 
the last and so on. 

7. By firing three shots at the longest range, and if still a 
tie, by firing single shots until the tie is decided. 

B.— IN TEAM SHOOTING. 

1. By the aggregate total scores made at the different dlB- 
tances in inverse order. 

2. By the fewest outers iu the entire score. 

3. By the fewest inners iu the entire score. 

4. By the total of each round in inverse order. 

5. By the competitor on each side who has made the highest 
set^re, firing five rounds at the longest distance. 



1?4 OFPlOtAIi SPORTING UTILES. 



C— IN HANDICAP MATCHES. 



I. In case of ties in handicap matches, the handicap shall be 
added to the lirst shot or shots scored below a bull. 

II. The names of competitors who have to shoot off ties will 
be posted on the bulletin-board as soon after each match as 
practicable. 

III. When the ties are shot off, one sightinjr shot shall be 
allowed without charge. 

IV. Competitors not present at the firing points at the hour 
named for shooting off ties, lose their right to shoot. 

V. If, having forfeited their right to compete, they shall still 
l)e within the number of prize winners, they shall take any 
l)rize that may be allotted to them by the Executive Com- 
mittee. 

XIII.— PRIZES. 

1. Unless otherwise specified, no competitor will be allowed 
to take more than one prize in any competition. 

2. Prize winners, upon application to the Statistical Officer 
on the Range, will receive certificates, which must be given up 
on receiving the prizes. 

3. Prizes will be delivered on the Range at the close of the 
meeting, under direction of the Prize Committee, unless other- 
wise specified. 

4. Any trophy competed for annually must be delivered to 
the Secretary of the National Rifle Association, by the organi- 
zation or individual holding it, at least one week before the 
opening of the meeting at which it is again to be competed 
for. 

5. All prizes and Bullseye money not claimed within thirty 
(lays after the day on which the same was won, shall be for- 
feited to the Association. 

XIV.— PENALTIES. 

Competitors must make themselves acquainted with the 
regulations as well as with the conditions of any match for 
which tliey may have entered, as the plea of ignorance of 
either of tliem will not be entertained. 



OFFICIAI. SPOTTING RULES. 176 

DISQUALIFICATION . 

Any competitor- 
fa)— Who shall fire in a name other than that under which 
he entered, or who shall fire twice for the same prize, unless 
permitted by the conditions of the competition to do so ; or— 
(^)— Who shall be guilty of any conduct considered by the 
Board of I' i rectors or the Executive Committee as discredit- 
able ; or— 

(c)— Who shall be guilty of falsifying his score or being 
accessory thereto ; or— 

(d)— Who shall offer a bribe of any kind to an employe- 
shall, upon the occurrence being pioved to the satisfaction of 
the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee, forfeit all 
his entrance fees, be forever disqualified from competing at 
any time upon the Kange of the Association, and shall not be 
entitled to have any prize won by him at the time of meeting 
awarded to him. 

EXCIiUSION FKOM FUKTHER COMPETITION. 

1. Any competitor who shall be detected in an evasion of the 
conditions prescribed for the conduct of any match, shall be 
ruled out of such competition. 

2. Any competitor, in any meeting or match, refusing to 
obey any instructions of the Executive Officer, or his assis- 
tants, or violating any of these regulations, or being guilty of 
disorderly conduct, or being intoxicated, will be immediately 
ruled out of all further competitions during such meeting or 
match, and forfeit his entrance fees ; and may also be reported 
to the Board of Directors or the Executive Committee, and be 
by them disqualified from the use of the Eange. 

3. Any competitor firing when the danger flag or trap disk 
is shown at the target or firing point, or knowingly discharg- 
ing his rifle except at a target to which he has been assigned, 
or into the blowing-off pits, or as may be directed by an 
Officer, shall be debarred from all further competitions during 
the meeting, and shall forfeit his entrance fees. This shall 
not apply to a competitor accidentally firing at the wrong 
target, when no danger disk is up. 



176 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 



■i. Any i)f' rson discharging a rifle or snapping a cap within 
the enclosure, except in accordance with the regulations for 
shooting, may, at tlie discretion of the Executive Officer, be 
requiied to leave the ground. 

5. Any competitor or other person found with a loaded rifle, 
except at the iiring-points and when about to shoot, shall be 
•iebarred from further competition durmg that meeting or 
<x)mpetition. 

<'• Any person, whether a competitor or not, interfering 
with any of the firing squads, or annoying them in any way, 
will bo at once expelled from the ground. 

7 Any competitor discharging his rifle aeeidentally, either 
by Lis own want of care, or by reason of any defect in the 
rille, may be disqualilied from further c(nnpetition in the 
match at the discretion of the Executive Officer. 

8. Should a competitor lose his register ticket, omit to take 
It to the liring-point, fail to attend at the prescribed hour or 
give a wrong ticket, and so by his own neglect miss the oppor- 
tunity given to him of c.omi)eting for the prize for which his 
ticket was issued, his claim in regard to such competition 
shall be cancelled. 

9. Any person tiring on a wrong target will be reported by 
the scorer to the Executive or Eange Officer present, and will 
be fined $1, or be debarred from further competition ; or both, 
in the discretion of the Executive Officer. 

10. Any competitor, who, after taking up his position for 
shooting and in proceeding to adjust his sights or change his 
position, shall not hold his rifle vertically, or with the muzzle 
towards tlie target, will be tined $1. 

11. Any person ruled out of any meeting or competition shall 
forfeit all entrance fees. 

XV. 

1. All regulations heretofore adopted and inconsistent here- 
with, are hereby repealed. 

2. Any of these regulations may be temporarily suspended 
or changed at any time by the Board of Directors or Executive 
Committee. 

3. These regulations shall take elfect immediately. 



RULKS 



F^istol ai^id I^e^szol^^er Shooting. 



The need of rules governing pistol and revolver competitions 
has been apparent during' the past three years. The distance, 
trigger-pull, and some general rules were brielly laid down by 
the clubs where matches were shot. For a time it has been 
generally believed that tlie arms used in these competitions 
should be classed; that a decision arrived at in regard to 
trigger-pull, the sights permitted clearly defined, ammunition 
described, and rules determining the amount of cleaning per 
mitted, manner of loading and firing, i)ositions permitted, and 
other rules explicitly stated. The Massachusetts Rifle Asso- 
ciation, after a long and careful consideration, adopted the 
following rules : 

All meetings for competitions will be conducted by an ex- 
ecutive officer, aided by assistants. 

The executive officer shall have control of the range for the 
conduct of matches, and shall give such directions to the 
employes of the club as in his judgment are necessary for the 
proper management of the same, and for the preservation of 
order. 

The executive officer and his assistants are required to see 
that the regulations, and such directions as the executive 
officer may give, are rigidly complied with by competitors and 
all other persons upon the range. 

They will see that the squads of competitors are stationed 
in rear of firing-points, and that each competitor remains 
there until called by the score-keeper to take his position at 
the tiring-point. The score-keepers will be seated in rear of 
the firing-points. 



178 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

Score-keepers shall, as each shot is signalled, call in a loud 
voice the name of the competitor and the value of tho shot, 
and, at the conclusion of the score of each competitor, an- 
nounce in like manner his name and total score. 

All competitors shall be allowed to examine the records of 
the score-keeper during the progress of the match, but in such 
a manner as not to interfere with or inconvenience the score- 
keeper. ^, ,. „ 

Any competitor feeling himself aggrieved by the ruling of 
the executive officer, may make to the secretary a statement 
of his grievance in writing, which shall be handed at once to 
the Executive Committee for its consideration. The decision 
of the Executive Committee shall be final, subject, however, to 
the discretion of said committee, or any two members of it, 
to refer the matter to the Board of Directors for its decision. 

Challenges will only be permitted at the discretion of the 
executive officer. The executive officer may, in his discretion, 
challenge the marking of any shot the allowance of which 
would be unjust to other competitors, and correct the score 
accordingly. . 

Any objection to the scoring of a shot as signalled, or to one 
not signalled, must be made before another shot shall have 
been tired on the same target. 

It shall be the right of the shooter to challenge the scoring, 
and the executive officer may decide upon the evidence the 
actual value of the shot. 

Any alteration of a scoring ticket must be witnessed by an 
officer in charge of the firing-point, and indorsed with his 

initials. ,, ,. . 

Double entries are prohibited, no shot being allowed to count 

in more than one match. 

No sighting-shots shall be allowed except on targets specially 
designated tor that purpose by the executive officer, and in no 
case on targets on which a match is in progress, unless in an 
emergency, to be decided by the executive officer. 

Unfinished scores shall be considered worthless after having 
been withdrawn from the scorer, and no shots can be claimed 
under or by virtue of the same after having been so with- 
drawn 



OFFICTAL SrORflXO RULES. 175) 

No scorer is allowed to have at one time more than one 
score card for each shcjoter, and no shooter is allowed to shoot 
without having an unfinished score card deposited with the 
scorer. 

Ties shall be decided as follows, viz. : each competitor shoot- 
ing three shots, until decided. 

No scores with handicap shall exceed a perfect score. 

Competitors who have to shoot off ties will be notified as 
soon after each match as practicable. When the ties are shot 
off one sighting-shot shall be allowed without charge. Com- 
petitors not present at the firing-points at the hour named 
for shooting off the ties lose their right to shoot, and will be 
placed accordingly. 

Temporary discontinuance of matches, on account of bad 
weather, and the closing limit for receiving enti-ies shall be at 
the discretion of the executive officer. 

An entry ticket, except when sold in block, may be trans- 
ferred at any reasonable time, by presenting it to the statis- 
tical officer for exchange. Any erasure or substitution of 
name by the holder will forfeit the ticket. 

In single-entry matches no entry shall be made after the 
firing begins if any participant objects. 

Competitors will have choice of prizes unless otherwise 
stated. 

Penalties. — Competitors must make themselves acquainted 
with the regulations, as the plea of ignorance will not be enter- 
tained. 

No competitor shall be allowed to use more than one name 
besides his own in any one match. 

A competitor failing to report at the time and target to 
which he is assigned, or shooting at pool or practice after the 
hour set for the simultaneous opening of a match, shall forfeit 
his entry. (The last clause will not prevent pool shooting 
between scores in re-entry matches.) Any member shooting 
at pool or practice between shots of a score shall forfeit the 

score. 

All competitors and other persons must preserve order and 
decorum, submit to the direction and decisions of the execu- 
tive officer, and make all ojections and protests, if any, to the 
proper officials, in a manner which will not disturb others. 



180 OFFIOTAIj SPOKTING ETTLES. 

Pistols and revolvers may be discharged only in firing at 
the target in pools or matches, or into such warming-pits as 
may be designated (in that case without bullet), and any com- 
petitor or other person discharging pistols or revolvers other- 
wise, or having a loaded shell insei'ted in his pistol or re- 
volver while elsewhere than upon the actual firing-point, may 
be disqualified for the time being, or fined a sum not exceed- 
ing $3, at the discretion of the executive oificer. 

Any violation of rules or discreditable eondvict which the 
executive officer may consider of such magnitude as to re- 
(piire it, shall be reported to the directors for their action. 

Any shooter firing upon the wrong target shall be recorded 
a miss. 

The rules governing rifie competitions, so far as they are 
applicable, shall be in force in all pistol competitions. 

In all matches, when not otherwise mentioned, either single- 
shot pistols or revolvers will be permitted upon equal con- 
ditions ; but if matches call for the revolver the single-shot 
pistol will not be admitted, unless specially mentioned. 

SPECIAL RULES. 

Pistols and revolvers allowed in competitions must conform 
to the following conditions : 

A. — Army or navy revolver. 
B.—Axij revolver. 
C— Any pistol. 

A.— Army or Navy Revolvers must be such as have been 
adopted by any goveriunent for the armanent of its army or 
navy, and must conform in all respects of model, sights and 
ammunition used, to the service revolver of such nation. 

B — Any Revolver. — Revolvers of any calibre, maximum 
weight, three pounds; maximum length of bore, including 
cylinder, ten inches. 

C.~ Single- Shot Pistols.— Any breech or muzzle loading pistol , 
maximum weight, th'"ee pounds; maximum length of bore 
ten inches, 

Trigger-PuU.--l\\ all matches, or in practice shooting, the 
minimum trigger-pull shall be three pounds. 



OFFiniATi SPOETTNO "RTTT^ES. " ^IjiJ 

Sights for any Pistols or Revolvers.— The front and rear 
sights must be open; the notch of a rear sight, to be consid- 
ered open, must be as wide at the top of the notch as at any 
part; no aperture or peep sights, nor any manner of covered 
sights, shall be permitted. Lateral sliding-bars or wind- 
gauge may be used on rear open sight, also any elevating 
front or rear open sight. The use of a notch for a front sight 
will not be permitted. Sights may be smoked or blackened 
in any desired manner. No device shall be worn on or over 
the eye, or on glasses, to secure the sight through an apertuie. 
Ammunition.— II factory ammunition is called for it shall l>e 
of any make, of any established manufacturer, generally pro- 
curable in stores, and brought to the shooting-point in im- 
broken boxes, with the label of the manufacturer intact. 

Cleaning.— In any match where both pistols and revolvers 
are allowed, competitors may clean their arms at will, pro- 
vided such cleaning does not delay the firing, which shall be 
at the rate of one shot per minute, or oftener during the firing 
of each score, except in case of accident. In such case the 
time may be extended, in the discretion of the executive 
officer. 

In matches confined to revolvers the cylinder must be fully 
charged, or a suificient number of chambers charged to com- 
plete the score. Blowing into or cleaning the barrel in any 
way will not be permitted, except when the cylinder is com- 
pletely discharged. 

Loading and Firing.— 'No arms shall be loaded except at the 
tiring-point, the muzzle of piece being kept in the direction 
of the target till the arm is either discharged or unloaded. 

Missfires shall not count; but an accidental discharge shall, 
in every instance, be counted. 

Position.— The position shall be as follows : Standing, free 
from any other artiticial support; the pistol or revolver held 
in one hand only, with the arm extended free from the bod>', 
and unsupported in any way. The rear sight of the pistol or 
revolver shall not be nearer to the eyo than 12 inches. 

Targets.— The Standard American target, full size having an 
eight-inch bull, shall be used in matches at 50 yards distance. 
The same target reduced to one-half size, having a four-inch 



1^ OFFIOIAIi SPOKTING RUIiES. 

bull, in matches at 30 yards' distance. The same target re; 
duced to one-quarter size, having a two-inch bull, in matches 
at 20 yards' distance. The tai get j-educed in the same propor- 
tion to distance, in matches of a lesser range. 

Marking and Scoring.-VnleBS otherwise specitied, each com- 
petitor will have a separate target provided and will lire his 
score throughout, when the target will be examined by the 
scorer and the score i-ecorded. In case of any dispute as to 
the value of a shot, the same may be challenged, as provided 
for iu Rule 3, Sec. 4, of shooting rules governing ritle compe- 
titions. 




RULERS 

FOR 

Inar\imate Target Sl\ootir\g. 



RULE 1.— JUDGES AND EEPEREE. 

Two Judges and a Keferee, or a Referee alone, shall be 
selected by the management, or the contestants, whose deci- 
sion shall be final. 

RULE 2.— DUTIES OP THE REFEREE. 

The Referee shall see that the traps are properly set at the 
beginning of the match, and kept in order to the finish. He 
shall [endeaver to make the targets conform to the flight and 
direction indicated in Rule No. 7. He shall test any trap upon 
application of the shooter at any time by throwing a trial 
target therefrom. He may at any time, and must when so 
requested by a contestant, select one or more cartridges from 
those of a shooter at a score, and publicly test the same for 
proper loading. If the catridge, or cartridges, are found to be 
improperly loaded, the shooter shall suffer the penalty as pro- 
vided for in Rule No. 11. 

RULE 3.— SCORER. 

A Scorer shall bo appointed, by the management, whose 
score shall be the official one. All scoring shall be done with 
ink, or indelible pencil. The scoring of a lost target shall be 
indicated by an " o," and a broken target by the figure " 1." 

RULE 4.— PULLER. 

A Puller, or Pullers, shall be appointed by the management, 
whose duty it shall be to see that the trap or traps shall be 
instantly sprung when the shooter calls " Pull," and shall be 



184 OFFICIAL SPOKTING RULES. 

placed in such a position that the shooter will have no means 
of knowing by his actions which trap is to be pulled. In 
.single target shooting he shall pull the traps as decided by a 
trap-pulling indicator, or other means that may have been pro- 
vided by the management, so that the shooter will have no 
means of knowing which trap the target is to be thrown from. 

EULE 5.— PULLING THE TRAPS. 

Section 1. Traps may be pulled in regular order from 1 to 3. 
or 1 to 5, or vie • versa, if so decided by the management. 

Sec. 2. If the shooting is from traps to be pulled in regular 
order, the shooter may refuse the target from the trap not so 
pulled ; but if he shoots, the result must be scored. 

Sec. 3. If the trap is sprung before, or at any noticeable 
interval after the shooter calls '• Pull," he can accept or refuse 
the target; but if he shoots, the result must be scored. 

Sec. 4. If the puller, or pullers, do not pull in accordance to 
the indicator, or other means provided, they shall be removed 
and others substituted. 

RULE. 6. —ARRANGEMENT OF TRAPS. 

All matches shall be shot from three or five traps, set level, 
three or five yards apart, in the segment of a circle, or in a 
straight line. When in the segment oi a circle, the radius of 
the circle shall be eighteen yards. In all cases the shooter's 
position shall not bo less from eaclJ trap than the rises pro- 
vided for in Rule 7. The traps shall be numbered from 1, on 
the left, to No. 3 or No. 5, on the right, consecutively, accord- 
ing to the number used. 

RULE 7.— ADJUSTING TRAPS. 

Section 1. All traps must be adjusted to thow the targets a 
distance not less than 40 yards, nor more than 60 yards. If 
any trap be found too weak to throw the required distance, a 
new trap or spring that will, must be substituted. 

Sec. 2. The lever or projecting arm of the trap shall be so 
adjusted that the elevation of the target in its flight at a 
distance of 10 yards from the trap shall not be more than 12 
feet, nor less than 6 feet, and the angles of flight shall be as 
follows : 



OFFIOIATi SPORTING RULES. 185 

If three traps are used- 
No. i trap shall be set to throw a left quartering target. 

No. 2 trap shall be set to throw a straightaway target. 

No. 3 trap shall be set to throw a right quartering target. 

If live traps are used — 

No. 1 trap shall be set to throw a right quartering target. 

No. 2 trap shall be set to throw a left quartering target. 

No. 3 trap shall be set to throw a straighta^vay target. 

No. 4 trap shall be set to throw a right quartering target. 

No. 5 trap shall be set to throw a left quartering target. 

Traps Nos. 1 and 5 shall be set to throw the targets so that 
the line of flight shall cross that of the straightaway target at 
a point of not less than 10 yards nor more than 20 yards from 
trap No. 3. 

Sec. 3. After the traps are set for these angles, if the target 
for any reason shall take a different course it shall be consid- 
ered a fair target, provided, the trap has not been changed. 

RULE 8.— SCREENS. 

Either pits or screens, or both, may be used, but the screens 
must not be higher than is actually necessary to fully protect 
the ti-apper. 

RULE 9.— THE RISE. 

In single target shotting the rise shall be : 
18 yards for 10-bore guns. 
16 >'ards for 12-bore guns^ 
14 yards for 14 and 16-bore guns. 

13 yards for 20-bore guns. 

In double target shooting the rise shall be : 

10 yards for 10-bore guns. 

14 yards for 12-bore guns. 

12 yards for 14 and 16-bore guns. 

11 yards for 20-bore guns. 

All distances measured in tli<\so rules must be accurate 
measui'ement. 

RULE 10.— CALIBER AND WEIGHT OF GUNS. 

No gun of larger caliber than 10-boie shall l>f> used, and the 
weight of ail guns shall be unlimited. 



186 OFFICIAT. SPORTTNG RTTLES. 

RULE 11.— LOADS. 

Charge of powder uiiliuiited, Charge of shot not to exceed 
one and one-quarter ounces American Association, or Dixon's 
measure, struck . An>^ shooter using a larger quantity of shot 
shall forfeit his entrance money and rights in the match. 

NOTE -If in the cpinlon of the manaeement. with Iho unanimous consent 
of the cjn.estaots. a snooter has not wilfuUy v olated this rule, hti en- 
trance money shall be returned to him. 

RULE 12.— LOADING GUNS. 

In single target shooting, only one barrel shall be loaded at 
a time, and the cartridge shall not be placed in the barrel until 
after the shooter has taken his position at the score. 

In double target shooting, both barrels shall be loaded at 
the score. Cartridges must be removed from the gun before 
leaving the score. 

RULE 13.— POSITION OF GUN. 

Any the shooter may adopt. 

RULE 14.— SINGLE TARGET SHOOTING. 

When the traps are set in the segment of a circle, each con- 
testant shall shoot at three or more targets before leaving the 
score. If two targets are sprung at the same time and the 
contestant does not shoot, it shall be declared "No target;" 
but if he shoots, the result must be scored. 

RULE 15.— DOUBLE TARGET SHOOTING. 

Both traps must be pulled simultaneously, and each con- 
testant shall sho.^t at three or live pairs, consecutively, thrown 
as follows: If three traps are used, the first pair shall be 
thrown from 1 and 2, the second pair from 2 and 3, the third 
pair from 1 and 3. the fourth pair from 1 and 2, and the fifth 
pair from 2 and 3. 

If live traps are used, the rirstpaii- shall be thrown from 2 and 
3 the second pair from 3 and 4, the third pair from 2 and 4, 
the fourth pair from 2 and 3, and the fifth pair from 3 and 4. 

If only one target is thrown, it shall be declared "No tar- 
gets." 

If a target be lost for leasons stated in Rule 19, Sec. 1, iL 
Bhall be declared "No targets." If one be a fair and the othe.- 



OFFICIAIi SPOETING KULES. 187 

an imperfect target, it shall be declared " No targets." But if 
the shooter accepts an imperfect target, or targets, the result 
must be scored. 

If both targets are broken by one barrel, it shall be declared 
" No targets." If the shooter tires both barrels at one target 
intentionally, it shall be scored " Lost targets." But if the 
second barrel be discharged accidentally, it shall be " No tar- 
gets." 

EULE 16.— EAPID riEING SYSTEM. 

When the traps are set in a straight line and the rapid firing 
system is to be used, there shall be a screen before each trap 
on which shall appear the number of the trap, from No. 1 on 
the left, and each shooter shall stand at a score opposite the 
trap from which the the target is to be thrown for him to 
shoot at. After he has shot at his first target he shall pass to 
the next score to the right, and so continue until he reaches 
the end of the score, when he shall return to the score oppos- 
ite No. 1, and continue as before until his score is finished. If 
shooters are annoyed, or there is delay in shooting by the 
smoke of previous shots, the traps may be pulled in reverse 
order, commencing with the trap on the right. 

EULE 17— CIjASS shooting. 

All shooting shall be class shooting, unless otherwise stated 
by the management. 

EULE 18— BEOKEN TAEGETS. 

A target to be scored "broken," must have a perceptible 
piece broken from it while in the air. A "dusted" target is 
not a broken target. No target shall be retrieved for shot 
marks. 

If a target be broken by a trap, the shooter may claim 
another target, as provided for the Rule 19; but if he shoots, 
the result must be scored. 

EULE 19— ALLOWING ANOTHEE TAEGET. 

Section 1. The shooter shall be allowed another target for 
the following reasons : 
A— For a target broken by the trap. 

B — For any defect in the gun, or load, causing a miss-fire. 
C — If the contestant is interfered with, or balked, or there is 



188 OFFICIAL SPOETING RULES. 

other similar reasons why it should be done, the referee may 
allow another target. 

Sec. 2. When the shooting is at known angles he shall have 
another target from the same trap ; but if the shooting is at un- 
known angles he shall have another target from an unknown 
trap, to be decided by the indicator, except it be the last trap, 
when the shooter has the right to know which trap is to be 
sprung. In this case he shall have another target from the 
same trap. 

Note —When a shooter In breaking his gun to put In the shells fails to 
br- ak it far enough to cock the gun it is considered h's own carelessness, 
and not sufficient excuse for the allowanca of another target. 

KULE 20.— LOST TARGETS. 

Targets shall be scored lost if the shooter fails to load, cock, 
adjust safety on gun, or pulls the wrong trigger. 

RULE 21.— TIE SHOOTING. 

Seection 1. All ties shall be shot off at the original distance, 
and as soon after the match as practicable, at the following 
J lumber of birds : 

Ties on Single Targets — In single target matches of 25 tar- 
gets, or less, on three traps, 3 targets; five traps, 5 targets. 
In matches of 26 targets to 50 inclusive, on three traps, 6 tar- 
gets; five traps, 10 targets. In matches of over 50, on three 
traps, 15 targets ; live traps, 25 targets. 

Ties on Double Targets.— In double target matches of 10 pairs 
or less, on three traps, 3 pairs. In matches of more than 10 
pairs, 5 pairs, thrown from traps 1 and 3. If live traps are 
used, the same number shall be thrown in each case, from 
traps 2 and 4 (unless otherwise arranged bp the management , 
and so stated or understood previous to the beginning of the 
match). 

Sect. 2. If in a series of matches the result prove a tie, such 
tie shall be shot off at the original number of targets. 

RULE 22.— ANNOUNCING THE SCORE. 

Section 1. When two judges and a referee are serving, one 
of the judges shall announce the result of each shot distinctly, 
and it shall be called back by the scorer. 



officiaij sporting rules. 189 

(The call for a broken target shall be "Broke," and the call 
for a missed target shall be "Lost.") 

If the second judge disagrees with the decision of the judge 
calling, he shall announce it at once before another target is 
thrown, and the referee shall decide it. In case of another 
target being thrown before the referee's decision, the target 
so thrown shall be "No target." 

Sec. 2. At the close of each shooter's score the result mwst 
be announced. If claimed to be wrong, the error, if any, must 
be corrected at once. 

RULE 23.— SHOOTER AT THE SCORE. 

In all contests the shooter must be at the score within three 
minutes after his name is called to shoot, or he forfeits his 
rights in the match. 

RULE 2i.— FORBIDDEN SHOOTING. 

No shooting will be permitted in the enclosure other than at 
the score ; and in case there is no enclosure no shooting within 
200 yards of the score, without the consent of the manage- 
ment. 




rule;s 

FOK 

Live Bird Slaootirxg. 



RULE 1.— REFEREE. 

"A referee shall be appointed by the contestants, or manage- 
ment, whose decision shall be final. 

RULE 2.— DUTIES OF REFEREE. 

The referee shall see that the traps are properly set at the 
beginning of the match, and kept in order to the finish, and that 
they are kept properly filled. He may at any time, and must 
when so requested by a contestant, select one or more car- 
tridges from those of a shooter at the score, and publicly test 
same for proper loading, If the cartridge, or cartridges, are 
found to be improperly loaded, the shooter shall suffer the 
penalty as provided in Eule 15. 

RULE 3.— SCORER. 

A scorer Shall be appointed by the contestants or manage- 
ment whose score shall be the official one. All scoring shall 
be done with ink or indelible pencil. The scoring of a lost 
bird shall be indicated by an "o," and of a dead bird by the fig- 
ure "I." 

RULE 4.— PULLER. 

A puller shall be appointed by the contestants, or manage- 
ment, and shall be placed at least 6 feet behind the shooter, 
and it shall be his duty to pull the traps evenly and fairly for 
each contestant, and instantly after the shooter calls "Pull. 
He must use a trap-pulling indicator, or other device that may 
be furnished by the management, so that the shooter will not 



OFPIOIAL SPORTING RTTLES. 191 

know which trap is to be pulled. All traps must be filled be- 
fore the shooter calls "Pull." 

If more than one bird is liberated, the sliooter may call "No 
bird ;" but if he shoots, the result must be scored. Should the 
puller not pull in accordance with the indicator, he shall be 
removed and another puller substituted. 

RUIiE 5.— ARRANGEMENT OF TRAPS. 

All matches shall be shot from five ground traps, placed 5 
yards apart, in the segment of a circle. The radius of the 
circle shall be 80 yards from the shooter's score. The traps 
shall be numbered from No. 1 on the left to No. 5 on the right, 
consecutively. 

Note - \ ground trap Is one that lie 4 flat wltb the surf ice of the ground 
wh-n op 'R, aiid gives the bird Its natur 1 fllsrht In startlag. 

RULE 6.— THE RISE. 

The rise shall be : 
30 yards forlO-bore guns. 
28 yards for 12-bore guns. 
26 yards for 14 and 16-bore guns. 
25 yards for 20-bore guns. 

RULE 7.— BOUNDARY. 

The boundary for both single and double bird shooting shall 
be the segment of a 59 yards circle, and a dead line. The cir- 
cle shall be drawn from a point 10 yards beyond the centre 
trap on a line from the shooter's score, and it shall terminate 
vsiiere it joins the dead line, which shall be drawn at a distance 
of 30 yards from the centre trap, and at right angles with a 
line drawn from the shooter's score to the centi-e trap. 

RULE 8.— BIRDS REFUSING TO FLY. 

When a bird refuses to tty, such artificial means as have been 
provided by the management may bo used to start it, by dir- 
ection of the referee. A bird hit with a missile shall be de- 
clared "No bird." The shooter may declare a bird refusing to 
tty when the trap is pulled, "No bird." 

RULE 9.— GATHERING BIRDS. 

A bird to be scored dead must be gathered within bounds 
before another bird is shot at, and within three minutes' time 



192 OPFICTAT. SPORTING lUILES, 

by a dog or shooter, or person appointed by the shooter for 
that purpose. No extraneous means shall be used, and no 
other person shall be allowed to assist in gathering. If the 
gatherer cannot locate the bird, he may appeal to the referee 
to locate it for him. All birds challenged must show tlesh- 
shot marks, to be scored "Dead birds." 

EULE 10.— BIRDS KILLED ON THE GROUND. 

A bird killed on the ground with the first barrel is "No 
bird." But it may be killed on the ground with the second 
barrel if the first is fired white the bird is on the wing. If a 
bird is shot at on the ground with the first barrel, and the 
shooter uses the second barrel, but fails to kill, it is "Lost 
bird." But if the bird is killed, it shall be "No bird." 

RULE 11.— MUTILATING BIRDS. 

No mutilation of birds will be allowed, and if it is proved to 
the referee that any contestant has wilfully mutilated a bird, 
or is a party thereto, the referee shall declare all his rights in 
the match forfeited. 

RULE 12. — OUT OF BOUNDS. 

A bird once out of bounds must be scored a " Lost bird." 

RULE 13.— BIRDS SHOT AT BY ANOTHER PERSON, 

If a bird be shot at by any person other than the shooter at 
the score, the referee shall decide whether it shall be scored, 
or another bird allowed. 

RULE 14:.— POSITION OF GUN. 

Any the shooter may adopt. 

RULE 15.— LOADS. 

Charges of powder unlimited. Charge of shot not to exceed 
one and one-quarter ounces American Association, or Dixon's 
measure, struck. Any shooter using a larger quantity of shot 
shall forfeit his entrance money and rights in the match. 

RULE 16.— CALIBER AND WEIGHT OF GUN. 

No gun of larger caliber than a 10-bore shall be used, and 
the weight of all guns shall be unlimited. 



OFFTOTATj SPO-RTTNG RTTTjES. 193 

KULE 17.— liOADING GUNS. 

No gun shall be loaded except at the score. Cartridges 
must be removed from the gun before leaving the score. 

RULE 18.— GUN NOT COCKED. 

If a gun is not cocked, or the safety not properly adjusted, 
and the bird escapes, it shall be scored a "Lost bird." 

EULE 19.— MISS-FIEE WITH THE FIRST BARREL. 

If the shooter's gun miss-tire with the first barrel, and he 
uses the second barrel and misses, the bird must be scored 
"Lost bird." But if killed with the second barrel, on the 
wing, it shall be scored "Dead bird." 

RULE 20.— MISS-FIRE WITH THE SECOND BARREL. 

If a miss-tire occur with the second barrel, the shooter shall 
have another bird, using a full charge of powder only in the 
tirst barrel. He must, however, put the gun to his shoulder 
and discharge the blank cartridge in the direction of the bird, 
and the bird must be on the wing when the first barrel is dis- 
charged. 

RULE 21.— SHOOTER AT THE SCORE. 

In all contests the shooter must be at the score within three 
minutes after his name is called to shoot, or he forfeits his 
rights in the match. 

RULE 22.— LEAVING THE SCORE. 

A shooter having fired his first barrel and left the score, can- 
not return to tire his second barrel. 

RULE 23.— BALK. 

If acontestant is balked or interfered with, or there is other 
similar reason why it should be done, the referee may allow 
another bird. 

RUIiE 24.— ANNOUNCING THE SCORE. 

The referee shall announce the result of each shot distinctly 
and it shall be called back by the scorer, and at the close of 
each shooters, score the result must be announced, and if 
claimed to be wrong, the error, if any must be corrected at 
once. 



194 opfioiatj sporting rules. 

rule 25.— tie shooting. 

All ties shall be shot off at the original distance, and as soon 
after the match as practicable, at the following number of 
birds : 

In matches of 10 birds or less, 3 birds. 

In matches of 11 to 25 birds, inclusive, 5 birds. 

In matches of 20 to 50 birds, inclusive, 10 birds. 

la matches of 51 to 100 birds, inclusive, 25 birds. 

If in a senes of matches the result prove a tie, such tie shall 
! >f shot off at the original number of birds. 

RULE 26.— CLASS SHOOTING. 

All shooting shall be class-shooting, unless otherwise stated. 

RULE 27.— ENDANGERING PERSON OR PROPERTY. 

If a bird shall fly so that to shoot at, it would endanger any 
person or property, it shall not be shot at, and the referee 
shall allow another bird. 

RULE 28— FORBIDDEN SHOOTING. 

No shooting shall be permitted within the enclosure other 
than at the score, and in case there is no enclosure, no 
shooting within 200 yards of the score, except by those at the 
score, without the consent of the management. 

double; birds. 

RULE 1. 

The rules for single bird shooting shall govern double bird 
rontests, when not conttieting with the following: 

RULE 2.— DOUBLE RISES. 

The double rises shall be from two traps of any kind, 10 
yards apart, pulled simultaneously. The rise shall be : 
26 yards for 10-bore guns. 
24 yards for 12-bore guns. 
22 yards for U and 16-bore guns. 
SI yards for 20-bore guns. 



OFFIOIAL SPORTING- BULES I95 

RULE 3.— ALLOWING ANOTHER PAIR. 

Both birds shoulil be on the wing when shot at. Should 
only one bird fly, the shooter shall have another pair of birds 
if he does not shoot, or if he does shoot and kills the bird on 
the wing. But if he shoots and misses, the bird shall be 
scored lost, and in such event he shall shoot at another pair of 
birds, with a full charge of powder only in one barrel. The 
referee shall load the gun, not allowing the shooter to know 
which barrel contains the full charge, and which contains the 
powder charge only. 

RULE 4.— MISS-FIRE WITH THE FIRST BARREL. 

If the shooter's gun miss-fire with the first barrel, he will be 
entitled to another pair of birds if he does not shoot his second 
barrel. But if he fires his second barrel, the result must be 
scored, and the shooter shall shoot at another pair of birds, 
with a full charge of powder only, in one barrel, as provided 
for in Kule 3. 

RULE 5.— MISS-FIRE WITH THE SECOND BARREL. 

If the shooter's gun miss-fire with the second barrel, the 
result of the first barrel must be scored, and the shooter shall 
shoot at another pair of birds with a full charge of powder 
only in one barrel, as provided for in Rule 3. 

RULE 6.— LOST FIRE. 

If a shooter fire both barrels at one bird intentionally, it 
shall be scored "Lost birds." But if the second barrel be dis- 
charged accidently, it shall be "No birds." 

RULE 7.— NO BIRD. 

If both birds are killed with one barrel, it shall be declared 
"No birds," and the shooter shall shoot at another pair of 
birds. 

RULE 8.— TIES. 

All ties must be decided in shooting off as follows : 
In matches o*' 5 pairs or less, at 2 pair?.. 
In matches of 6 to 10 pairs, inclusive at 3 pairs. 
In matches of 11 to 20 pairs, inclusive, at 6 pairs. 
In matches of 21 to 50 pairs, inclusive, at 10 pairs. 



BY THE 

NATIONAL 



The following are the new rules : 

Ball —The ball to be not less than eight inches nor more 
than nine inches in diameter. 

aoals.—ThQ width of the goals to be ten feet, and to be dis- 
tinctly marked at each end of the tank. 

Teams —Each side to consist of not less than 5 nor more 
than 7 players, who shall wear caps of distinctive color. 

/finie.—The duration of a match should be 20 minutes; 10 
minutes each way, 3 minutes to be allowed at half-time for 
change of ends. Time occupied by disputes shall not be reck- 
oned as in the time of play. 

Cap fains. —The captains shall be playing members of the 
teams they represent, they shall agree upon all preliminaries 
and shall toss for choice of ends. 

Officials —The officials shall consist of a referee, timekeep- 
er, and two goal judges. 

Referee— The referee's duties shall be to start the game, to 
stop"all unfair play, to decide upon all fouls. He may proclaim 
a foul without its being claimed by any of the competitors . 
All competitors must cease play at the first sound of referee's 
Avhistle. The referee's decision to be final. 

Fouls.— It shall be a foul : (a) To touch the ball with both 
hands at the same time. (Goal keeper exempt from this rule). 
( b) To touch the ball, interfere with an opponent, or take any 
part in the game while standing on the bottom of the bath. 
(Goal-keeper exempt), (c) To hold the rail or sides of tank 
during anv part of the game, unless for the purpose of resting. 



officiaij sporting rules. 197 

To interfere with an opponent when more than three feet 
from the bail, or carry the ball under the arm. 

Penalties.— The penalties for each foul shall be a free throw to 
the opposing side, from the place where the foul occurred. A 
goal cannot be scored from a free throw unless the ball has 
touched at least one other player. 

Wilful Fouls.— If in the opinion of the Referee a player 
commits a willful foul, he shall be cautioned for the first of- 
fense, and for the second the Referee shall have power to or- 
der him out of the water until a goal has been scored. 

Goal-keeper.— The goal-keeper may stand, or hold the rail 
or side to defend his goal, but when standing or holding must 
not throw the ball above half the distance of the tank. The 
goal-keeper can throw or carry the ball as he deems best. When 
once the goal-keeper loses possession of the ball outside of the 
goal-line, he must immediately return behind his goal line. 
The goal-keeper may be treated as any other player when in 
possession of the ball. 

Starting. — The players shall stand on the goal line (or end of 
tank). The Referee shall stand in a line with the centre of 
the tank, and, having ascertained that the captains are ready, 
shall give the word go or blow his whistle, at the same time 
throwing the ball into the water in the centre of the tank. 

Scoring.— A goal shall be scored by the ball passing between 
the goal posts, or marks and shall be declared by the goal 
judge raising a tlag. 

Leaving the Water.— A player leaving the water except at 
half-time shall not re-enter it until a goal has been scored or 
until half-time. 

Out of Play.— \Yhen the ball shall go out of play, it shall be 
thrown by the Referee into the middle of the course, in a 
straight line from where it went out. 

Opponent's Goal I/ine.— No player will be placed in his op- 
ponent's goal, or behind the goal-keeper. Infringement of 
this rule is a wilful foul. 

Corner Throw. — A player throwing the ball over his own goal 
or end of tank shall concede a free corner throw to his op- 
ponents, but if the attacking side, throw the ball over other 
than between the goal post or marks it shall be a free throw to 
their opponents. 



RULES OF THE PBIO USSOtllTIOII, 



Revised Ajxril, 1893. 



1. The grounds to be about 750 feet long by 500 feet wide 
with a ten-inch guard from end to end on the sides only. 

2. The height of the ponies must not exceed 14 hands and 1 
inch. 

3. The balls to be of Bass wood, with no other covering than 
paint, and 3 inches in diameter, the mallets to be such as are 
approved by the Committee. 

4. The goal posts to be 24 feet apart, and light enough to 
break if collided with. 

5. Match game between pairs shall be two periods of 15 min- 
utes each, actual play. Time between goals, and delays, not 
counted; tAvo minutes after a goal has been made and five 
minutes between periods for rest, unless otherwise specified. 

6. Match games between teams of three shall be of four 
periods of fifteen minutes each, actual play. Time between 
goals, and delays, not counted ; two minutes after a goal has 
been made and five minutes between periods for rest unless 
otherwise specified. 

7. Match games between teams of four, shall be three periods 
of twenty minutes each, actual play. Time between goals 
and delays, not counted ; two minutes after a goal has been 
made and ten minutes between the periods for rest unless 
otherwise specified. 

8. Each team to choose an umpire, and, if necessary, the two 
umpires to appoint a referee, whose decisions shall be final. 

9. Each team should have a substitute in readiness to play 
"When a match is on. 

10. There shall be a captain for eac)i team, who shall have 
the direction of position* and plays of his men. The home 
capt'^in shall provide two acceptable goal judges whose de- 
cisions snail be final, in regard to goals made at the end at 
which each mav be placed. 

11. No captain shall allow a member of his team to appear 
in the game otherwise than in his Club uniform. 

12. Only players, umpires and referee allowed upon the 
ground during" the progress of the game. 

13. The game to begin when the ball is thrown between the 
contestants, who shall be in line facing each other in the 
middle of the field, unless it is agreed between the Captains to 
charge. The charge to be from a line 3!) feet in front of the 
goal posts. When the signal to charge has been given the 



OFPIOIATi BPOKTIN<4 RULES. 199 

first and second players must keep to the left of the ball until 
it has been hit. 

14. It is forbidden to touch an adversary, his pony, or his 
mallet, with the hand or mallet during- play, or to strike the 
ball when dismounted. A player shall not put his stick over his 
adversary's pony either in front or behind, In riding off or 
hustling, a player shall not push or strike with his arm or 
elbow. 

15. In case of an accident to a player or pony, or for any other 
reasonable cause, the Referee may stop the game, and the time 
so lost shall not be counted. When the game is resumed the ball 
shall be thrown between the players who shall be lined up at 
the point at which the ball stopped. But if the game is stopped 
on account of a foul, the ball is to be thrown in at the place 
at which the foul occured. 

16. When the limit of time has expired, the game must con- 
tinue until the ball goes out of bounds, or a goal is made and 
such overtime shall not be counted. 

17. In case of an equal number of goals having been made at 
the end of the last period, the game to be continued until one 
side makes the winning goal. 

18. When the ball goes out of bounds at the sides it must be 
thrown in from the place at which it went out, by the Referee, 
or by an impartial person, between the two sides which shall 
be drawn up in line facing each other. When the ball goes out 
ends, the side defending that goal is entitled to a knock out 
from the point at which it crossed the line. When the player 
having the knock out causes unnecessary delay, the Referee 
may throw the ball on the field and call play. No opponent 
shall come within 50 feet of a player having the knock out, 
until the ball has been hit. 

19. Whenever a player either accidently or intentionally 
knocks the ball behind the line, at the end at which the goal de- 
fended by his side is situated, it shall be deemed a safety knock 
out, and shall score one fourth of one goal agamst such player's 
side. When the ball is caromed out or kicked out by a pony it 
shall not score as above. 

20. The Referee shall have power to impose a fine not ex- 
ceeding forty dollars on any team or member of a team, which 
shall fail to appear within a reasonable time of the hour named 
for the events for which they have been entered, or for any 
misconduct or violation of the rules during the progress of the 
games, and shall report the same in writing to the Committee 
for enforcement. And he may exclude from the game any 
dangerous or vicious pony, and he may start the game not- 
withstanding the absence of any players after the time fixed. 

21. A player requiring a mallet during the game must ride 
to the end or side line to procure one ; it must not be brought 
on the field to him. 

22. The Referee may stop the game at any time when the ball 
is broken, or when it strikes the Referee, or his pony, and mav 



200 OFFTOIAL SPORTING RULES. 

substitute another ball by throwing it between the players at 
a point as near as possible to where it was stopped. 

23. A ball must go over and clear of the line to be out, ana 
over and clear of the line to count a goal. When a ball is hit 
above the top of the goal posts, b ut in the opinion of the 
Referee through, it shall be considered a goal. 

24 Foul riding is careless and dangerous horsemanship, and 
lack of consideration for the safety of others. A player in 
possession of the ball has the right of way, and no one shall 
cross him unless at such a distance as to avoid all possibility 
of a collision. ^ ^, ^ , i, 

25. The Eeferee may suspend a player for the match for a 
foul, or he may award the opposing side a half goal. 

26. When a player is replaced by a substitute, he cannot re- 
turn to the team the same day, except to take the place of a 
player who is incapacitated. 

In any change of players after the game has begun, the 
handicap of the man having the highest number of goals shall 
be counted. . , , 

27. Any member of the Committee may measure ponies (not 
his own) and issue certificates, good for the season for ponies 
under five years of age. Ponies five years old or over, holding 
such certificates need not be measured again. 

28. No player can play for one prize on more than one team 

^^29 No member of a Club which is a member of the Polo 
Association shall play any match games with or against any 
Club which is not a member of the Association, nor shall any 
player play on the team of any Club of which he is not a 
member, except on written consent of the Committee. 

30. The Polo Association Cups shall not be played foi- a sec- 
ond time on any ground until all other Association Clubs have 
had the privilege, providing the grounds of the Club named 
are equal to the requirements of the Committee. 

31. In drawing teams under the handicap the bye shall be 
drawn by lot, first. In the first round the teams shall be op- 
posed to one another whose total handicap shall be nearest. 
The day of play for the opposing teams to be decided by lot. 

32. The Polo Association colors are white and dark blue. 



RINK POLO 



1. Each team shall consist of live players, to be designated as fol- 
lows : One goal-tend, one half-back, one centre, two rushers. 

2. For each championship game, two balls shall be furnished by 
the home club to the referee for use. If the]|ball in play is batted out 
of the playing surface, and is not returned within 30 seconds, the 
other ball shall be put in play by the referee. As often as one of the 
two in use is lost, a new one must be substituted, so that the referee 
shall at all times after the game begins, have two for use. 

The last ball in play shall become the property of the winning 
club. Each ball used in championship games shall be examined by 
the secretary of this association, enclosed in a paper box and sealed 
with his seal, which seal shall not be broken except by the referee in 
the presence ef the two contesting teams after play has been called. 

Should the ball become out of shape, cut, or ripped so to expose the 
yarn, or in any way so injured, as to be in the opinion of the referee 
unfit for use, the referee, on being appealed to by either captain, 
shall at once put the alternate ball into use and call for a new one. 

3. The sticks shall not exceed 4 feet in length, 13^ inch in diameter, 
or 15 ounces in weight. The crt)ok of the stick may be covered with 
leather, but no metalic substance will be allowed near that end of 
the stick. A cord or strap shall be attached to the handle to prevent 
the stick from slipping from the hand, but it shall not extend more 
than ten inches beyond the end. 

4. All games shall be played upon circular running skates, in good 
order, without any extra appliances, and of standard size, with a 
smooth brass face. No skate shall be more than two inches shorter 
than the ordinary boot or shoe of the player, and said boot or shoe 
shall have no foreign substance attached to it. 



202 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 



The skates mubt be securely fastened to the foot, and no player 
can call time to adjust his skate. In case the skate is broken, and a 
player thereby is obliged to leave the surface, his place maybe taken 
by a substitute in uniform; but the player retiring cannot resume 
his position until a goal has been made or the time limit expired. 

5. The goal shall be the regulation cage goal, 3 feet high and 4.% 

feet long. 

6. In playing a game, the front of the cage must not be less than 10 
cet from the eld, and equidistant from the sides of the playing sur- 
face of the rink. 

7. No player, except the goal-tend, shall be allowed within a semi- 
circle plainly indicated in front of the goal, the radius of which must 
be 3 feet from the centre of the goal line. It is understood that if 
the goal-tend leaves his position, who ever for the time being takes 
his place is the goal-tend. 

8. To start the game, the ball shall be placed at the middle of a 
straight line drawn through the centre of each goal, and at the 
whistle of the referee shall be charged upon by a player from each 

team. 
A goal is won by the passage of the ball into the cage, where it 

must remain until removed by the leferee. 

9. The positions of the teams shall be reversed after each goal. 

10. Two innings of twenty minutes each of actual playing time shall 
constitute a game, except as provided for hereinafter, and the club 
winning the most goals in that time shall be the winner of the game. 

In computing the time, all waits between goals and during the 
progress of the game on calls of time shall be deducted from the 
actual time and only the playing time of the goals reckoned. 

The final goal shall be the one which ends at the expiration of the 
second twenty minutes of actual playing time, unless tlie clubs are 
tied, in Avhich case the deciding goal shall be played. 

11. There shall be a corps of official referees appointed by the Sec- 
retary, and a timekeeper selected by each rink, who shall keep the 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 203 

time with a stop watch or a stop clock ; the expense of an official 
referee shall be paid Vjy the manager of the rink in which the game 
is played. If an official referee fails to appear^at any game, there 
shall bo a referee appointed by the captain of the visiting club. 

12. Any timekeeper may be removed upon the protest of three 
clubs. 

13. No person but the players and referee shall be permitted on 
the surface during a match, unless assistance is to bG rendered in 
case of accident, or unless upon mutual invitation of the captains 
and referee. 

14. The referee shall announce each goal, giving its time, and all 
fouls and their nature. 

The referee is the master of the surface from the beginning of the 
game to its close, and is entitled to the respect of the spectators, 
Any person offering any insult or indignity to him shall be promptly 
ejected from the premises. 

He must be invariably addressed by the players as Mr. Referee ; 
and he must compell the players to observe the provisions of the 
playing rules. 

The referee must keep the contesting teams playing constantly 
from the beginning of the game to its termination, allowing for such 
delays as are rendered unavoidable by accident. 

The referee must call play promptly at the hour designated by the 
home club, and on the blast of the whistle the coiitest shall begin. 
When the whistle is blown for time, no goal can be counted that is 
made until the signal has been given to renew play. 

15. The skates of each club shall be examined by the referee im- 
mediately before the players go on the surface. Any player found 
^vith tampered skates or 7.olls shall be lined not less than five or more 
then ten dollars. No player shall be allowed to leave the surface 
without permission of the referee, who shall examine his skates 
upon his return. 

16. There shall be an official scorer connected with each club, who 



204 OFFICIAL, SPOKTINft RULES. 

«iiall prepare a summary of each contest, which shall contain the 
names of the players, the number and order of goals won by each 
team, and the time occupied in playing for each goal, which shall be 
promptly mailed to the Secretary of the Association. 

17. If, after the completion of a game, and the decision of the ref- 
eree, either club has reasonable cause for dissatisfaction with the rul- 
ings of the referee, they may, by submitting a formal complaint 
within twenty-four hours to the Secretary, signed by the captain t)r 
manager of the team, stating their reasons for the complaint, have 
the matter decided by the Association; but no club shall have the 
right to enter a complaint that does not abide by the decision of the 
referee, and play the game out under his direction. Any club refus- 
ing to complete a game shall be liable to expulsion. 

18. If the ban go out of bounds the referee shall blow his whistle 
to call time, and place the ball at the point opposite where it went 
out, at least four feet from the rail. In recommencing play the players 
who do so must stand in position to knock the ball lengthwise of the 
surface with their back toward the sides. 

19. Time shall be called by the referee whenever a foul occurs. 
Upon the renewal of the game the ball must be placed where the foul 
occurred. 

20. If time is called while a goal is in progress the play shall not 
cease until the referee's whistle is blown. 

21. A goal shall be taken from either side for every third foul com- 
mitted by it during the progress of a game. After taking cognizance 
of a third foul and announcing the result the referee shall continue 
the game from where it left off at the call of foul. 

22. It shall be deemed a foul : (a)— if any player stop or strike the 
ball when any part of his person is touching the surface ; C6)— if any 
player stop, catch, or bat the ball with his hands or arms; (c)— if any 
player, save the goal-tend or one taking his place, kick the ball with 
his foot or skate ; (f/)-— if the player, intentionally violate rule seven ; 
(e)— if any player hold another player on the surface or against the 



OPPTCIAIi SPORTING RULER. 205 

rail; (/)— if any player run about or strike the ball while one of his 
skates is off; (gr)— if any player stop before or immediate vicinity of 
the goal cage to readjust his skates; {ky-it any player put his stick 
))etween the arjn and body of another player. 

23. If the referee decides that the foul is made in the goal by the 
goal-tend, or by any player taking his place for the time being, that 
prevents a goal from being made, it sliall give a goal to the otlier 
team. 

If the goal-tend removes or attempts to remove the ball after it has 
gone into the goal he shall be lined $5, and the goal allowed to tho 
opposing side. 

24. Any act by any player, thai is manifestly intended as an unwar- 
rantable interference by one player with another, may be declared afoul 
by the referee from his own observation or upon complaint by the cap- 
tain of the offended side. 

25. If on account of absence of, or injury to any player, a substitute 
is necessary', and no regular member of the team is present, any 
person may be selected with the approval of the captain of the oppos- 
ing team given in the presence of the referee. 

26. If a dispute shall arise upon the surface, it shall be settled by 
the referee and the two captains. The players shall immediately 
resunae their positions on the floor and take no part in the discussion 
unless called upon by the referee. Any player violating this rule 
shall be fined by the referee not exceeding $5 for eacli and evei-y 
offence. 

27. If any club refuses to play a scedule ^vame, or to abide by the 
decision of the referee, they shall forfeit the game and be liable to 
expulsion, and the members leaving the floor shall be liable to expul- 
sion and subject to an individual fine of $25. 

28. If from any cause, during the game, play should be suspended, 
each player shall fall back to his position and remain quietly stiiding 
in an upright position, and shall rofi-ain from touching or knocking 
the ball. Any player violating this rule shall be lined $1, 



206 OFFTOTAL SPORTING RUTiES. 

29. Upon the beginning of play the visiting club shall take the goal 
nearest the entrance to the surface. 

30. Any player who does not answer to the call of the referee on the 
surface at the appointed time, shall be fined $1. 

31. No player shall w^ear any extra appliances larger than the 
oidinary size, such as masks, shin pads, chest protectors, etc., to 
impede the progress of the ball. Any player violating this rule shall 
be ordered from the floor by the referee to make such changes as the 
referee may (h^sire. The player shall also be liable to a fine of not 
more than $3 or less thaii $1. 

32. Any player throwing his stick at the ball or across the surface 
shall be fined $5, and for a second offence during the same game, $10 

Any player deliberately trippin j or striking another shall be fined 
not more than $10, and for a second offence during the same game, 
$20, and he shall also be ordered from the surface for the remainder 
of the garhe. 

Any players engaging in a broil or altercation upon the surface ' 
shall be immediately ordererl from the surface and fined $20 each, 
and they may be suspended or expelled, in addition to their fines, 
according to the gravity of their offence. 

Any player using profane or obscene language on the fioor, or 
acting in an ungentlemanly manner sufficient to attract the atten- 
tion of the spectators, shall be fined $10, and he may be suspended 
or expelled in addition to his fine. 

Any act by any player that is manifestly intended to delay or 
obstruct the game, or is contrary to the spirit of fair and honorable 
play, shall subject the player to a fine, suspension or expulsion, 
according to its gravity, by the referee or the Executive Committee. 

33. If, at any time or place, any player shall use abusive or insult- 
ing language, or offer violence to any referee, the latter may prefer 
charges against the player ; and the Executive Committee shall, upon 
the proving of such charges, fine the player fi-om $10 to $25, or expel 
him, according to tlie gravity of his offence. 



OFFICIAIj RP0ETIN« RUIiES. 207 

34. When any player is fined by a referee or by the directors of the 
league, he shall be notified of the same forthwith, as shall also his 
captain; in the former case by the referee, in the latter by the 
secretary. 

In case of a flne imposed by a referee the captain shall notify his 
manager of the fine, and the failure of the captain so to do shall not 
relieve the player or the club from any penalties for unpaid fines. 

Upon receipt of such notice by the manager, he shall forward to 
the secretary the amount of said fine, and no player shall be allowed 
to play in any league game while any fine upon him is unpaid. 

No referee shall remit a fine once imposed on the penalty of him- 
self incurring the same. 

Any fined player shall be considered eligible to play if his fine has 
been mailed to the secretary within twenty-four hours after the re- 
ceiving of the notice of the same from the secretary or the referee, 
the burden of proof being upon the manager, and the postmarks 
being evidence of the receipt and dispatch of letters. 

35. Any club playing a player who has unpaid fines shall, upon 
knowledge of the same coming to the secretary, be declared by him 
to have forfeited every such game to the opposing club. 

36. From any fine over five dollars imposed by a referee a player 
can appeal through his manager to the Executive Committee of his 
division; but the referee shall be upheld unless four managers vote 
against his decision, the interested manager refraining from voting 
and the vote being one of record. 

37. In case of any disturbance, unnecessary noise or interference 
with the game or the referee by any one else, the referee shall have 
the right to suspend the game until quiet is restored, or, if necessary, 
he may order the offending party or parties expelled from the rink 
In case his orders are not complied with, he may stop the game and 
award the game to the visiting club. 



RULERS FOR QlTOITINa. 



Aktiole I. — The players shall be paired by drawing num- 
bered ballots, each player to play the party holding the cor- 
responding number with his own, and no player to be a bye 
more than once in the match. 

Article II.— The match shall be played exclusively on the 
natural sod. 

Article III.— The motts shall be placed 18 yards ai)art— tlie 
t(>r> of the mott to be level with the ground. 

Article IV. — Players to stand at a distanc^> not exceeding 
tliree feet from the mott played from, but not in fiont of the 
mott. 

Article V. -The first player to lead to be decided by lot, the 
winner in the last end played to lead in the next end, and play- 
ing one quoit alternately with his opponent. 

Article VI.— Players to lemain at the end they play from 
until they have played th(4r last quoit from that end, but shall 
be allowed to name a person to put up a mark as a guide at the 
end to which he is about to play. 

Article VII.— The size of the quoit not to exceed eight 
inches in diameter. 

Article VIII .—All measurements to be made with the com- 
passes, and to be from the centre of the top of the mott to the 
nearest visible iron ; no obstruction (^f earth or quoits to be re- 
moved, except to find the top of the mott ; no quoit to count 
when the distance exceeds three feet from the mott. 

Article IX.— Should a quoit be broken during the match, 
the measure to be taken from the nearest portion of the quoit 
to the mott, and the player shall be privileged to use another 
I)air to finish his game. 

Article X— The use of improper language, or any act per- 
petrated to disconcert or interrupt the player while in the act 
of throwing his quoit, is prohibited— the player to have the 
privilege of throwing his quoit over again in the event of such 
having taken place. 

Article XL— A Eeferee shall be chosen by the Executive 
Committee to superintend and render all decisions in the 
match. 



rule:s f"or R^ciNa. 



POTATO RACING. 

The laws of Atiiletics as defined by the Amateur Athletic 
Union govern contests of this character. A potato race is 
usually 50 yards, they can be shorter. The potatoes are 
placed on the ground one yard apart, each contestant to have 
his line of potatoes. The start shall be from a horizontal line 
one and a half yards back of this line to be a receptacle for the 
potatoes — a basket, pail or pan can be used and the potatoes 
must be put in the receptacle by each of the contestants. 
SACK EACING. 

The laws of Athletics as defined by the Amateur Athletic 
Union govern sack racing. The Club or Association giving 
the games must furnish the sacks. All sacks must be of the 
same size and material. Contestants must examine the sacks 
closely before each race. Should the competitor's foot or feet 
come through the sack, he shall be disqualified by the referee 
and the men placed as though he had not competed. The sack 
must be tied around the neck of the competitor. 
OBSTACLE EACES. 

Obstacle Races can be of any distance. The New York A. C, 
of New York City, is about the only organization that gives 
this event regularly at its games. The distance is usually 
about 300 yards and several obstacles are used such as hurdles, 
diving through barrels, going under a net, climbing a rope and 
scaling tall ladders. The laws of Athletics as defined by the 
Amateur Athletic Union go^-ern obstacle races with the excep- 
tion that the men at starting lay on their back, their head on 
the starting line, body pointing perfectly straight back of the 
line and must remain so till the crack of the pistol. 
THREE-LEGGED RACES. 

The Laws of Athletics as defined by the Amateur Athletic 
Union govern contests of this character. The left and right 
leg of the two members of the team must be strapped together, 
one strap an inch or so below the knee, tightly fastened and 
another just above the ankle. Should one of these straps be- 
come lose during the race, the team meeting with this mishap 
should be disqualified. 



Go^^eri^ing ^o^ Racing. 



Rule 1.— Color, weight, name, and sex must be sent in at 
time of entry. If a pup, age must Ije stated. 

Rule 2.— All false entries shall be disqualified. 

Rule 3.— All dogs must be weighed in before the first heat 
is run, or they will forfeit the right to start. No ounces al- 
lowed; every dog to run at weight entered. 

Rule 4.— To ascertain if a dog is out of weight, put on two 
ounces; if the dog draws the two ounces, he is out of weight, 
and is disqualified. 

Rule 5.— Every dog to start from the mark on which it is 
handicapped. Scratch dog to start from the right side of 
track, and the other dogs to be placed next to him in accord- 
ance with this rule. If there are two scratch dogs, or two dogs 
on tlie same mark, they must toss for choice of position. The 
marks of all dogs remain the same, no matter who fails to 
weigh in, or who may be withdrawn. 

Rule 7.— All dogs to start by report of pistol. 

Rule 8.— One runner-up only shall he pllowed each dog, and 
•■' iuners-up mvist keep on a line with their dog. The referee 
shall have the power to disqualify a dog, if, in his opinion a 
runner-up is acting unfairly on the track. 

Rule 9.— Each runner-ub must be ten yards over the finish- 
ing line, before his dog finishes, or the dog will be disqualified. 
The runner-up for the second dog, in the final heat, has the 
privilege of weighing the winning dog. If the winning dog is 
four ounces over the weight at which he is entered, he is dis- 
qualified. 



t 



OPFIOIAL SPORTING RUIZES. 211 

KuLE 10.— All dogs to nm with colors on, but no dog to be 
disqualified should the color be omitted, either by accident or 
carelessness. 

EuLE 11.— In case of a dead heat in one of the rounds, it 
must be run over at once ; the party refusing to run, loses the 
heat, but the remaining do^ must run over the course, before 
the heat can be claimed as one. Should a dead heat occur in 
a final, the referee cannot order a run over, if the contestants 
agree to divide prize-money and bets. 

KuLE 12.— In case a dog is held at the mark, the pistol-Iirer 
shall have the right to declare all betting on the heat void. 
Any dog held at the mark in a final heat, will afterward be 
handicapped as if he had actually won. 

EuLE 13.— After the bell has been rung for a heat, five 
uiinutes will be allowed for dogs to be placed on their marks. 
Any dog failing to be at the marks on time, forfeits all rights. 

EuiiE 14.— No other attendents but the slipper and runner-up 
shall be allowed on the track at the marks. ■ Any pai-ty violat- 
ing this rule shall have his dog disqualified by the pistol-firen 

EuiiE 15.— The referee shall flag the color of the winning dog 
n eac;h heat. The referee's decision shall be final, and subject 
^o no appeal whatever. 




F^i^eorj^ Klyir^g Race Rules. 



1. Any fancier desiring to enter birds for competition and 
for record under the management of the Secretary and Race 
Committee, must first become a member of the Club. 

2. Tiie Club, in the records of birds, recognizes only the lib- 
erating station and the home loft. The home loft is that to 
which the bird is registered as belonging, 

3. Birds entered in a race must be at the appointed place for 
countermarking at the same time arranged, or be debarred 
from participating in the fly, for no birds will be received after 
that time. 

4. Countermarking of birds shall be (as far as practicable), 
by leg bands bearing a number or device, and the band must 
on the arrival of the bird be removed and turned over to the 
timer at the loft, in his presence to be mailed with signed 
report to the Secretary the day the bird arrived at home. 

5. Ail birds entered in a journey must bear, stamped on the 
first primal flight feather, the regular number by which it is to 
be distinguished and known, be it abird bearing a seamless band 
or otherwise. WJien a bird bears a seamless band, then that 
number and letter becomes its regular number. When the 
bird bears no seamless band a regular number must be obtained 
from the Secretary' , and entry blanks will be duly mailed by 
Secretary to competitors in each race, which must be neatly 
filled out as required, or the entry will not be received, 

6. The owner of a bird presenting it for a journey, relin- 
quishes all control of it until after the time of liberating for 
such a journey. 

7. Any interference on the part of an owner, or of any one 
interested-, directly or indirectly, in the result, with the in- 
structions or duties of the Secretary or Race Committee, or 
with the liberator, or with the birds after marking, will be 
debarred from the benefits of the fly. 

8. No one interested, directly in the result of a loft, shall be 
present during the tixne of countermarking ; that is, no one 
interested in any way for the success of that particular loft 
during the countermarking of those particular birds ; neither 
shall any such person appoint the timer or act as the timer at 
such loft. 



OFFTCIAIi SPOETINa TRTTIiES. 213 

9. The honors of a race being determined by the average 
velocity, all birds making the same speed under the same con- 
ditions are entitled to the honor that speed calls for. 

10. Time shall be verihod by a timer acceptable to the Secre- 
tary of the Club, or Race Committee, who shall be at the home 
loft from the earliest time at which a bird could arrive until 
dismissed by the owner or his representative, or until the 
time named as the close of a race has expired. 

11. The time of a bird's arrival in a race shall be taken at 
the click of the bob-wire after the bird is in, or the closing of 
the trap or door securing it at the loft. 

12. No young bird shall be eligible for young bird record 
unless bearing an official Club seamless band denoting year of 
hatch. 

13. The report of the timer at the loft shall be signed by the 
owner and the timer, to be mailed at once to the Secretary. 
In no case must the original be given into the possession of 
the owner or any one interested in the success of the loft, and 
must not leave the timer's possession until mailed by him to 
the Secretary. 

14. No race, unless specially agreed upon, shall be rain or 
shine ; but shall be upon the date named, or off, excepting from 
500 miles, when race is on until flown. 

15. In case there are returns before the timer's arrival at 
the loft, or in the timer's absence, the owner can report only 
by certified telegram to the Secretary, and the competitor, 
whom said timer represents, will be debarred from any inter- 
est in that race. An allowance of six minutes to the mile, and 
an additional minute for catching the bird, to be traveled on 
foot, in reaching the telegraph office, will be made by the Sec- 
retary in computing the actual time of arrival and speed 
made. All telegrams to be prepaid, and in case ttie Secre- 
tary's loft is unprotected, he can report to the President or 
competing member, holding the list of his birds' counter- 
marks. The endorsement of arrivals by neighbors, competi- 
tors or friends will not be entertained on any account. 

16. The time of start as given by the liberator's telegram 
shall be considered as advisory only. The time of start, from 
which the calculations for record are to be taken, shall be in 



214 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

writing, over the liberator's signature, and must be received 
by tlie Secretary direct fi'oiu the liberator. 

17. In case any timer or member fails to respond to tlie 
Secretary's notification and instructions, or tlie competing 
member to supply in ample time an acceptable substitute for 
the full carrying out of the same, or fails to render a satis- 
factory explanation, the said competing member may be held 
accountable to the Executive and Eaee Committees for neglect 
of duty, on a written complaint filed by the Secreta.Ty with 
the President, and be debarred from any interest in the par- 
ticular race in progress. 

18.— The Secretary is not to be held responsible for the non- 
compliance of liberators in carrying out the instructions of a 
flight, nor for the careless and incomplete performance of in- 
structions rendered by any timer or member, since the irreg- 
ularities may be beyond his control ; but it is duty and offi:^e 
to see that all acting timers and members are thoroughly 
conversant and familiar with the Eace Rules and require- 
ments, and to correct or adjust any discrepancy or irregularity 
in their work, or that of any timer or member, that may arise, 
as far as practicable, and with all possible dispatch, to secure 
indisputable and complete record for any flight that may be 
in progress, Failing this the Secretary may be held account- 
able for neglect of duty, on written charges being filed by any 
member with the President; sucli charges to be acted upon by 
the Executive and Race Committees. 

19.— Any direct refusal to comply with the Race Rules by a 
member of the Club forfeits all right to record in the races, 
if proven on investigation, and the Secretary and the Eace 
Committee may decline to handle his birds, and make com- 
plaint to the President. 

20.— Each loft can enter but twenty birds or less, in the old 
birds' races, and but twenty or less in the young bird's races. 

21.— In the pool prizes each member pays so much per bird 
of his entry as may be arranged. 

22.— On race days, when the timer arrives at the loft, there 
must be no birds at liberty belonging to said I oft, excepting 
those competing in the race or outs from previous tosses ; and 
arrivals must immediately be handed to the timer, bearing 
countermark and showing regular number on wing and colors 
for verification, with entry list in his possession. 



ROWING RULES 

OF THE 

National Association of Amateur Oarsmen. 



LAWS OF BOAT RACING. 



STARTING. 

1. All boat races shaU be started in the following man- 
ner : The starter, on being satisfied that the competitors 
are readj^ shall give the signal to start. 

2. If the starter considers the start false, he shall at 
once recall the boats to their stations, and any boat re- 
fusing to start again shall be disqualified. 

3. Any boat not at its post at the time specified shall 
be liable to be disquahfied bj^ the umpire. 

4. The umpire may act as starter if he thinks fit ; 
where he does not so act, the starter shall be subject to 
the control of the umpire. 

5. Boats shall be started by their sterns, and shall 
liave completed their course when the bows reach the 
finish. 

WATER. 

6. A boat's own water is its straight course, parallel 
with those of the other competing boats, from the sta- 
tion assigned to it at the start to the finish. 

7. Each boat shall keep its own water throughout the 



216 OFFICIAIj sporttn« efles. 

race, and any boat departing from its own water will 
do so at its peril. 

8. The umpire shall be sole judge of a boat's own 
water and proper course during the race. 

FOULS. 

9. It shall be considered a foul when, after the race 
has commenced, any competitor, by his oar, boat, or 
person, comes in contact with the oar, boat, or person of 
another competitor ; unless, in the opinion of the um- 
pire, such contact is so slight as not to influence the 
race. 

10. No fouling whatever shall be allowed ; the boat 
committing a foul shall be disqualified. 

11. The umpire may, during a race, caution any com- 
petitor when in danger of committing a foul. 

12. The umpire shall decide all questions as to a foul. 

13. A claim of foul must be made to the umpire by 
the competitor himself, and, if possible, before getting 
out of his boat. 

14. In case of a foul, the umpire shall have the power 
— (a) To place the boats (except the boat committing 
the foul, which is disqualified) in the order in which 
they come in. (&) To order the boats engaged in the 
race, other than the boat committing the foul, to row 
over again on the same or another day. (c) To restart 
the qualified boats from the place where the foul was 
committed. 

ACCIDENTS. 

15. Every boat shall abide by its accidents, except 
when, during a race, a boat while on its own water shall 
be interfered with hj an outside boat, the umpire may 
order the race to be rowed over, if, in his opinion, such 
interference materially affected its chances of winning 
the race. 



OFFICTATj SP0RTIN« PiTTLKS. 



ASSISTANCE. 



16. No boat shall be allowed to accompany a com- 
petitor for the purpose of directing his course or afford- 
ing him other assistance. The boat receiving such 
direction or assistance shall be disqualified, at the dis- 
cretion of the umpire. 

UMPIRE. 

17. The jurisdiction of the umpire extends over the 
race and all matters connected with it, from the time 
the race is specified to start until its final termination, 
and his decision in all cases shall be final and without 
appeal. 

18. The judge at the finish shall report to the umpire 
the order in which the competing boats cross the line, 
but the decision of the race shall rest with, and be de- 
clared by, the umpire. 

19. Any competitor refusing to abide by the decision, 
or to follow the directions of the umpire, shall be dis- 
qualified. 

20. The umpire, if he thinks proper, may reserve his 
decision, provided that in every case such decision be 
given on the day of the race. 

21. Contestants rowing a dead heat shall compete 
again after such interval as may be appointed, and the 
contestant refusing to so row shall be adjudged to have 
lost the race. 

TURNING RACES. 

22. In turning races, each competitor shall have a 
separate turning stake, and shall turn from port to 
starboard. Any competitor may turn any stake other 
than his own, but does so at his ueril. 



218 OFFlOTATi RPOBTTNO TITTLES. 

REGATTA RULES. 

Rule 1. This Regatta shall be open to all amateur 
clubs which have been duly organized three months 
prior to the holding of the Regatta. Entries of indi- 
viduals will not be received. 

•A. JNo club shall be allowed to enter any person who has not 
been a member thereof for at least three months preceding 
the Kegatta. or who has been entered in any race from any 
other club during- that time, or ivhoHe residence during that 
period is more than fifty miles from the dab he represents ; 
nor shall any entry be received from a club which shall include 
in its list of members any professional oarsman or athlete. 

3. The Regatta Committee shall appoint as Secretary 
any person it may deem proper. 

Any Club intending to compete for any of the prizes 
must give due notice to the Secretary of the Regatta 
Committee on or before the day appointed for closing 
the entries. Entries shall close two weeks before the 
date of the Regatta. 

4. There shall be sent to the Secretary of the Regatta 
Committee in all cases of entries for eights, a list of not 
more than twelve names ; for fours, not more than six 
names ; for pair oars and double sculls, not more than four 
names ; and for single sculls, not more than one name, 
and from these the actual crews shall be selected. 

The name of the Captain or Secretary of each Club 
entering for any race shall be sent at the time of entrance 
to the Secretary of the Regatta Committee. 

A copy of the entrance list shall be forwarded by the 
Secretary to the Captain or Se(n-etary of each Club so 
entered. 

5. No assumed names shall be given to the Secretary. 

6. No one shall be allowed to be entered twice for the 
same race. 

7. The Secretary shall not be permitted to declare 



OFFIOTAIi RPORTTNrt RULES. 219 

any entry, nor to repoi-t the state of the entrance list, 
until such list shall be closed. 

8. Objections to any entry shall be made in writing to 
the Secretary of the Regatta Committee within seven 
days from the declaration of the entries, when the said 
Committee shall investigate the grounds of objection, if 
any, and decide thereon forthwith. 

9. The races at each Eegatta shall consist of — 
Single-scull shells, senior. Four-oared shells, senior. 
Single-scull shells, junior. Four-oared shells, junior. 
Pair-oared shells. Eight-oared shells, senior. 
Double-scull shells. Eight-oared shells, intermediate. 

Entrance money for each boat shall be paid to the Secretary 
at the time of entering, as follows : 

Eight-oars, $20; four-oars, $15; pair-oars, $10; double- 
sculls, $10; single-sculls, $§. 

10. All races with the exception of the eight-oared race, 
shall be one mile and a half, uriih one turn. The eight-oared 
races shall be one mile and a half straight away. 

11. A meeting of the Regatta Committee shall be held 
immediately preceding the Regatta, at which the Rep- 
resentative of each crew or club entered shall deliver to 
the Secretary of the Regatta Committee a list contain- 
ing the names of the actual crew appointed to contend 
in the ensuing races, to which list the names of two 
other members may be added, either of whom may be 
substituted for any one of the crew in the event of ill- 
ness or accident, subject to Rule 12. 

12. No member of a Club shall be allowed to be sub- 
stituted for another who has already rowed in a heat ; 
nor shall any member of a Club be allowed to row with 
more than one crew for the same prize. 

13. In the event of a dead heat tailing place the same 
(irews shall contend again, after such interval as the 
Regatta Committee may appoint ; any crew refusing 
shall be adjudged to have lost the heat. 

14. In each class two or more entries shall be required 
to insure a race, and should withdrawals, after the en- 



220 OFFICIAL SPORTING KULES. 

tries are closed, reduce the number to one boat, the crew 
thereof must row over the course to be entitled to the prize. 

15. Heats and stations shall be drawn for by the Regatta 
Committee in the presence of such competitors, or their 
representatives, as may attend, after due notice has been 
given of a meeting of the Committee for that purpose. 

16. The Regatta Committee shall choose an umpire, a judge 
at the turn and a judge at the finish. 

17. The laws of boat-racing adopted by this Association 
shall be observed at this Regatta, and its definition of an 
amateur oarsman shall govern the qualifications of each 
competitor. 

18. Entries for junior races shall be governed by the follow- 
ing definitions of juniors, adopted at the meeting of the 
Executive Committe, held April 26, 1884 ; and as to junior 
coxswain adopted January 14, 18;^3 : 

A junior sculler is one who has ne\'er pulled in a senior, nor 
won a junior scull race. 

A junior oarsman is one who has not pulled an oar in a 
senior race, or been a winning oarsman in a junior race. 

Competitions with members of his own Club will not effect 
the standing as a junior of any oarsman or sculler. 

The qualification of a junior oarsman or sculler shall relate 
to each time of his coming to the starting post, whether in a 
trial or a final heat. 

A junior coxswain is one who has never, in a race, steered a 
senior crew, nor a winning junior crew. 

19. Definitions of intermediates (adopted at a meeting of the 
Executive Committee, held January 14, 1893) : 

An intermediate scull'.r is one who has never rowed in a 
feiMiior race, nor won any other than a junior race. 

All intermediate oarsman is one who has never rowed i>i 
a senior race, nor won any other than a junior race. 

An intermediate coxswain is one who has never, in a race, 
steered a senior crew, nor a winning intermediate crew. 

20. The prizes shall be delivered, at the conclusion of the 
Regatta, to their respective Avinners, who, in case of a chal- 
lenge prize, shall furnish such bonds for the same as may be 
required by the Trustees. 



OFFICIAL SPORTING KULES. 221 

21. Any participant in the races shall have the rij2:ht at any- 
time previous to the awarding of tlie prizes to object to any 
Club or person participating in, or being declared the winner 
of, any race where it may appear to tlie person making the 
objection that sucli Club or person has not entered such 
contest with the intention of participating therein in an 
honest manner, and mailing all reasonable efforts to be suc- 
cessful. The evidence shall be presented to the Regatta 
Committee, who, after hearing the accused, shall, by a major- 
ity vote, decide the objection. They shall have power to order 
the race rowed over, or to confer the prize on whomsoever in 
their judgment is entitled to it. 

22. All questions of eligibility, qualification or interpreta- 
tion of the rules, shall be referred to the Committee, and its 
decision shall be final. 

23. The Committee shall have power to reject any entry 

24. Only the winners of trial heats shall compete in the 
final heat; except when in any trial heat of a Eegatta a foul 
occurs, under such conditions and with such results that the 
laws of boat-racing, the exigencies of time and the circum- 
stances of the Regatta do not afford full justice to any con- 
testant, the umpire may permit such aggrieved competitoi, 
to start in a subsequent or in the final heat, as, iu the judg- 
ment c^" the Regatta Committee, is most convenient. 



RACQUET RULES 

OF THE ^ 

New York Racquet Court Club. 

1. The game to be fifteen up. At 13 all, the out- 
players may set to 5; and at 14 all, to *.'.; provided this be 
done before another ball is served. 

2. On commencing the game, in a double match, 
whether odds be given or not, the side going in first to 
serve shall have but one hand; but in a single match 
the party receiving odds shall be entitled to them from 
the beginning. 

3. The ball shall be served alternately right and left, 
beginning on whichever side the server chooses. 

4. The server must stand with at least one foot in the 
' 'service box," and serve the ball over the hne on the 
front wall and within the proper service-court; other- 
wise it is a fault. Serving two faults, missing the ball, 
or the ball served striking anywhere before it reaches 
the front wall, is a out-hand. 

5. All balls served or played into the galleries, hitting 
a beam, iron rod, the telltale, or any wood or netting, or 
above the cemented lines of the courts, although they 
may return to the floor, count against the striker. 

6. A ball, to be fair, must be struck before or on the 
first bound, and must noc touch the floor, the galleries, 
the telltale, or any wood or netting, or above the ce- 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 223 

mented lines of the courts, before or after reaching the front 
wall. 

7. Until a ball has been touched or bounded twice it may be 
struck at any number of times. 

8. Only the player to whom a ball is served may return it. 

9. A ball touching the striker or his partner before the 
second bound loses a hand or an ace. 

10. If a fair ball hits the striker's adversary below or on the 
knee, it is a let, and shall be played over; if above the knee it 
counts against the striker. 

11. The out-players may once only in each game exchange 
courts to return service. 

12. Every plaj^er should try to keep out of his adversary's 
way When a hinder is claimed it shall be decided by the 
marker. 

13 The marker's decision, on all questions referred to liim 
shall be final. If he is in doubt he should ask advice ; and if 
he cannot decide positively, the ace is to be played over. 

THE DOUBLE, OR FOUR-HANDED, GAME. 

1. The Laws of the Single Game shall apply to the Double 
or J^our-handed (rame, except as set forth 'in the followinir 
Laws. "^ 

2. Only one of the side which has won the spin shall serve at 
the hrst time of being hand-in, in any game ; at all subsequent 
times, the players on each side shall serve in the same order in 
which they began serving. 

3. One player on the hand-out side may stand where he 
pleases, to receive the service, but his partner and the server's 
partner must stand behind the server until the service has 
been delivered. 

• ^' }l *«® ^^^^ served touch the server's partner before touch- 
ing the floor twice, whether it was, or would have been, a fault 
or not, the server shall lose his right of service, and the next 
hand-in shall serve. 

5. The players on the hand-out side may choose the order ip 
which they shall receive the service, and they shall adhere to 
that order, and shall only change it once in any g^ime, or at 
theendof any game, of a rubber. 

6. If the ball in-play touch the striker's partner, it shall 
count against them ; that i-. if the striker was hand-out. the 
other side shall score an ace; if he was hand-in, his side shall 
lose one hand-in :— 

Except, in case the ball in-play touch the striker's partner 
after it has been hit at and missed by one of their opponents 
when It shall count against such opponents; that is if thev 
were hand-')ut, the other side shall scoi-e an ace; if they were 
liand-in, they shall lose one hand-in. 



SHl^F'FIELD RULKS 

— FOR THE — 

Oox^err:irTi^ei\t of F*rof essioraal Racing. 



Any man entering a handicap except in liis proper name, 
or liaving changed liis residence, must state his late and pres- 
ent abode at tlie time of entry, or, having won a handicap at 
any time and not stating it or in any way to lead the handi- 
cappers astray, for any of these offences he will be disqualified 
and his entrance and acceptance money v/ill be forfeited. 

Any man winning a liandicap after the entries are published 
will be put back two yards, and one yard for being second, or 
any man running second to the winner in either of his heats 
will be put back half a yard. Penalties not accumulative. 

Any man leaving or getting over his mark with either foot 
before the pistol is fired, will be put back one yard for the first 
offence, two yards for the second, and the third time disquali- 
fied. 

If any man gets over his mark and after being put back runs 
a dead heat, in running off such heat, the man penalizedimust 
Btart from his original mark. 

No objection will be entertained unless made by 8 P. m. on 
the first day's running, and the person making such objection 
must deposit the sum of five pounds in the hands of the pro- 
prietor, and should tiie objection made not be sustained, the 
money deposited shall bo forfeited and go towards paying 
expences, to be decided by the proprietor and the committee. 

In the event of a dead heat being run and one of the men af- 
terwards walks over, after such heats, all bets about either 
man for that heat shall be added together and divided. 

Should the final result in a dead heat, the two dead heaters 
must divide the first and second prize equally and all bets 
made about either man winning the liandicap right out, must 
be added together and di\ided. 

In the event of any disturbance taking place or darkness 
coming on, the proprietor or the committee shall have the 
power to postpone the running of any heat or heats until the 
following day, except when a Sunday intervenes, in which case 
it shall be adjourned until the Monday. 

The decision of the leferee shall be final without any appeal 
to a court of law. 



SKATINa RULERS, 



I^ro^ramme of tHe National At:nateur- Sl^atlnii 
Association, for F^igur-e SUatir^g Corxtests. 



The object of this programme is to set forth the movements 
of tigure sliating so as best to test the prolicieney of skaters, 
and in an order that will economize the strength of the con- 
testants. The movements are arranged under comprehensive 
fundamental heads, designed to include everytliing appertain- 
ing to the art. It is to be understood tliat whenever practica- 
ble all movements are to be executed both forward and back- 
ward, on right foot and on left. 

1. Plain forward and backward skating in various ways. 

2. Outside edge roll forward. 

3. Outside edge roll backward. 

4. Inside edge roll forward. 

5. Inside edge roll backward. 

6. Figure eight on one foot forwaid. 

7. Figure eight on one foot backward. 

8. Cross roll forward in field and eights, single and double 
circle. 

9. Cross roll backward in field and eights, single and double 
circle. 

10 Change of edge roll forward, beginning on either outside 
or inside edge. 

11. Change of edge roll backward, beginning on either out- 
side or inside edge. 

12. Spread eagle on inside and outside edges. 

13. Curved angles-threes, single, double, chain and flying 
beginning on inside or outside edge. 



226 OFFIOIATi SPORTING RULES. 

14. Curved angles— roi'king turns from outside edge to out- 
side edge, or from inside edge to inside edge, forward ana 
backward. 

15. Curved angles— crosscuts or anvils. 

16. Grapevines, including Pliiladelphia 'twist." 

17. Toe and heel movements, embracing pivot circling, toe 
spins (pirouettes) and movements on both toes. 

18. Single and double flat foot spins cioss-foot and two-foot 
whirls. 

19. (a) Serpentines on one foot and on both feet ; (b) change 
of edge, single and double. 

20. Loops and ringlets on inside and outside edges, single 
an^ in combination. 

21>> Display of complex movements, at the option of the con- 
testant. 

22. Specialties, embracing original and peculiar movements. 

If limited as to time, the judges may select what is thought 
best. 

This schedule is intended as a guide, as well to skaters as to 
judges, who should continually bear in mind that grace is tho 
most desirable attribute of artistic skating. 

The rules of the National Amateur Skating Association are 
as follows : 

The officials of a tigure skating competition shall be three 
judges and one scorer. 

The judging shall be done on a scale of points running from 
the number of contestants down to 0. 

Experience has shown the following to be the most practic- 
able method of scoring : 

"The number to be given to the one standing first in any 
section shall be that of the number of contestants. Should 
there be two or more of equal merit, they should be marked 
the same number ; and the one coming next below takes the 
number resulting from subtracting the number of competitors 
above him from the number entered. A total failure Is marked 
zero." 

A fall does not necessarily constitute a failure. 

At the conclusion of each figure each judge shall, without 
consultation with his associates, mark the number of points 
which he awards to each competitor. 



OFFIClAIi SPORTING RULES. 227 

These reports shall then be compared, and in case of disa- 
greement the majority shall decide. 

The scorer shall keep an accurate record of the points allowed 
to each contestant on each figure, but shall not be permitted 
to inform any competitor of his standing until the close of the 
entire competition. 

In deciding the relative merits of competitors, special atten- 
tion will be given to grace and ease of position, accuracy in 
skating to place and ability to use both feet equally well. 

Competitors before coming on the ice will draw lots to de- 
cide the order in which they shall skate, and shall preserve 
this order throughout, except that the competitor who leads 
in each figure shall skate last in the next on the programme, 
the others preserving their relative succession. 

If, in the opinion of the judges, any competitor shall not 
have skated in the first eleven numbers sufficiently well, they 
may require him to retire. 

Any competitor refusing to skate when called upon in his 
proper turn without a reason satisfactory to the judges, will 
be ruled out of the competition, and shall leave the ice. 

The decision of the majority of the judges shall be final witli 
regard to all questions of disqualifications, interpretations of 
the programme, and merits of the competitors. 

SPEED SKATING. 

1. Three tests shall be established. The First Class or High- 
est Badge shall be awarded to any skater who shall skate a 
mile with not less than three turns in 3 minutes and 30 sec- 
onds. The Second Class Badge to any skater who accomplishes 
it in 4 minutes, and the Third Class Badge will be awarded for 
4 minutes 30 seconds. 

2. The Association shall also give, each year championship 
races at such distances and at such places as the Executive 
Committee may select, and shall give public notice of times 
and places as long in advance as the weather permits. 



Riile^ for Sno^5^"*-Slr(^oeing. 



AETICLE I.— OF THE SHOE. 

The snow-.slicm shall be made of wood, and hide or gut. 

The shoes, Including strings, shall not be less than IX 
pounds, in weight at start and finish of competitions, and shall 
measure not less than 10 inches gut, in width. They shall be 
weighed at the start and finish of each competition by a per- 
son appointed for that purpose. 

In boy's races, snow-shoes of any Avidth and weight may be 
used. 

Objections to a competitor's shoes shall be made before the 
start. 

ARTICLE II.— OF STARTING. 

All starting shall be by report of pistol after after a prelim- 
inary caution. 

A snap cap is not a start. 

If any competitor starts before the signal, he shall be put 
back one yard for each of the first two Oifences, and disqualified 
upon a third. 

ARTICLE III.— OF POSITION at starting. 

Competitors shall draw lots for choice of position at starting. 

In races in heats, the competitors' positions at the end of 
each heat shall decide their choice of positions at starting for 
the next heat. 

ARTICLE IV.— HEAT RACES. 

A competitor must win two heats, to be winner of the race. 

A competitor not winning a heat or making a dead heat m 
the first three heats will not be allowed to start in any subse- 
quent hoat. 

A dead heat shall be counted in the race and shall be consid- 
ered a heat which is undecided only as between the competi- 



OFFICIAL. SPORTING RUIjES. 229 

tors making it, and it sliall be cou.sidered a heat lost by all the 
other competitors. 

The rank of couipetitors.. other than the winner, shall be de- 
cided by their position in each heat of tlie liace i. e., a com- 
petitor winning a heat shall be considered better than one 
making a dead heat, and a dead heat better than only second 
place in any heat, and a second place better than only third in 
any heat. 

In the event of two or more competitors being equal for sec- 
ond or third places, such competitors shall run off a deciding 
heat. 

In all cases competitors must race out their distance to 
qualify for starting in succeeding heats. 

AKTICLE v.— BRUSHING. 

No competitor shall cross the track ef another competitor to 
take it, until he shall be six feet in advance of that competitor. 

In races round a course, a competitor must pass on the out- 
side, but if a competitor in advance deliberately draws out of 
his track and leaves his successor room to pass him on the in- 
side, that successor may do so. 

AKTICLE VI.— DISQUALIFICATIONS. 

The judges may disqualify a competitor for persistent false 
starts, for disobedience to their orders, or to those of the 
starter, or for deliberately jostling or impeding any other 
competitor. 

ARTICLE VII.— WINNING. 

That competitor is winner, whose breast first reaches the 
tape. 

ARTICLE VIII.— HURDLE RACES. 

In hurdle races, a runner who leaps on a hurdle, runs through 
or around it, vaults it, or passes it in any other way than by 
fairly leaping over it, commits a foul and shall be disqualified. 

ARTICLE IX.— RUNNING FRAUDULENTLY- 

Whenever a competitor shall run not to win, he shall be dis- 
qualified for twelve months from starting in any race gov- 
erned bv these rulef« 



380 OFFICIAIi SPORTING RUIjES. 

ARTICLE X.— LOSING a shoe. 

So long as both snow-shoes remain attached to the feet oi- 
ankles, a runner may continue his race. 

A runner cannot, however, carry his shoe in his liand in 
event of its slipping from his feet. 

ARTICLE XI.— ASSIST ANOE. 

It shall be considered foul for any competitor to be assisted 
by any one during a race when such assistance necessitates 
touching the competitor. 

ARTICLE XII.— ACCIDENTS AND INTERFERENCES . 

In cases where a competitor meets with an accident in or- 
dinary course, the Judges may not interfere. 

If an accident be caused by the friends of another competi- 
tor in assisting him, then the other competitor shall be dis- 
qualified. 

ARTICLE XIII.— TIME BETWEEN HEATS. 

In all races in heats, where the distance shall be 200 yards or 
less, the time allowed between heats shall be not less than two 
minutes, nor jno4-e than five minutes. In all cases in heats, 
where the distance exceeds 200 yards and does not exceed half 
a mile, the time allowed between heats shall be not less than 
four minutes, nor more than ten minutes. 

ARTICLE XIV.— HOUR of starting. 

The Judges shall decide all matters of time connected with 
starting. 

No delay after the appointed time for starting shall be per- 
mitted for the convenience of any competit )r. 

ARTICLE XV.— OBJECTIONS. 

Any objetJtion to a competitor for fouling must bf> made 
within five minutes after the conclusion of the race. 

Objection as to qualifications, entries, etc., must be made before 
the start, unless the fact on which the objection is based was 
not known to the objector at the time. In this after case ob- 
jections may be made within forty -eight hours after the race 

This does not apply to Sec. 4, of Article 1. 



OPFIOIAL SPORTING RULES. 281 

ABTIOLE XVI.— POST entries. 

Post entries, except for club or consolation races, shall not 
be allowed. 

ARTICLE XVII.— JUDGES betting. 
Judges must not bet upon a race over which they preside. 

ARTICLE XVIII. —DECISIONS and appeals. 

The decisions of the Judges on matters of fact is final. 

A club shall be considered ihe best judge of its own by-laws, 
qualifications af membership, etc. 

From the decision of the Judges, on any question of inter- 
pretation of law, an appeal shall lie to three experts, the appel- 
lant selecting one, the Judges, and these two deciding on a 
third. Such appeal must be declared at once. 

ARTICLE XIX.— distances. 

In races in heats there shall be no distance post when the 
course is less than 44:0 yards. 

When the course is of 440 yards, the distance post shall be 50 
yards from the finish. When the course is of 880 yards the 
distance post shall be 80 yards from the finish. 

If a competitor shall not have reached the distance post 
by the time the winner shall have reached the winning post, 
such competitor shall be distanced, and must not stai-t for any 
succeeding heat of such race. 

ARTICLE XX.— measurement op track. 

The track shall be measured three feet from the Ijushes, 

ARTICLE XXL— GREEN runner. 

A green runner is one who has never won a first prize in any 
snow-shoe race. 



SHuiffle Board Ruiles. 

The length of the board must be thirty feet, and the width 
must not exceed twenty inches. 

The Shuffle Board should be made of one solid plank, of 
white wood or white pine, and as thick as possible, to prevent 
warping 

The surface of the board shall not exceed three feet from 
the floor. 

The gutter must be four a half inches wide, and shall go en- 
tirel y around the board. 

Four round pieces or weights, of hard, cast iron, marked A, 
and 4 marked B, to distinguish the opponents, are used, each 
weighing from three-quarters of a pound to one pound, about 
two inches in diameter, and half an inch thick, which should be 
line castings and smooth on the bottom. 

Before commencing to play, the surface of the board should 
be sprinkled with very fine sand, perfectly dry, and during 
the game, players can sand the board if they desire. 

About five inches from the ends of the board a straight line 
should be drawn, and should be parallel with the ends. This 
is called the "deuce" line. 

All pieces over the deuce line count two, and if a piece hangs 
over the end of the board, it is calleda "ship," and counts three. 

When at the end of round no piece is "in," then that piece 
which lays nearest to the line counts one point. Twenty-one 
points constitute a game. 

In a four-handed game, one opponent from each side must 
stand at the end of the board, not changing from one end of 
the board to the other, as in a regular game, but remain as they 
started, shoving the pieces alternately; the winning man at 
either end always taking the lead. 

When either piece rebounds from the end of the board, said 
piece does not count and must be taken off. 

The scoring board is like a crib board, placed against waW 
with pegs to count with. Board and table should be fastened 
against wall to insure firmness. 



W^RICST^I.INa RITLKB, 



COLLAR AND ELBOW. 

Rule 1.— The men shall wear short coats or jackets made of 
canvas, not extending: below the hips, with strong collar and 
the elbow suitable for the grasp of an opponent. They shall 
wear rubber sandals on the feet. 

2.— Each man shall take hold of the collar of his opponent 
with his right hand opposite the left shoulder and under the 
left ear, while with the left hand he must take hold of the 
right elbow of his opponent's jacket sleeve, and, under no con- 
sideration shall a wrestler allow the thumb of his left hand to 
slip inside of the right sleeve of his opponent's jacket. An 
offender shall be cautioned for the first offence, and forfeit a 
fall for the second. 

3.— Both men shall stand up breast and breast, with limber 
arms, and show fair and equal play with the feet. 

4.— Either man breaking his hold with one or both hands, to 
save himself from a fall shall forfeit said fall. 

5 —Kicking the limbs or privates is strictly prohibited ; a 
contestant guilty of either offence to forfeit the match. 

6.— All falls must be square back falls, either two hips and 
one shoulder, or two shoulders and one hip to strike the carpet 
simultaneously to constitute a fall. 

7.— Striking upon the face, side, or knees, is no fall, and noth- 
ing shall be allowed for forcing a man from such positions to 
his back. 

8.— Going down on one or both knees is fair, as long as no 
holds are broken. 

9.— Butting is foui, and shall be pimishable with a forfeiture 
of the match. 

10.— A rest of at least ten and not more then twenty minutes 
shall be allowed between each fall. 



284 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

11.— Matches '^hall be made for first fall, best two in three, or 
three in five, to win according to mutual agreement. 

12.— The enclosure for a wrestling contest shall be twenty- 
four feet square, and nobody shall be allowed inside except 
the referee and two umpires. 

13.— When the articles are signed, a final stakeholder and an 
umpire shall be chosen for each man. 

14.— In case the contestants or umpires cannot agree upon a 
referee, the stakeholder shall appoint one. 

15.— The decision of the referee shall in every case be final, 
and the stakes shall be paid to the winner in accordance with 
his decision. 

CATCH AS CATCH CAN. 

Rule 1. Either opponent may press arm (not arms), 
around his antagonist's neck, but throttling is not allowed. 

EuLE 2. Tripping your opponent is fair. 

Rule 3. Two shoulders down constitute a fall (no flying 
fall to count). A refc^ree should follow up the movements of 
the jnen, and when the men are down a.nd struggling on the 
carpet, he ought to get down likewise, so that he will be bet- 
ter enabled to see when the two shoulders of either of the men 
are down, and it is always advisable for the referee to allow 
one second before rendering his decision. If any doubt should 
arise as to the fairness of a fall, the referee should allow the 
match to proceed. 

Rule 4. The match ought to be decided first fall best two 
in three, or three in five, according to agreement between the 
men 

Rule 5. No less than 10 (ten) or more than 15 (fifteen) min- 
utes rest allowed between each back fall. 

Rule 6. Letting go either hand, changing holds or grab- 
bing by the legs shall be allowed. 

Rule 7. The ring should be at least 24 feet square if on a 
"stage, but in a field or park, it is better to have more space. 

Rule 8. In all matches, the wrestlers should wear either 
socks or stockings, or else barefooted, and they will not be 
permitted to scratch or suffocate, pull each others ears, or 
commit any other unfair act toward each other. Neither will 
they be allowed to be rubbed with grease or resin on their 



OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 235 

hands, or any pernicious drug or any part of their bodies. 
The competitors will be allowed one seconder each, and who 
must not be changed during the progress of the match, 
neither will a seconder be allowed to touch his own oi his op- 
ponent's man while wrestling. Touching either competitor 
while wrestling will be a disqualilication against the offender 
and his party, and the referee shall decide against them. If 
the wrestlers get entangled with what may be considered the 
boundary of the ring, they shall draw off, and renew the con- 
test with the same holds as when they drew off. 

Rule 9. All outside bets go with the stakes. The stake- 
holder or his deputy to announce on the premises or grounds 
where the match takes place, publicly at all times when a 
match is not linished which way the stakes go. 

Rule 10. Should any match not be linished on the day ap- 
pointed, both wrestlers to meet and weigh (if required), and 
commence wrestling at the same time and place, day by 
day (Sunday excepted), until the match is finished, except 
otherwise agreed upon ; but in the event of one wrestler gain- 
ing a fall, he can claim the stakes in the absence of any ar- 
rangement to continue the match. In the event of a wrestler 
giving up the match, when he has won a back fall, the stakes 
shall be claimed by his opponent. Neither wrestler is per- 
mitted to stop for the purpose of being refreshed, unless mut- 
ually agreed upon by the wrestlers. 

Rule 11, Should the referee not be chosen when the men 
sign articles, and the wrestlers with their backers fail to agree 
upon one within 15 minutes from the time of entering the ring, 
the stakeholder is empowered to act in that capacity, or else 
appoint one. 

Rule 12. If any disagreement arises out of any match 
through any nice or fine point not provided for in these rules, 
the dispute shall be settled by the referee, and his decision 
shall be final in all cases. These rules are conclusive and 
binding. 

GR^CO-ROMAN. 

Rule l.— Wrestlers are allowed to take hold from the head 
and not lower than the belt or waist, (rrasping the legs is 
strictly forbidden . 



236 OFFICIAL SPORTING RULES. 

2.— The men shall use open hands and are not allowed to 
strike, scratch (jr clasp hands. 

3. — Wrestlers shall not be allowed to clasp one of their own 
hands within the other, nor interlace their fingers, but they 
can grasp their own wrist to tighten their hold around their 
opponent's body, or otherwise, 

4.— The principals shall have their finger nails and hair cut 
short, and must wrestle either barefooted or in their socks. 

5._{^hould a wrestler fall on his knee, shoulder or side, a new 
start must be made. 

6.— Should the principals roll over each other, the one whose 
shoulder shall touch the ground first is deemed conquered. 

7.— A rest of not less than ten nor more than twenty-five 
minutes shall be allowed between each bout. 

8.— The shoulders touching the ground simultaneously con- 
stitutes a fall. 

9. — At the posting of the first deposit a final stakeholder 
shall be chosen, and, in case the principals cannot agree upon 
a referee, the stakeholder shall appoint one. 

10.— All matches shall be made for first fall, best two in 
three, or three in five, to win, according to mutual agreement. 

11.— When a postponement is necessary, the referee shall 
name a time and place of meeting should the principals fail to 
come to any mutual agreement on a time and place. 

DEVONSHIRE. 

Rule 1.— On " Time " being called the principals shall shake 
hands and let go, otherwise no fall will count. 

2.— The men shall wear loose jackets and will not be permit- 
ted to catch hold both in one hand, or to catch across and 
thereby choke an opponent. 

3.— The men shall wrestle in boots or shoes, devoid of iron or 
steel, and either man guilty of kicking an opponent above the 
knees shall forfeit the fall. 

4.— A principal falling upon his knees, or putting out a hand 
to prevent a fall, shall lose the bout. The referee to be judge 
of same. 

5 __Two shoulders and one hip or two hips and one shoulder 
striking the ground simultaneously shall constitute a fall, but 
should an opponent touch the ground first, or at the same 



OFFICIAL SPORTTN^a KTTT.KS. 237 

time, the fall shall not count. The fall must be clean, neither 
part of the opponents' bodies touching the ground before the 
fall. 

6.— Falling on one or both knees, or touching the ground 
with the hands, breaks the hold, and the men shall wait for 
the referee to call " Time." 

7.— The men shall grasp hold of the jackets only, but in play 
it is allowable to catch around the neck or to span the body, 
but not to touch lower than the belt line. Catching by the legs 
or waist-bands shall be deemed a foul, and the man guilty of 
such an offence shall forfeit a fall. 

SIDE HOLD. 

Rule 1.— The principals shall toss for choice of holds. 

2. — Each man shall take ^lold of an opponent's hip or belt 
with one hand, and with the other his antagonist's hand. 

3.— A contestant whose back strikes fairly on the ground 
shall be deemed to have lost one fall, and all attempts to pull 
or turn his opponent over shall not count. 

4.— A man breaking his hold, before one or the other is 
thrown, shall forfeit a fall. 

5.— The contestants are permitted to drop on one or both 
knees and rise again, and accept every fair and honorable 
means to gain a fall from his opponent. 

6. — The men shall wrestle in stocking feet or light shoes, 
and either man grabbing a contestant's leg shall forfeit a fall. 

7.— A rest of not less than ten nor more than twenty min- 
utes shall be used between each fall. 

8.— The match to be first fall, best two in three, or three in 
five, according to mutual agreement. 

9.— The ring shall be twenty-four feet square, or as near 
that size as practicable, and not one to be allowed inside ex- 
cepting the referee and two umpires. 

10.— A referee shall be chosen at the posting of the tirst de- 
posit, and his decisions shall be deemed final and without ap- 
peal, and all stakes, gate money, and outside bets shall be paid 
accordingly. 

CUMBERLAND AND WESTMORELAND. 
Rules. — On taking hold, the wrestlers stand up chest to 
chest, each placing his chin on his opponent's right shoulder, 



288 OFFICIAL SPORTING RUIiES. 

and grasping him round the body, each placing his left arm 
ubove the right of his antagonist. 

When both men have got hold, and are fairly on their guard, 
the play commences, and, with the exception of kicking, they 
are allowed to use every legitmate means to throw each other. 

If either party breaks his hold, that is loses his grip, though 
not on the ground, and the other still retains his hold, the one 
so leaving loose shall be the loser. 

If either man touches the ground with one knee only, or any 
other part of his body, though he may still retain his hold, he 
shall not be allowed to recover himself, but shall be deemed 
the loser. 

If both fall to the ground, the man who is first down or falls 
under the other shall be the loser ; but if they fall side by side , 
or otherwise, so that the umpires cannot decide which was 
first on the ground, it shall be what is technicallv termed a 
" dog fall," and shall be wrestled over again. 



CROSS-COXJNTRV RULES 

OF THE. 



SLOW CHASES. 

1. There shall be two hares, one master of the pack, 
and two whips, to be appointed by the Club captain, or 
other recognized authority. 

2. The hares shall be allowed a start of from five to 
ten minutes, at the discretion of the captain. 

3. The master, who shall act as pacemaker, shall have 
sole control of the pack, and, until the break is ordered, 
he shall, at his pleasure, appoint temporary pacemakers 
at any period of the chase. 

4. The members of the pack must keep within hailing 
distance of the master, and under ordinary circum- 
stances must always keep behind the master until the 
break for home is ordered. 

5. Only one break shall be ordered by the master, and 
then only for home ; such break shall never be more 
than a mile. 

6. It shall be the duty of the whips to keep the pack 
together, and to collect and assist all stragglers. 

FAST CHASES. 

7. In fast chases there shall be two hares, who shall 
be allowed a start of from.five to fifteen minutes, to be 



240 omciAii spoETixa i^ut.es. 

fixed by the captain after considering the relativt 
ability of both pack and hares. 

8. The scent shall be laid from the start, and each 
hound may run at his own pace. 

9. It shall be in the discretion of the captain, or other 
officer acting in his stead, to order a break for home, or 
to allow the pack to race from start to finish. 

GENERAL. 

10. Club runs shall be runs for which no scent is laid, 
but in all other conditions must conform to those of a 
slow chase. 

11. In all chases the hares shall lay a fair and con- 
tinuous trail throughout, and shall not be allowed to 
double on their trail ; they shall be allowed to cross 
fordable streams only, and must surmount all obstacles 
over which they lay the trail. 

12. In all chases the hares must keep within haihng 
distance of each other. 

13. Under no circumstances must the pack follow the 
line of sight when the hares are seen, but must alwavs 
follow the trail. 

14. In all chases the break for home shall be indicated 
by a scattered bunch of paper different in color from 
that used on the trail. 

15. Touching one of the hares by any member of the 
pack shall constitute a catch. 

16. If the hares do not finish together, the time of the 
last hare in shall be considered the time of their 
arrival. 

17. A slow pack may be started at the discretion of 
the captain in all runs and chases (except for prizes) 
under the control of a master and two whips. A start 
of one minute for each mile estimated to be covered 
shall be allowed by the fast pack. 

COMPETITIONS. 

18. In all runs or chases where there is a race, handi- 



OFFICIAIi SPORTING RUIiES. 241 

cap or otherwise, from the break to a specified finish 
the pack must be lined up by the master and started bv 
him. ^ 

19. In all runs or chases, where order of finish counts 
for points or prizes, it shall be the duty of the master to 
report any disobedience on the part of any member of 
the pack to the proper authority of the Club under 
whose auspices the chase is being conducted, and it 
shall be in the discretion of such authority to disqualify 
the delinquent or nulhfy the points gained. 

20. In all open competitions or races from start to 
finish the man arriving first at any obstacles shall have 
the right of way ; any other contestant pushing or 
interfering with him shall be guilty of a foul and liable 
to disqualification by the referee. 

21. The referee shall also have power to disqualify any 
person proved to have deviated from the trail in any 
competition, or any one who has been aided by any 
horse or vehicle on the route. 

22. All handicaps shall be by time allowance at the 
commencement of the race, with the exception of yacht 
handicaps in which all contestants start together, their 
time allowance being taken into account at the finish. 

OFFICIALS. 

The Cross-Country Championships of this Associa- 
tion shall be under the direction of 

One Referee. 

Three Judges at finish, or more. 

Six Distance Judges, or more. 

Three Time-keepers, or more. 

Three Scorers, or more. 

One Starter. 

One Clerk of the Course and Assistants. 

One Marshal and Assistants. 

One Official Reporter and such other officials as the 
Executive Committee see fit to appoint. 



242 ornciAii sporting rules. 



FOOT BALL RULES. 

The Official Foot Ball Kules of the American Intercolle- 
giate Association are subject to changes each year and are 
published exclusively by A. G. Spalding & Bros., Chicago. 
New York and Philadelphia, in pamphlet form, and will he 
sent to any address in the United States or Canada on 
receipt of 10 cents. 



BASE BALL. 

The rules are published annually by A. G. Spalding & 
Bros., Chicago, New York and Philadelphia, in Spalding's 
Official Base Ball Guide^ and as they are changed each 
year, they are not published in this volume. The Base 
Ball Kules will be sent to any address on receipt of 10 cents. 




Appliances for Out-Door Athletics- 

16 LB. HAMHERS, 

Lead and iron, made according to A. A. U. 
Rules, also Hammer Handles. 

56 LB. WEIGHT, 

Lead and Iron, made according to tlie 
rules of the A. A. IT., with the famous Mitchell 
Handle. 

SHOTS, 

For putting the shot, all weights, lead and iron. The Reg- 
ulation A. A. I). 16 lb. Shot always in stock. 

IRON CIRCLE, 

7 feet in circumference, for throwing weights and putting 
sliot. Also Regulation TOE BOAKDS, for sliot putting. 

JUMPING UPRIGHTS, 

CROSS BARS AND 

VAULTING POLES. 

Spalding's Special Marker for makei 
handicaps. 

Iron Stakes with Lanes, for Sprint 

Races and Regulation finish parts. 

Steel Tapes, for measuring. Lap Bells, 
Hurdles, Combination 2-ft. 6 in. and 3-ft. 6in. 
Hurdles, easily adjusted. Can furnish indi- 
vidual ones if desired. 
Athletic Club officers should remember that all our imple- 
ments are made in accordance with the rules of the A. A. U. 
Complete Catalogue mailed on application. 




A. O. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHIOAQO. NEW YORK. PHU ADELPHIA, 



WRIGHT Sl DITSON, 



MANUFACTURERS OK 



Athletic Goods 

BASKET BALL, GOALS AND BALLS, 
GYMNASIUM GOODS AND APPLIANCES. 



UNIFORMS FOR ALL SPORTS. 



Our Illustrated Catalogue Contains a Complete List of all 

Goods Pertaining fo Athletic Sports and Pastimes, 

Mailed Free to any Address. 



WHOLESALE STORE. RETAIL STORE, 

97 Pearl Street, 344 Washins^ton St., 

BOSTON, MASS. 



SPALDING'S TRADE-MARK GOODS, 




SPALDING'S 
BASE BALL UNIFORMS. 

Our uniforms comprise the best and only 
complete line in the market. Each grade is 
kept up to the highest point of excellence, 
and we offer over forty different patterns to 
select from. Shoes not included in luiiform 
complete. 

No. O. Uniform complete 
No, I . Uniform " 

No. 2. Uniform " 

No. 3. Uniform " 

No. 4. Uniform " 
No. 5. Boy's Uniform 

Samples of Flannels and Measurement Blank 
mailed on application. 

SPALDING'S 
BASE BALL SHOES. 

All w ith plates attached. Made at our own fac- 
tory and every pair warranted for good service. 
No. OO. Kangaroo, best qual- 
ity, • . • $7.50 
No. O. Calfskin, handsewed, 

$6.00 

No. I X, I-eather, handsewed, 

$3.50 

Our Complete Catalogue Mailed Free. 

A. G. SF>ALDINa ^ BROS 



$(2.50 
lO.OO 
7.50 
5.0O 
3.50 
2.50 




CHICAGO. 



NEW YORK 



PHILADELPHIA. 



THE 



ST. liWRENGE RIVER SKIFF 




D/INQER0Q5 

position for a man weighing- 145 pounds on the gunwale of 
any boat ; but our St. Lawrence Kiver Skiffs will stand the 
test ^without upsetting the boat or taking in v/ater. No 
other malie of boat of its size will do it. If you are Inter- 
ested in 

Canoes of any kind. 

Livery and Row Boats, 

Steam Launches, 

or anything in the Boat Line, send to us for Catalogue 
and any other information desired. 

JT. LAWRENCE RIVER 

SM, Canoe Steam Launcli Go. 

CI-AYTON. N. Y. 



Russell's Improved Curling Stones 




We have much pleasure in announcing to our patrons, and the Curlers o i 
America, that we have made arrangements with Mr. J. S. Russell, of Toronto, 
Ont., for the exclusive sale in the United States of the long tried and justly 
celebrated "Russell's Improved Curling Stones." These Stones are exclusively 
used by all crack clubs in the United States and Canada, and are the most 
reliable and perfect Curling Stones in exitence. 

Ailsea Craig, without handles, . . . . $ 1 2.50 

Bkie Hones, without handles, ..... I6.00 

Red Hones, without handles, .... 18.00 
White Metal Handles, complete, with bolts and leather 

washers, ........ 3.00 

Nickel-plated Handles, complete, with bolts and leather 

washers, ........ 4.00 

Score Cards, ...... Per lOO, .50 

Send for Complete Catalogue of Fall and 
Winter Sports. Mailed Free. 



A. G. SPALDING & BROS., 



CHICAGO. 



NEW YORK. 



PHILADELPHIA. 




Sportsrpeo^s Wear 






EQUIPnBNT5. 



NO GOODS SOLD AT RETAIL where Dealers 

Carry Our Line. Ask Your Dealer for 

Barnard's Goods ; if He Cannot 

Supply You Send Direct to Us. 



Send for Catalogue. 



CEO. BARNARD & CO., 



1, 3 and 5 Bond Street, 
NEW YORK. 



199 and 201 Madison Street, 
CHICAGO. 



3FAL!:ilNQ'5 TCSDT BALL 5WEATER5. 




No. 2/0. 

No. 2/0. 'fntercollegiate" extra heavy, 
No. K. 1 irtre Sweater, .... 
No. L. " .standard " Sweater, . 
No. IVI. 'Peerless " Sweater, 
No. P. ''Columbia" Sweater, . 
No. R, "Eclipse" Sweater, . 

BOYS' SWEATER. 

No. M B. "Peerless " Junior, 
No. P B. " Columbia ' ' Junior, . 

N<j. L B, "Standard " Junior, 

SWEATER. 

No. L L. Standard Lace Sweater, 

JERSEYS. 

No. I P. Full Fashioned, Solid Colors, . 
No. I P X. Full Fashioned, Striped, . 
No. 2 P. Full Fashioned, Navy and Black, 



$3.00 
7.00 
5.00 
3.50 
4.00 
2.50 



$2.75 
3.25 
4.00 



$5.50 



$4,00 
4.50 
2.50 



^l^%% fl. Q. JJPALDIHQ & BKOy ^uJCu^kui: 



CHAMPION JAMES J. CORBETT 

USED THE 



u 



Corbctt" 

(TRADE MARK) 

Boxipg (Slovcs 

Manufactured by A. J. REACH CO., 
Tulip and Palmer Streets, Philadelphia, Pa., 

in his Fight with niTCHELL *jVnr2^5!'?8Sll^ 




The REACH 



Is on the Wrist 



An Exact Duplicate of the Gloves used by CORBETT 
will be sent upon Receipt of Price. 

Per Set, - - $7.50. 

If you cannot get them in your city, address 

A. J. REACH CO., 

Tulip and Palmer Sts., Philadelphia, Pa. 



SPALDINS'S FINE CROQUET. 

Our line of fine Croquet is superior to that of any previous season. On'y 
the best of selected materials are used in making this line, and follow pre- 
cisely the same models as in the manufacture of our professional goods 
All sets are put up in durable and handsome boxes. Mallets are all 9 inches 
in length if head, 2I4 inches thickness of head, and 24 inches length of handles 




EXPERT SETS. 

No. A. " Lakeside " Set, consisting of four No. A '•'■ Lakeside " mallets, 
made of best maple, professional model, four maple balls, good arches and 
stakes, complete in box, ..... Per set, $3,00 

No. B. '' Hyde Park " Set, consisting of four No. B " Hyde Park " mal- 
lets, made of choicest selected apple wood, handsomely polished, four rock 
maple balls, first-class arches and ornamental stakes, complete, in box, 

Per set, $5,00 

No. C. "Orange Club " Set, consisting of four No. C "Orange Club " 
mallets, made from selected Bahama wood, and handsomely polished, four 
extra quality maple balls, heavy arches and fancy turned stakes, complete, 
in handsome box, ...... Per set, $8.00 

No. D. "Staten Island" Set, consisting of four No. D "Staten Lsland" 
mallets, made from choice turkey boxwood, handsomely polished, four 
selected boxwood balls, extra heavy arches, extra ornamental fancy painted 
stakes, put up in fine polished box. The finest set of croquet ever made. 

Per set, $|2.00 

PRACTICE SETS. 

No. i. Eight ball set, flat box, hinged cover, varnished balls and covers, 
9od a ' 



good arches and stakes. Best dollar set made. . . Per set, $|.00 

No. 2. Eight ball set, 5-inch mallet heads, good stock and handsomely 

finished, ...... Per set, $1,50 

No. 3. Eight ball set, sV^-inch mallet heads, elaborately decorated, fine 

large stakes, . ..... Per set, $2.00 

No. 4. Eight ball set, 6^-incK mallet head. A beautiful set, handsomely 

painted, making a very showy set for family use, . Per set, $3.00 

Complete Catalogue of Sj>orting Goods mailed free to any adddess, 

A. G. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO. ,'. NEW YORK. .'. PHILADELPHIA. 



PECK & SNYDER, 

Corner 
BEEKHAN AND NASSAU NEW YORK. 

STREETS, 

flanufacturers of the 
Celebrated 

/iriERICflN m^m. 

ICE CLUB 5KflTE5. 

^ ^ ^ 
Complete Catalogue of 

Summer and Winter Sports, 

. . also our . . 

Trick and Novelty Catalogue, 

Embracing thousands of interesting and 
amusing novelties for the home circle. 

SENT FREE UPON /IFFLKflTION. 



^GOLFIING IMPLEMENTS 




EDINBURGH 
BALL CLEANER. 
NO.25. Edinburgh Cleaner. 
Each, $1.25 





HULBURT'S 
BALL CLEANER. 
No, 2, Hulburt Cleaner. 
Each, $ ( .00 



BALL PAINTING 
MACHINE. 
To hold Ball when repaint- 
ing same. 
No. 35. Each, - $2.50 



CADDY BAGS. 

For carrying Golf Clubs. 

No. I. Heavy Tan Waterproof 

Canvas, Sling Strap, and 

Leather Bottom and Handle. 

Each, $4.00 

No. 2. Same as No. i, with 

Pocket on side for holding ball. 

Each, $4.50 

No. 4, Same as No. i, with 
Pocket on side and removable 
hood for completely covering 
clubs when traveling. $6.00 




HOME GOLF PRESS. 

For remolding damaged balls. 

No. 30. Each, - - - $5.00 




nGOLFTer> 
; i PATENTED «j 

V J) 

\:*ious.^^^ No. 2. 

No. 1. GOLF TEES. 

Used for elevating Ball for drive from Tee or 

starting point. 

Mo. I. BIoxom'sTee, - - - Each, 25C. 

No. 2. Hall's Tee, _ . . - " QQc. 




POCKET SCORE CASES 

No. I. Leather Cover. 

Each, 50c , 
No. 2. Leather Cover, ex- 
tra quality. Each, $ | ,OC' 
Package of 12 Re-filll Cards, 



Complete Catalogue Mailed on Application. 



A. Q. 5FflLblNQ &- BR05., 



CHICAGO 



NEW YORK. 



PHBLADELPHIA, 



H GalGKI 



PATENTED 



New Patent 

Sun 

Protecting 

Mask. 




No. 4-0 Spalding's New Patented Sun Protecting Mask. 

Made of black enameled wire, with a perfect shade 

for the eyes not increasing the weight of the Mask. 

A great improvement on all other makes, Each, $5 00 
No. 3-0 Spalding's New Patented Neck Protecting 

Mask, Each, $4 00 

No. 00. Spalding's Special League Mask, used by all 

leading professional catchers, - Each, $3 50 

No. 0. Spalding's Regulation League Mask, " $3 00 

No. A. Spalding's Amateur Mask, made the same size 

and general style as the League Mask, - Each, $1 75 
No. B. Spalding's Boy's Amateur Mask, - " 150 
No. C. Youth'sMask,withoutheador chin piece, " 100 
No. B. Boy's Mask, light wire, without head or chin 

piece, ------ Each, $0 50 

No. E. Boy's Mask, light wire, without lioad or chin 

piece, ' Each, $0 25 



A. O. SPALDING & BROS., 

New York, Chicago, pHrLABELPHiA, 



SPALDING'S 
REGULATION POLO STICK 

The Spalding League Polo Stick has been adopted by 
all the leading Polo Leagues, and is the finest and best finished 
on the market. 

No. A. Spalding's League Stick, made of 
selected second growth hickory, flat handle and 
ends Each, .75 

No. B. Spalding's Standard Stick, made of 
selected material, nicely finished and flat handle 
and ends, ..... Each, .50 

No. C. Practice Polo Stick, well made and 
durable, flat handle and ends, . Each, ;25 

No. D. Junior Polo Stick, . . Each, .10 

No. E. Boy's Polo Stick, . . Each, .05 



POLO BALLS. 

No. I. Spalding's Official League Polo Ball, 
No. 2. Regulation Hockey Ball, 
No. 3. Amateur Hockey Ball. 



Each. 

$I.OO 

.50 

.25 



POLO SHIN GUARDS. 



No. 1 . Made of Canvas, 
No. 2. Made of Moleskin, 
No. 3. Made of Leather. 



Per Pair. 

$i.oo 

1.29 

I.50 



Send for our Complete Catalogue of Fall 
and Winter Sports. Mailed Free. 



A. G. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO. NEW YORK PHILADELPHIA. 




Tennis and Outins: 
Shirts. 

No. E'ch 
Finest Imported MadrM.lZOU $8 00 
Fine Quality" " 1300 J 00 

Finest Imp'td Cheviot.. 1500 8 00 
Fine quality imported 

Cheviot 1600 aoo 

Ties to match above 
shirts . M 

Oood quality, Domestic 
Cheviot 1700 log 

Medium quality .Domes- 
tic Cheviot 1800 50 

Fancy Flannel 2300 800 

'• " 2300 J CO 

Tennis and Outing 
Coats. 

Retail 

No. Each 

Finest Imported Berge..l00 •1000 

•• all wool 300 760 

" Serges 500 JOO 

Blaaers fi SCO 

White Flannal 2/0 12 00 

750 



1 

Duck ,best,all Linen IC 
" goud quality... 20 



100 
100 
40U 



Tennis and Outing Pants. 

Flne«t Imported Sorge 100 fsOO 

all-wool..... 900 6t)0 

Fancy Serges 500 4 00 

White Flannel .... 2/0 10 00 

«00 

•• •• 1 500 

a 400 

Duck, best, all linen 1 500 

" '• fo:)d quality I 860 

i:udlum" I 160 

A. C. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO, NEW YORK. PHILADELFBiAi 



LACROSSE. 




STICK". 

Flaniiery's Expert, $3 00; Double Strung, $2 25; Single Strung, fi ys* 
Second Quality, Single Strung, fi 25 ; Boys' Lacrosse, fi 00. 

FLAGS. 

Lacrosse Goal Flags, ...... per set, $5 06 

BALLS. 

Spalding's Lacrosse Ball has been adopted l)y all the leading clubs as the 
Regulation Ball. Price, each, 50 cents ; per doz., $5 00. 

FENCING GOODS. 

SWORDS. 

Imported Combat Swords, per pair, $7 50 ; Haute Rapier, per pair, $6 00; 
Wooden Fencing Swords, $2 00. 

FOILS. 

Ordinary steel blades, iron handles, per pair, ^i 50 ; Good Solingen steel 
blades, brass mounted, per pair, $2 50; Fine Solingen steel blades, brass 
mounted, per pair, «^3 50; Best Solingen steel blades, curved handles, per 

fair, $500; Ordinary steel blade, each, 50c.: Good steel blade, each, 75c.; 
ine steel blade, each, $1 00 ; Best steel blade,each, $1 50. 

MASKS. 

Plain Fencing Masks, per pair, $2 50 ; with ear protectors, per pair, ^3 00; 
with ear and forehead protectors, per pair, $4 00. Rapier Masks, per pair, 
$10 00 ; Basket Helmets, per pair, $6 00. 

Fencing Gloves, padded, without gauntlet, each, $r cxj. 

Gauntlet Glove, padded, each, $1 50. 

Plastroon, for protection of chest, $2 00. 

EQUESTRIAN POLO GOODS. 

MALLETS. 

Malacca or penang handles, $1 75 ; Balls, regulation, per doz., $3 00. 

POLO STICKS. 

Regulation and standard styles, 75c., 50c., 25c. and loc-., each. 

POLO BALLS. 

No. I. Spalding's Official League, .... each, $» 00 

No. 2. Regulation Hockey Ball, ,...." 50 

No. 3. Practice Ball, ...... "25 

Our Catalogue contains a descriptive list of every artirlt; used in games of 
Lacrosse and Polo. Mailed free to any address. 

A. C, SPALDING & BROS., 

Chicago. New York. Philadeip^iia, 



FENCING MASKS. 







No 



Face Guard. 



MASKS, ^^^ AND Face Guard. 

Per Pair. 
No. I. Fine quality Wire Mask, Face Guard only, $2,50 

No. 2. Fine quality Wire Mask, with Ear and Face Guard, 3,00 



No. 3. Fine quality Wire 
Mask, with Ear, Forehead 
and Face Guard, 

Per pair, $4.00 

No. Sy^, Same as No. 3, but 
heavier wire and very close 
mesh, extra fine quality, 

Per pair, $4.50 

hlo 3 
Ear, Forehead and Face Guard. 

HELMETS. Per Pair. 

No. 4. Rapier Helmet, heavy wire, for Bi-oadsword, 

Sabre and Foil exercise, ..... $IO.OO 

No. 5. Willow Basket Helmets, .... 6.00 

Our complete Catalogue of Spring- and Summer Sports, General Athletio 
and Gymnasium Goods Mailed Free to any address. 

A. G. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO. PHILADELPHIA. NEW YORK. 




SPALDING'S 
NFIELDERS' and BASEMANS' MITTS. 




No. 3X. Spalding's Baseman's Mitt, 
Xo. 4X. Spaldins's Baseman's Mitt, 
No. 5X. Spalding's Baseman's Mitt, 
No. XX. Spalding's Infielder's Glove, 
No. X. Spalding's Infielder's Glove, 
No. E. Spalding's Youth's Glove 
No. F. Spalding's Boys' ( ilove. 



Each, 



$3.00 
2.00 
1.50 
3.00 
2.00 
.50 
-25 



SPALDING'S BODY PROTECTORS. 

Made of best Rubber, inflated with air ; is soft and 
pliable ; will not interfere with movements of player. 



No. OO. Umpire Protector, . 
No. O. League Protectoi 
No. I , Amateur Protector, . 



Each, $ ( O.OO 

10.00 
6.00 



SPALDING'S 
SCORING TABLETS-CELLULOID, 



No. O. 

No. I. 



Umpires' Indicate 
Scoring Tablets, 



E.ich, $o.50 
.25 



SPALDSNC'S 
PITCHERS' TOE PLATES. 

Made f^r Right or T.e't Shoe. 



Price, 



$0.50 



SPALDING'S SHOE PLATES. 



No. 

2/0. Hand Forged Heel Plates 

O. Hand Forged Toe Plates 

I . Professional Steel Plates, 

2! Amateur Steel Plates, . 

3 J Professional Heel Plates, 

11: CATALOGUE MAILED FREE. 



Per Pr . 

50c. 
50c. 
25c. 
15c. 
25c. 



A. Q. SPALDINQ & BROS., 



CHICAGO. NEWYORK = 
PHILADELPHIA, 



INDIAN CLUBS. 



We make two styles of Maple Indian Clubs. One of superb 
finish, perfect in every respect and stamped with our trade 
mark. The other of cheaper stock and linish, but stili 
better than others' best. The difference in cost to you is 
but slight, and we strongly recommend your paying the 
slight advance and securing perfection. 
Spalding's Trade Mark, Polished Maple Club, each pair 

wrapped in a paper bag. 
Weight, pounds. K K 1 13^ 2 23^ 3 4 5 
Per pair, $ .40 .45 .50 .60 .70 .75 .80 1.00 1.25 

Trade Line, not trade-marked, varnished, not polished. 
Weight, pounds, K X 1 1>^ 2 2X 3 4 5 
Per pair, $ .30 .35 .40 .45 .50 .60 .65 .90 1.15 



EXHIBITION INDIAN CLUBS. 

Made in four sizes only : 3 lb. size 
weighing from 1 lb. to 2 lbs., 5 lb. size 
weighing from 2 lbs., 7 lb. size weigh- 
ing from 3 lbs. to 4 lbs., 10 lb. size 
weighing from 4 lbs. to 5 lbs. Very 
handsomely finished with Ebonite band 
gilt beads. Just the club for exhibi- 
tion purposes. 

Size, 3 lbs. 5 lbs. 7 lbs. 10 lbs. 

Weight, about, 1 lb. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 4 lbs. 
Per pair, $2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 

Handsome Stage Club, hollow, nickel 

tips. 
4 lb. size. Per pair, - - - 6.00 



POLISHED ASH BAR BELLS. 

43^ feet long. Per dozen, $6.00 

5 " " 6.00 



A. G. SPALDINa Sc BROS., 

CHIOmtO. NEW YORK, PHILIDELPHIA, 



SPALDING'S 
Victor Wzill AVz^cbipes 





16 Lb. Weights. 
Japan Finish, ... $ 1 5.00 

Nickel-plated Plnish, I8.00 
Our No. 5 Machine has the 
Centre Arm Adjustment which 
permits of all the lower as M^ell 
as the direct and upper chest 
move m e n t s. The various 
VirrnD Mn ^ changes are made by raising or 

V 1^ I WK i^O. O. lowering the centre bar, requir- 

but a few seconds to do it. This adjustment has proven 
most useful and beneficial addition to a chest weight ever 
conceived. By its use in conjunction with the upper movements 
every muscle in the human body can be exercised. 

Our complete Catalogue of Wall Machines, Gymnasium Goods and 
Appliances mailed free to any address. 

A. a. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO. PHILADELPHIA. NEW YORK. 



mg 
the 



SPALDING'S CATCHERS' MiTTS 

No. 7/0. Spalding's Special 
League Mitt, made of finest 
buckskin, lieavily padded, lace 
back, . . . $7.00 

No. S/0. Spalding's Professional 
Mitt, Kennedy Patent, lace back 
and thumb, . $8.00 

No. 6/0. Spalding's University 
Mitt, Morrill Style, heavily 
padded, . . . $6.00 

No. 5/0. Spalding's League Mitt, 
made of fine pecarea hogskin, 
lace back, . . $5.00 

No. OX. Spalding's Decker Pat- 
ent Mitt, leather protector and 
lace back, . . . $3.50 

No. O. Spalding's Mitt, same 

as No. OX, without leather back 

protector, . . $3.00 

A. Spalding's Amateiir Miit, well padded, lace back, 

$2.00 
No. 3. Spalding's Practice Mitt, buckskin, lace backed, 

$ 1 .00 

BOYS' MITTS. 

No. OX3. Spalding's Boys' Decker Mitt, same as our No, OX, 
in small size, ........ $2.00 

No. 2. Spalding's P)oys' Mitt, heavily padded and well fin- 
ished, $1.50 

No. 4. Spalding's Boys' Mitt, nicely padded, with lace 
back, ' ' . . . 5CC. 

No. 5. Spalding's Boys' Mitt, .... 25c. 




Complete Catalog".e Mailed Free to any Address. 



A. G. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO. NEW YORK. PHILADELPHIA. 



COLUMBIA CLUB LEVER. 




The Columbia Club Lever Skates are made of the best material, and the work- 
manship and finish are first-class. The style of fastening is too 
well known to need any description. 

PER PAIR. 

No. X. Runners best rolled cast steel, bright finish, sizes 8 to 12 in., 50C. 
No. XX. Same as No. X, full nickel-plated, sizes 8 to 12 in., . . $ 1 .OO 

AMERICAN CLUB SKATES. 

With Self-Locking Lever and Adjustable Heel and Toe Clamps. 




No. O. American Club is of the best cast steel, with blue steel foot 

rests and clamps, ..... Per pair, $ | .OO 

No. 00. American Club is of the best cast steel, with steel foot rests 

and clamps, nicely electro-nickel-plated throughout, Per pair, | ,50 

No. I , American Club, with welded temper and polished steel blades 

and blue steel foot rests and clamps, . . Per pair, 2.50 

No. 2. American Club, with welded temper and polished steel 
blades. Foot rests and clamps are "templed," bright instead of 
being blued, and entire skate is electro-nickel-plated, making it 
very handsome, and acts as a preventitive against rust. Per pair, 3.00 

No. 4, American Club is the finest finished skate made. Each 
part, before being put together, is highly polished and nickel- 
plated, ....... Per pair, 5.00 



SEND FOR COMPLETE CATALOGUE. 



A. C. SPALDING & BROS., 

CHICAGO: NEW YORK: PHILADFLPHI A. 



SPALDING'S 

BASKET BALL (SOAL 



FOR IN OR OUTDOOR USE. 




by pulling cord inside 
place, Price Complete 



Made in accordance with the 
lates rules governing the game 
and the most substantial goal 
in use. Made entirely of 
wrought iron and hea%y wire 
The ball is released from basket 
and returns automatically to 
$20.00. 




SPALDING'S 
REGULATION BASKET BALL. 

Fine Leather Cover and best Red Para 

Rubber Bladder. 
No. 5 A. Basket Ball, . . $4.00. 
No. 5 B. Best all Rubber Ball. 1.25.' 



Our Complete Illustrated Catalogue Mailed Free to any Address. 



A. Q. 5FflLDINQ 6^ BR05., 



NEW YORK. 



PHILADELPHIA. 



CHICAGO. 



SPALDING'S ATHLETIC LIBRARY. 

Published rionthly. Each Number Complete. 

Devoted to all kinds of Sports. 



IN^o. 1. liife and Battles of James J. Corbett. 

No. 3. Indian Clubs and Dumb Bells. By J. H. DOUGHERTY, 

Amateur Champion of America. 

;No. 3. Bowling. By A. E. Vogell. Containing instructions how to 
Bowl , How to Score, How to Handicap. 

No. 4. Boxing. This book is without doubt the most valuable manual 
of its kind ever published. It is fully Illustrated. 

No. 5. Gymnastics. By ROBERT Stoll, N. Y. A. C, America's Champ- 
ion on the Flying Kings since 1885. 

No. 6. Lawn Tennis. By O. S, CAMPBELL, Champion Player of 
America. Valuable for beginners as well as experts; rules of the game 
complete. 

No. 7. Base Ball. By Walter Camp, Specially adapted for Colleges 
and preparatory schools. Complete history of college base ball. 

No. 8. Golf. By. J. Stuart Balfour, Containing List of Implements 
and their uses, Glossary of Technical Terms and Latest Revised Rules 
of the Game. 

No. 9. Athletes' Guide. Articles on Training, by H. S. Cornish ; 
How to Train for Distance Running, by T. P. ConnetT; Sprinting, by 
Harry Jewett; Throwing Weights, by James Mitchel; Walking, by 
S. Llebgold; Jumping, Hurdling, Pole Vaulting, by A. A. Jordan; and 
Rules for the Government of Athletic Games. 

No. lO. Croquet. Official Rules of the Game as adopted by the National 
Croquet Association. 

No. 11. Spalding's Official Foot Ball Guide and Referee's 
Book. Revised by Walter Camp. Authorized and adopted by the 
American Intercollegiate Association. 

No. IZ. Gaelic and Association Foot Bail. Complete Methods 
and Rules of each Game. 

No. 13. Hand Ball. How to Play it. Rules and Definitions, Regu- 
lation Court and its Construction, with other interesting matter. 

No. 14. Curling, Hockey and Polo. Rules governing each game, 
and other valuable information. 

No. J 6. Indoor Base Ball Guide. Complete Illustrations for Play- 
ing, with Description of Game. 

No. 16. Skating. History o( Skating, from earliest appearance to the 
present day, to which is added a list of the most authentic I'ecords. 

No. 17. Basket Ball. Latest Revised Rules, Avith diagrams showing 
position of Players, etc. 

No. 18. Fencing. Complete Manual of Foil and Sabre, according to 
the methods of the best modern schooL 

EACH, POSTPAID, 10 CENTS. 



AMERICAN SPORTS PUBLISHING CO, 

241 Brozidw^yt M^w YorH. 



THE 



ADOPTED BY THE 

National League and American Association 

Of Professional Base Ball Chibs. 




No 



J. The Spalding League BalF, as adopted by the Nationai. 
J^EACii-E rind American Association for the seasons of 92, g3, 
'«^4i 'qs and 'q6, and jised by the National League for the past 



'gs ana \6, and jised by the National League for the past 
16 years. Each ball wrapped in tinfoil and put in a separata 
IjOx, as represented in the illustration, and sealed in accordance 
v.ith the regulations of the National League and American As- 
S)ciation. Warranted to Jabt a full gaiue without ripping or ios» 
ing Its elasticity ot sU^pCi 
Price, - ' « • - Each, $1.90 



